SHOP MANUAL

CASE/INTERNATIONAL
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275

The tractor model number and product identification

(seriai) number is on a plate iocated on the right side of
the front frame raii. The engine seriai number is stamped
into the injection pump mounting pad on right side of
engine. Serial number of the ROPS (Roii Over Protective
Structure) is iocated on right side of structure. On some
modeis, the transmission seriai number is stamped into
the right of case.

INDEX (By Starting Paragraph)

Models
235 235H 245 255 265 275
BRAKES
Adjustment 194 194 194 194 194 194
Operation 193 193 193 193 193 193
R&R and Overhaul 195 195 195 195 196 197

CLUTCH
Clutch Linkage
All Models Without Live Pto 112 112 112 112 112 112
Models Witli Live Pto 113 113 113 113 113 113
Clutch Split 115 115 116 116 115 117
Cover, Pressure Plate and Disc 118 118 118 118 118 118

COOLING SYSITEM
Belt 105 105 105 105 105 105
Radiator 103 103 103 103 103 103
Thermostat 104 104 104 104 104 104
Water Pump 106 106 106 106 106 106

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel Filter and Lines 89 89 89 89 89 89
Fuel Shut-Off Solenoid 102 102 102 102 102 102
Glow Plugs 101 101 101 101 101 101
Grovemor and Injection Pump Camshaft 94 94 94 94 94 94
Injection Pump 91 91 91 91 91 91
Injector Nozzles 96 96 96 96 96 96

DIFFERENTLSkL 186 186 186 186 186 186

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Alternator and Regulator 107 107 107 107 107 107
Circuit Description 110 110 110 110 110 110
Safety Switches 109 109 109 109 109 109
Starting Motor 108 108 108 108 108 108
 INDEX (CONT.)
Models
235 235H 245 255 265 27{
ENGINE
Cam Followers 74 74 74 74 74 74
Camshaft 78 78 78 78 78 78
Connecting Rods and Bearings 81 81 81 81 81 81
Crankshaft and Main Bearings 82 82 82 82 82 82
Crankshaft Seals 83 83 83 83 83 83
Cylinder Head 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flywheel 85 85 85 85 85 85
Maintenance. 64 64 64 64 64 64
Oil Pan 87 87 87 87 87 87
Oil Pump 86 86 86 86 86 86
Pistons, Cylinder Block and Rings 80 80 80 80 80 80
R&R Engine Assembly 68 68 68 68 68 68
Rocker Arms and Push Rods 73 73 73 73 73 73
Rod and Piston Units 79 79 79 79 79 79
Timing Gears 75 75 75 75 75 75
Timing Gear Cover 77 77 11 11 77 77
Valve Clearance . 70 70 70 70 70 70
Valve Springs 72 72 72 72 72 72
Valves, Guides and Seats 71 71 71 71 71 71

FINAL DRIVE 187 187 187 187 189 191

FRONT AXLE SYSTEM (TWO-WHEEL DRIVE)

Axle Main Member 9 9 10 10 11 12
Spindles and Bushings 5 5 6 6 7 8
Steering Bellcrank ... 15
Tie Rod and Toe-In 2 2 4 2 3 4
Tires, Wheels and Bearings 1 1 1 1 1 1
Tread Adjustment and Drag Link
Non-Adjustable Axle 13 13 14 14 14 14

FRONT-WHEEL-DRIVE SYSTEM 16 16 25 25 34
Axle and Steering Linkage 18 18 27 27 36
Differential 23 23 32 32 ... 41
Differential Bevel Pinion 22 22 31 31 40
Front Drive Spindles and Inner Axles 21 21 30 30 ... 39
Front Final Drives and Wheel Axles 20 20 29 29 ... 38
Front Wheel Drive 24 24 33 33 ... 42
Maintenance 17 17 26 26 ... 35

HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM

Auxiliary Valve 216 216 216 216 216 216
Fluid and Filters 202 202 202 202 202 202
Hydraulic Pump 212 212 212 212 212 212
Lift Cover 214 214 214 214 214 214
Troubleshooting 203 203 203 203 203 203
Tests and Adjustments 204 204 205 205 209 211

MANUAL STEERING SYSTEM 44 44 44 44 47 50

POWER STEERING SYSTEM 54 54 57 60

6
 INDEX (CONT.)
Models
235 235H 245 255 265 275
POWER TAKE OFF 199 199 200 200 200 199

TRANSMISSION (235H HYDROSTATIC)

Hydrostatic Unit 181
Lubrication. 175 ... ... ... ...
Overhaul 182 .* ...
Range Transmission 183 ... ... ... ...
Tests and Adjustments 177 ... ...
Troubleshooting 176

TRANSMISSION (235 SLIDING GEAR)

Inspection 120
Lubrication 121
Overhaul 123
Remove and Reinstall 122

TRANSMISSION (245, 255 AND 265 CONSTANT MESH)

Inspection 133 133 133
Lubrication 134 134 134 ...
Overhaul 136 136 136
Remove and Reinstall 135 135 135 ...

TRANSMISSllON (245, 255 AND 265 SYNCHROMESH)

Inspection 144 144 144
Lubrication 145 145 145 ...
Overhaul 147 147 147 ...
Range Transmission 155 155 155 ...
Remove and Reinstall 146 146 146 ...

TRANSMISSl ON (275 MODEL)

Hydraulic Clutch 171
Inspection .... ... ... 161
Lubrication ... ... ... 162
Overhaul ... ... 166
Remove and Reinstall . 163

DUAL DIMENSIONS
This service manual provides specifications in both U.S. Customary and Metric (SI) systems of
measurement. The first specification is given in the measuring system perceived by us to be the
preferred system when servicing a particular component, while the second specification (given in
parenthesis) is the converted measurement. For instance, a specification of 0.011 inch (0.28 mm)
would indicate that we feel the preferred measurement in this instance is the U.S. Customary system
of measiurement and the Metric equivalent of 0.011 inch is 0.28 mm.
 CONDENSED SERVICE DATA
235, 235H 245
Models
255 265 275
i
GENERAL
Engine Make -Mitsubishi
Engine Model K3B K3D K3E K3H K3M
Number of Cylinders 3
Bore 68 mm 73 mm 76 mm 78 mm 84 mm
(2.677 in.) (2.874 in.) (2.992 in.) (3.071 in.) (3.307 in.)
Stroke 78 mm 90 mm
(3.071 in.) (3.543 in.)
Displacement 849 cc 979 cc 1061 cc 1290 cc 1496 cc
(51.81 cu.in.) (59.74 cu.in.) (64.75 cu.in.) (78.72 cu.in.) (91.29 cu.in.)
Compression Ratio 23:1

TXJNE-UP
Firing Order 1-3-2
Valve Clearance, Cold
Inlet -0.25 mm -
(0.010 in.)
Exhaust -0.25 mm -
(0.010 in.)
Valve Face and Seat Angle
Inlet 45
Exhaust 45
Injector
Opening Pressure -10,789-12,749 kPa
(1565-1849 psi)
14,714-16,672 kPa
(2134-2418 psi)
i
Engine Low Idle 900-950-
Engine High Idle -2825-2900- 2825-2880
Engine Rated Speed 2700 2700 2800 2700 2700
Battery
Voltage 12
Ground Negative
Transmission
Types Available t
Speeds
Sliding gear , 6F-2R
Hydrostatic , Variable x 2
Constant mesh -9F-3R
S3nic -9F - 3R-

SIZES
Crankshaft Main Journal
Diameter -52 mm- 57 mm
(2.0472 in.) (2.44 in.)
Crankshaft Crankpin
Diameter 42 mm- 48 mm
(1.6535 in.) (1.890 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter 19 mm 23 mm
(0.905 in.) (0.905 in.)
Valve Stem Diameter 6.6 mm - 8.0 mm-
(0.2598 in.) (0.3150 in.)

8
 CONDENSED SERVICE DATA (CONT.)
Models
235,235H 245 255 265 275
CLEARANCES
Main Bearing, Diametral
Clearance, Miiximum - 0.1 mm
(0.004 in.)
Rod Bearing D iametral
Clearance, Miaximum 0.15 mm -
(0.006 in.)
Camshaft Bearing, Diametral
Clearance, Maximum
Front 0.15 mm -
(0.006 in.)
Crankshaft End Play,
Maximum 0.1 mm
(0.004 in.)

CAPACITIES
Cooling System 6L -5.3 L - 5.8 L 6L
(6.34 qt.) (5.6 qt.) (6.1 qt.)
( (6 .34 qt.)
Crankcase
1 7
With Filter 3.5 L - 4.5 L - t, 1

(3.70 qt.) (4.8 qt.) (5 .0 qt.)

Transmission
Constant Mesh 20 L- 46 L
(5.3 gal.) (12.2 gal.)
Sliding Gear 12 L
(3.17 gal.)
Synchronized 25 L- 46 L #
(6.6 gal.) (12.2 gal.)
Hydrostatic 14 L
(3.70 gal.)
Front Drive Axle 2.5 L -3.5L- 7.3 L
(2.6 qt.) (3.7 qt.) (7.7 qt.)

* Model 235 is equipped with a sliding gear transmission and 235H model is equipped with a hydrostatic
transmission. Both the sliding gear transmission and the variable speed (F/R) hydrostatic transmission are
coupled to a two speed, range transmission.
t Models 245, 255 and 265 may be equipped with either a constant mesh transmission or a synchromesh
transmission. Both constant mesh and synchromesh transmissions are coupled to a three speed range
transmission, which provide 9 forward and 3 reverse speeds. The constant mesh trguismission is used without
live pto; the synchromesh transmission is used with live pto.
t Model 275 tractors are equipped with a three forward and 1 reverse speed S3nichromesh transmission coupled
to a three speed range transmission, which provides 9 forward and 3 reverse speeds.
# On 275 models, capacity of the gear transmission is 6.5 L (1.7 gal.), capacity of the range transmission is 19 L
(5.0 gal.), and capacity of the rear axle gear case is 3 L (0.8 gal.) for each side.

9
 Paragraph 1 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

FRONT AXLE SYSTEM

(TWO-WHEEL DRIVE)
TIRES, WHEELS AND BEARINGS
All Two-Wheel-Drive Models
1, The front wheel bearings should be removed,
cleaned, inspected and renewed or repacked with
grease every 1000 hours of operation. % remove front
wheel hub and bearings, raise and support the front
axle, unbolt and remove the tire and wheel assembly,
then remove cap (1Fig. 1 or Fig. 2). On 235 and
235H models, straighten locking washer (3Fig. 1),
then remove nut (2) and lockwasher. On all except
235 and 235H niodels, reinove cotter pin, castellated
nut (2Fig. 2), and washer (3). On all models, use a
suitable puller to remove t;he hub assembly from
spindle axle shaft. Seal (3Fig. 1 or Fig. 2) and inner
bearing (6) will remain on spindle. Pack wheel bear-
ings liberally with a suitable wheel bearing grease,
such as Case IH 25 X HEP.
Reassemble by reversing disassembly procedure.
On 235 and 235H models, install new locking washer
(3Fig. 1) and tighten nut (2) to 39-58 N.m (28-43
ft.-lbs.) torque, loosen nut until the rolling torque of
wheel hub (5) is 0.6-0.8 N.m (6-7 in.-lbs.), then lock
position of nut with tab of locking washer (3) and
install cap (1). Tighten bolts retaining front wheel to
hub to 118-132 N.m (87-98 ft.-lbs.) torque.
On all except 235 and 235H models, tighten castel-
lated nut (2Fig. 2) to 39-58 N.m (28-43 ft.-lbs.)
torque, loosen nut until the rolling torque of wheel
hub (5) is 0.6-0.8 N.m (6-7 in.-lbs.), then lock position
of nut with cotter pin and install cap (1). Tighten bolts
retaining front wheel to hub to 83-93 N.m (61-69
ft.-lbs.) torque.
Rear wheel to axle hub bolts and rear axle stud nuts
for 235 and 235H models should he tightened to
118-132 N.m (87-98 ft.-lhs.) torque. On 245, 255 and
275 models, the rear wheel to axle huh bolts should
be tightened to 118-132 N.m (87-98 fb.-lbs.) torque
and nuts securing rear wheel rim to wheel disc should
he tightened to 152-172 N.m (112-127 ft.-lhs.) torque.
Rear wheel disc to axle huh and rear wheel rim to
wheel disc nuts should be tightened to 152-172 N.m
(112-127 fb.-lbs.) torque for 265 models.
On all models, lug bolt torque for all wheels should
be checked after the first 10 hours of operation follow-
ing installation and every 100 hours thereafter. |

25

Fig. I^Exploded view of front axie used

on 235 models. Drag lini( (26) attaches to
arm (17) and tie rod connects arms at-
tached to tiie spindies (10 & 22).
1. Cap 15. Seal
2. Nut 16. Washer
3. Tab washer 17. Steering arm
4. Outer ball bearing 19. Axle main member
5. Wheel hub 20. Nut
6. Inner ball bearing 21. Axle pivot
7. Spacer 22. Right spindle
8. Seal 23. Nut
10. Left spindle 24. Washer
11. "O" ring 25. Front frame
12. Spacer 26. Drag link
13. Thrust bearing 27. Nut
14. Bushings 28. Steering arm

10
MODELS 23j>, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 1 (Cont.)

Some wheels can be reversed to change tread width Max. Inflation Pressure 160 kPa (24 psi)
on some tracto]r models, but certain wheels should Rim size 6.001-10
only be installed one way and should not be reversed. Rear
Check with wheel or tractor manufacturer if proper Tire size 8-16-4 ply
installation method is not known. Refer to the follow- Tread type FSLH
ing specifications for recommended inflation pres- Max. Inflation Pressure 100 kPa (14 psi)
sures. Actual air pressure should be adjusted to Rim size W6-16
conform to the load on the tire and ground condition. Tire size 8-18-4 ply
Tread type FSLH
Max. Inflation Pressure . 83-159 kPa (12-23 psi)
Two-Wheel Drive 235 and 235H Rim size W6-18
Front Tire size 9.5-18-4 ply
Tire size 18 x 7.00-8-4 ply Tread type FD
Tread type PD (G2)
Max. Inflation Pressure . 83-138 kPa (12-20 psi)
Max. Inflation Pressure 200 kPa (28 psi)
Rim size W8-18
Rim size 5.50-8
Tire size 4.00-9-4 ply
Tread type F2 Two-Wheel Drive 245 and 255
Max. Inflation Pressure 320 kPa (46 psi) Front
Rim size 3.00D-9DT Tire size 20 x 8.00-10-4 ply
Tire size 4.50-10-4 ply Tread type PD
Tread type FSR Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi)
Max. Inflation Pressure 300 kPa (42 psi) Rim size 6.001 x lODT
Rim size 3.00D-10 Tire size 24 x 8.50-14-4 ply
Tire size 5.00-10-4 ply TVead type PDl
Tread type FSR Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi)
Max. Inflation Pressure 280 kPa (40 psi) Rim size 7JA-14
Rim size 3.00D-10 Tire size 4.00-15-4 ply
Tire size 20 x 8.00-10-4 ply Tread type F2
Tread type . . . PD (G2) Max. Inflation Pressure 360 kPa (52 psi)

25
Fig. 2Exploded view of front axie
typicai of some 245 and 255 modeis.
Refer to Fig. 3 for modeis witti adjust-
abie tread axie. Upper steering arms,
drag iinii and reiated parts for non-ad-
Justabie axie are simiiar to those
siiown in Fig. 3.
1. Cap 16. Woodruff key
2. Nut 18. "O" ring
3. Washer (25 mm)
4. Outer ball 19. Axle main
bearing ^ member
5. Wheel hub 20. Screws
6. Inner ball 21. Axle pivot
bearing 25. Front frame
8. Seal 29. Collar
9. Gasket 30. Shims
10. Left spindle 31. Washer
11. " C r i n g (38 mm) 32. "O" rings
13. Thrust bearing (25 mm)
14. Bushings 33. Bushings

11
Paragraph 2 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Rim size 3.00D x 15 Tread type AG
Tire size 5.00-15-4 ply Max. Inflation Pressure 255 kPa (37 psi) i
Tread type F2 Rim size 3.00D x 15 I
Max. Inflation Pressure 300 kPa (44 psi) Tire size 5.90-15-4 ply ^
Rim size 3.00D x 15 Tread type ES
Tire size 5.90-15-4 ply Max. Inflation Pressure 215 kPa (31 psi)
Tread type FI2 Rim size 4.00E x 15DC j
Max. Inflation Pressure 245 kPa (36 psi) Tire size 212/80D15-4 ply
Rim size 4.00E-15 Tread type PDl ^
Rear Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi)
Tire size 13.6-16-4 ply Rim size 7JA x 15
Tread type PDl Tire size 27 x 8.50-15-4 ply
Max. Inflation Pressure. 75-100 kPa (11-14 psi) Tread type G2
Rim size W12 x 16 Max. Inflation Pressure 205 kPa (30 psi)
Tire size 9.5-24-4 ply Rim size 7JA x 15
Tread type Rl Tire size 5.50-16-4 ply
Max. Inflation Pressure. 85-135 kPa (12-20 psi) Tread type F2
Rim size W7 x 24 Max. Inflation Pressure 275 kPa (40 psi)
Tire size 11.2-24-4 ply Rim size 4.00E x 16
Tread type Rl Tire size 6.00-16-4 ply
Max. Inflation Pressure. 85-125 kPa (12-18 psi) Tread type F2
Rim size W9-24 Max. Inflation Pressure 250 kPa (36 psi)
Rim size 4.00 x 16
Two-Wheel Drive 265 Rear
Front Tire size 18.4-16.1-4 ply
Tire size 24 x 8.50-14-4 ply Tread type G2
Tread type PDl Max. Inflation Pressure 85 kPa (12 psi)
Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi) Rim size 16 LB x 16.1
Rim size 7JA-14 Tire size 355/80D20-4 ply
Tire size 5.50-16-4 ply Tread type PDl
Tread type F2 Max. Inflation Pressure . . 70-95 kPa (10-14 psi)
Max. Inflation Pressure 275 kPa (40 psi) Rim size W l l x 20
Rim size 4.00E-16 Tire size 11.2/10-24-4 ply
Rear Tread type ES
Tire size 355/80D20-4 ply Max. Inflation Pressure . . . . . . 115 kPa (17 psi)
Tread type PDl Rim size W9 x 24
Max. Inflation Pressure. 70-100 kPa (10-14 psi) Tire size 12.4-24-4 ply
Rim size Wll-20 Tread type Rl
Tire size . 12.4-24-4 ply Max. Inflation Pressure . 85-110 kPa (12-16 psi)
Tread type Rl Rim size WIO x 24
Max. Inflation Pressure. 85-110 kPa (12-16 psi) Tire size 13.6-24-4 ply
Rim size WlO-24 Tread type Rl
Tire size 11.2-28-4 ply Max. Inflation Pressure 95 kPa (14 psi)
Tread type Rl Rim size W l l x 24
Max. Inflation Pressure. 85-125 kPa (12-18 psi)
Rim size WlO-28
Tire size 11.2-36-4 ply
Tread type Rl TIE ROD AND TOE-IN
Max. Inflation Pressure. 85-125 kPa (12-18 psi)
Rim size WlO-36 Two Wheel Drive 235, 235H, 245 And 255
Models
Two-Wheel Drive 275
Front 2. A single tie rod connects left and right steering
Tire size . 24 x 8.50-14-4 ply arms of spindles (10 and 22Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig.
Tread type PDl 3) for 235, 235H, 245 and 255 models. Automotive
Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi) type ends are not adjustable for wear and should be
Rim size 7JA x 14 renewed if worn. Tighten nuts attaching tie rod ends
Tire size 5.00-15-4 ply to steering arms to 59-88 N.m (43-65 ft.-lbs.) torque.

12
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 3-4

Fig. 3Exploded view of adjustable axle

used on some 245 and 255 models.
10. Left spindle 31- Washer
11. "O" ring 32. "O" ring
13. Thrust bearing 33. Bushing
14. Bushing 34. Axle extension
17. Steering arm 35. Right steering
18. "O" ring arm
19. Axle main 36. Tie rod outer tube
naember 37. Pin
22. Right spindle 38. Clamp
26. Drag link 39. Inner tie rod
27. Nut 40. Locknut
28. Steering arm 41. Rod end

10-

Rod ends tlireaded into tie rod are used to adjust
the distance between ends and establish front wheel
toe-in. Recon:Lmended toe-in is 4-8 mm (^/i6-^/l6 in.)
and should he measured between wheel rims on cen-
terline of axle, parallel to ground. Rotate wheels and
re-measure tc be sure that wheels are not bent, giving
incorrect reading. Tighten rod end jam nut (40Fig.
3) to 59-88 N.m (43-65 ft.-lbs.) torque after toe-in is
correctly set. Bolt for clamps (38) should be tightened
to 25-29 N.m (18-22 ft.lbs.) torque. Holes in tie rod
tubes, pins (37) and clamps (38) are used to adjust
length of tie rods when changing width of adjustable
axle as outlined in paragraph 14.
Two Wheel Drive 265 Model
3. On 265 models, one tie rod connects left steering
arm (17Fig. 4) to steering arm (28) and a second tie
rod connects right steering arm (35). Automotive type
ends are not adjustable for wear and should be re-
newed if worn. Holes for clamp bolts (37) in tie rods
are used to adjust length of tie rods when changing
adjustable axle width. It is important that both tie
rods be adjusted to the same width and that width
corresponds to the axle width. Refer to paragraph 14
when changing axle width.
Rod ends (41) threaded into left side tie rod are
used to change distance between ends and make fine
adjustments to the front wheel toe-in. Tie rod end
threaded into outer tube has left hand thread, per-
mitting adjustment by turning tubes after loosening
the rod end locknuts. Recommended toe-in is 4-8 mm
(3/16-5/^6 in.) and should be measured between wheel
rims on centerline of axle, parallel to ground. Rotate
wheels and re-measure to be sure that wheels are not
bent, giving incorrect reading. Tighten rod end jam
nuts (40) to 59-88 N.m (43-65 ft.-lbs.) torque after
toe-in is correctly set.
Two Wheel Drive 275 Model
4. On 275 models, one tie rod connects left steering
arm and spindle (10Fig. 5) to the bellcrank (47
Fig. 6) and a second tie rod connects right steering
arm. Automotive type ends are not adjustable for
wear and should be renewed if worn. Rod ends (41)
threaded into right side tie rod are used to adjust the
distance between ends and establish front wheel toe-
in. Tie rod end threaded into outer tube has left hand
thread. Recommended toe-in is 4-8 mm (Vi6-^/i6 in.)
and should be measured between wheel rims on cen-
terline of axle, parallel to ground. Rotate wheels and
re-measure to be sure that wheels are not bent, giving

13
Paragraph 5 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

incorrect reading. Tighten rod end jam nut (40) to SPINDLES AND BUSHINGS
59-88 N.m (43-65 fl.-lbs.) torque after toe-in is cor-
rectly set. Holes for clamp bolts (37) in tie rod are used
to adjust length of tie rods when changing adjustable Two Wheel Drive 235 Model i
axle width. Clamp bolts (37) should be tightened to 5. To remove spindle (10Fig. 1) from left side, first
29-34 N.m (22-25 ft.-lbs.) torque. raise and support axle on left side, then remove wheel

Fig. 4Exploded view of adjustable axle

used on 265 models. Axle Is offset to right
side of engine centeriine.
10. Left spindle 25. Front frame
11. "O" ring 27. Nut
12. Spacer 28. Steering arm
13. Thrust bearing 31. Washer
14. Bushings 32. "O" rings (29 mm)
15. Seal 33. Bushings
16. WoodrufFkeys 34. Axle extension
17. Left steering arm 35. Right steering arm
19, Axle main member 36. Tie rod outer tube
20. Pivot pin 37. Tie rod clamp bolt
retaining screw 39. Inner tie rod
21. Axle pivot 40. Locknut
22, Right spindle 41. Rod end

i
14
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 5 (Cont.)

Fig. 5Expioded view of adjustfibiB axie

used on 275 modeis.
10. Left spindle
11. "0" ring (42 mm)
13. Thrust bearing
14. Bushings
18. "O" ring (29 mm)
19. Axle main member
). 21. Axle pivot
22. Right spindle
23. Collar
24. Spring pin
25. Front frame
31. Wanher
32. "O" rings (29 mm)
33. Bushings
34. Axle extension
42. Axle pivot brackets

Fig. 6Expioded view of steering iiniC'

age for 275 modeis. Shaft (48) is part of
front frame (25Fig. 5).
10. Left spindle
22. Right spindle
26. Drag link
27. Nut
28. Steering arm
36. Tie rod outer tube
37. Tie rod clamp bolt
39. Inner tie rod
40. Locknut
41. Rod end
43. Nut
44. Spacer (5 mm)
45. Sealing rings (30 mm)
46. Bushings
47. Bellcrank
48. Bellcrank shaft

15
 Paragraphs 6-9
and hub. Detach drag link (26) from upper steering
arm (17) and tie rod from lower steering arm of
spindle (10). Remove clamp bolt attaching upper
steering arm (17), then pull steering arm from spin-
dle. Remove washer (16) and seal (15) from top and
withdraw spindle (10), thrust bearing (13) and spacer
(12) from bottom.
TD remove spindle (22) from right side, first raise
and support axle on right side, then remove wheel
and bub. Detach tie rod from lower steering arm of
spindle (22), remove cotter pin and nut (23), then
lower spindle from bearings.
Clean and inspect parts for wear or other damage
and renew as necessary. Inside diameter of installed
bushings (14) should be 25.040-25.073 mm (0.9858-
0.9871 in.) and outside diameter of spindle should be
24.947-24.980 mm (0.9822-0.9835 in.).
Assemble by reversing removal procedure. Grease
thrust bearing (13), coat "O" ring (11) with grease and
coat bushing surface of spindle with oil before assem-
bling. On left side, lubricate seal (15) and assemble
seal, washer and upper steering arm (17). Install
steering arm with hole for clamp bolt aligned with
notch in spindle. Gap between steering arm and
washer should be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) and
clamp bolt should be tightened to 21-29 N.m (15-21
fl.-lbs.) torque. Assemble spindle on right side using
similar procedure. Tighten nut (23) to 44-53 N.m
(33-40 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to paragraph 1 for assem-
bling wheel hub and to paragraph 2 for toe-in adjust-
ment.
Two Wheel Drive 245 And 255 Models
6. TD remove either spindle (10 or 22Fig. 3), first
raise and support axle, then remove wheel and hub.
Detach tie rod from steering arm (17 or 35) and drag
link (26) from left steering arm (17), if left spindle is
being removed. Remove clamp bolt attaching steering
arm to spindle, then pull steering arm from spindle.
Remove seal (18) from top and withdraw spindle (10),
tbnist bearing (13) and "O" ring (11) from bottom.
Clean and inspect parts for wear or other damage
and renew as necessary. Assemble by reversing re-
moval procedure. Grease thrust bearing (13), coat "O"
ring (11) with grease and coat bushing surface of
spindle with oil before assembling. Lower race of
thrust bearing (13) has smaller inside diameter than
upper race. Install lubricated seal (18), key (16) and
steering arm (17 or 35). Gap between steering arm
and axle should be less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in.). Refer
to paragraph 1 for assembling wheel hub and to
paragraph 2 for toe-in adjustment.
Two Wheel Drive 265 Model
7. Ib remove either spindle (10 or 22Fig. 4), first
raise and support axle, then remove wheel and hub.
16
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Detach tie rod from steering arm (17 or 35), remove
clamp bolt attaching steering arm to spindle, then
pull steering arm from spindle. Remove seal (15) from
top and withdraw spindle (10 or 22), thrust bearing
(13), "O" ring (11) and spacer (12) from bottom.
Clean and inspect parts for wear or other damage
and renew as necessary. Assemble by reversing re-
moval procedure. Press bushings (14) into bores until
seated against shoulder. Grease thrust bearing (13),
coat "O" ring (11) with grease and coat bushing sur-
face of spindle with oil before assembling. Install
lubricated seal (15), key (16) and steering arm (17 or
35). Gap between steering arm and axle should be
0.1-0.3 mm (0.004-0.012 in.). Refer to paragraph 1 for
assembling wheel hub and to paragraph 3 for toe-in
adjustment.
Two Wheel Drive 275 Modei
8, TD remove either spindle (10 or 22Fig. 5), first
raise and support axle, then remove wheel and hub.
Detach tie rod from spindle steering arm, then drive
spring pin (24) from collar (23) and spindle. Remove
collar and seal (18), then withdraw spindle (10 or 22),
thrust bearing (13) and "O" ring (11) from bottom.
Clean and inspect parts for wear or other damage
and renew as necessary. Standard diameter of spindle
bushings (14) is 30.010-30.137 mm (1.1815-1.1865
in.). Bushing and/or spindle should be renewed if
clearance between spindle and bushing exceeds 0.3
mm (0.012 in.). Assemble by reversing removal pro-
cedure. Grease thrust bearing (13), coat "O" ring (11)
with grease and coat bushing surface of spindle with
oil before assembling. Lower race of thrust bearing
(13) has smaller inside diameter than upper race.
Install lubricated seal (18) and collar (23) with holes
aligned with hole in spindle, then drive spring pin
through collar and spindle. Gap between collar and
axle should be less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in.). Refer to
paragraph 1 for assembling wheel hub and to para-
graph 4 for toe-in adjustment.
AXLE MAIN MEMBER, PIVOT PIN AND
BUSHiNGS
Two Wheel Drive 235 Model
9. The front axle pivots on a shaft (21Fig. 1)
which is retained in front frame (25) by castellated
nut (20).
To remove the axle assembly, raise tractor and
support under tractor frame. Remove both front
wheels and disconnect steering drag link (26) from
steering arm (17). Remove cotter pin and nut (20)
from pivot shaft (21), then support axle with rolling
floor jack under center of axle. Pull pivot pin (21)
forward, lower axle assembly enough to clear frame,
then roll axle forward from under tractor frame.
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Outside diameter of pin (21) should be 21.902-
21.935 mm (0,862-0.864 in.) and hole in axle for pin
should be 22.00-22.052 mm (0.866-0.8682 in.).
Reinstall by reversing removal procedure. Grease
pivot shaft beifore installation. Tighten castellated
nut (20) to 146.4-166.8 N.m (108-123 ft.-lbs.) torque,
then back nut off V4-V3 turn until cotter pin can be
installed. Axles should tip smoothly, but without end
play. Tighten bolts retaining wheel to hub to 118-132
N.m (87-98 ft.-lbs.) torque. , thicker shim washer (31) to reduce clearance. Tighten
Two Wheel Drive 245 And 255 Models
10. The non-adjustable (Fig. 2) and adjustable (Fig.
3) front axles both pivot on a shaft (21Fig. 2) which
is retained in front frame (25) by screws (20). Shims
(30) are used to adjust axle end play.
To remove the complete axle as an assembly, first
remove any front mounted equipment and weights.
Raise and block front of tractor in such a way that it
will not interfere with the removal of axle. Remove
wheels and support axle in the center with a rolling
floor jack so that it can be lowered and moved away
from tractor. Remove screws (20Fig. 2) from pivot
shaft (21), then carefully remove shims (30). Remove
pivot shaft (21), carefully lower axle assembly enough
to clear frame;, then roll axle forward from under
tractor frame.
Check axle pivot bushings (33Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)
and renew if iiecessary. Bushings are pressed into
bore of axle an d should be installed flush with bore.
Reverse removal procedure when assembling, greas-
ing pivot shai't before installation. Axle end play
should be 0.1-0.3 mm (0.004-0.012 in.) and axle
should tip smoothly. Tb measure and adjust end play,
push the axle to the rear, then measure clearance
between front of ixle and plate on pivot pin with a
feeler gauge. Shims (30) should be added to increase
clearance. Mat:e sure that screws (20) attaching pivot
pin plate (21) are tight when measuring, but that axle
does not bind. Refer to paragraphs 1 and 2 for addi-
tional torque values and assembly notes.
Two Wheel Drive 265 Model
11. The front axle pivots on a shaft (21Fig. 4)
which is retained in front frame (25) by screw (20).
Tb remove the axle assembly, raise tractor and
support undei tractor frame. Remove both front
wheels and dis<;onnect tie rods from steering arms (17
and 35). Remove screw (20) and support axle with
rolling floor jack under center. Pull pivot pin (21)
forward, lower axle assembly enough to clear frame,
then roll axle forward from under tractor frame.
If bushings (33) are renewed, press new bushings
into bore until bushings are below flush just enough
Paragraphs 10-12
for "O" rings (32) to fit between end of bushing and
end of bore.
Reinstall by reversing removal procedure. Grease
pivot shaft before installation. Axle end play should
be 0.1-0.3 mm (0.004-0.012 in.) and axle should tip
smoothly. To measure and adjust end play, push the
axle to the rear, then measure clearance between
front of axle and frame with a feeler gauge. Install
bolts retaining wheel to hub to 83-93 N.m (61-69
ft.-lbs.) torque. Check lug bolt torque after 10 hours
of operation following installation and every 100
hours thereafter.
Two Wheel Drive 275 Modei
12. The front axle pivots on a shaft (21Fig. 5)
which is retained in pivot brackets (42) attached to
front frame (25).
Tb remove the axle assembly, raise tractor and
support under tractor frame. Remove both front
wheels and disconnect tie rods from steering arms.
Unbolt axle extensions (34) from axle center section
(19), then withdraw axle extensions and spindles.
Support axle with rolling floor jack under center and
unbolt both pivot brackets (42) from tractor front
frame (25). Lower axle enough to clear frame, then
roll axle forward from under tractor.
Clearance between pivot bushings (33) and pivot
pin (21) should be 0.03-0.18 mm (0.0012-0.0071 in.).
Install new bushings and pin if clearance exceeds 0.3
mm (0.012 in.). If bushings (33) are renewed, press
new bushings into bore until bushings are below flush
just enough for "O" rings (32) to fit between end of
bushing and end of bore.
Reinstall by reversing removal procedure. Grease
pivot shaft before installation. Axle end play should
be 0.1-0.3 mm (0.004-0.012 in.) and axle should tip
smoothly. Tb measure and adjust end play, push the
axle to the rear, then measure clearance between
front of axle and frame with a feeler gauge. Install
thicker shim washer (31) to reduce clearance. Tighten
bolts retaining pivot brackets (42) to frame to 54-64
N.m (40-47 ft.-lbs.) torque. Install axle extensions
(34) and tighten bolts clamping center housing (19)
to axle extensions (34) to 118-132 N.m (87-97 ft.-lbs.)
torque. If loosened, tighten tie rod clamping bolts
(37Fig. 6) to 29-34 N.m (22-25 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Tighten bolts retaining wheel to hub to 83-93 N.m
(61-69 ft.-lbs.) torque. Check lug bolt torque after 10
hours of operation following installation and every
100 hours thereafter.
17
Paragraphs 13-15 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

TREAD ADJUSTMENT AND DRAG LINK

Models With Two Wheel Drive

Non-Adjustable Axle
13. Wheel tread is not adjustable for 235 and 235H
models, and wheels are not reversible. The complete
drag link must be renewed if rod ends are worn.
Tread can be adjusted on some models with non-ad-
justable axle by reversing the front wheels; however,
some wheels should not be reversed. Check with
wheel or tractor manufacturer if proper installation
method is not known. The complete drag link must
be renewed on most models if worn, but if rod ends
are removable, new ends can be installed.

Models With Two Wheel Drive

Adjustable Axle
14, An adjustable tread front axle is available on
245, 255, 265 and 275 models. Different wheel tread
widths are accomplished by removing screws which
clamp axle extensions in axle center member, relocat-
ing axle extensions, then, reinstalling the two clamp
bolts in each side of axle. Both sides should be ad-
justed the same and clamp screws should be tight-
ened to 118-132 N.m (87-98 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Adjustable axle of 245 and 255 models with manual
steering can be adjusted to three different tread
widths. Two tread widths are possible on models with
power steering. When axle width is changed on 245
and 255 models, the length of the drag link (26Fig.
3) and tie rod (36-41) must both be adjusted. Tie rod
outer tube (36) and inner tube (39) are drilled for
inserting alignment pin (37), permitting quick ad-
justment of tie rod length to match width of axle. To
change tie rod length when axle width is changed,
proceed as follows. Loosen bolt in clamp (38), remove
pin (37), slide tubes (36 and 39) until tie rod is proper
length, insert pin (37), then tighten bolt in clamp (38)
to 25-29 N.m (18-22 ft.lbs.) torque. If necessary, refer
to paragraph 2 for fine adjustment of toe-in.
The length of drag link must also be matched to the
width of axle on 245 and 255 models. Disconnect rear
of drag link from steering arm (28Fig. 3), then refer
to Fig. 7. Loosen locknuts and turn drag link ends as
required to set distances (A and B) to the following
specified distance. If axle extensions are clamped into
axle center member at the narrowest settings, both
distances (Aand B) should be 65 mm (2.56 in.). If axle
is set at medium width (widest for models with power
steering), both distances (A and B) should be 75 mm
(2.95 in.). If axle for model with manual steering is
adjusted to the widest tread, both distances (Aand B)
should be 80 mm (3.15 in.). On all 245 and 255 models
with adjustable axle, drag link is marked at both ends
with punch mark (P) which should be used to center
Fig. 7View of drag iinii for 245 and 255 modeis witii
adjustabie axie. Refer to text for adjustment.
the rod ends, since drag link is not straight. Be sure
to tighten drag link rod end locknuts to 118-137 N.m
(87-101 ft.-lbs.) torque after adjusting and make sure
that ends remain aligned with punch marks (P).
On 265 and 275 models, lengths of the two tie rods
must be matched to the width of axle. Tie rod outer
tubes (36Fig. 4) and inner tubes (39) are drilled for
clamp screws (37) which permits quick adjustment of
tie rod length. Clamp screws (37) should be tightened
to 29-34 N.m (22-25 ft.lbs.) torque. If necessary, refer
to fine adjustment of toe-in outlined in paragraph 3
or 4.
STEERING BELLCRANK
Two Wheel Drive 275 Modei
15. The steering bellcrank (47Fig. 6) operates on
shaft (48), attached to frame. To remove, first detach
bolh tie rods and the drag link (26) from bellcrank,
remove nut (43), then pull bellcrank from shaft.
Standard inside diameter of bushings (46) is 30 mm
(1.181 in.). Bushings should be renewed if clearance
to shaft exceeds 0.3 mm (0.0118 in.). New bushings
(46) should be pressed into bores until 4.5 mm (0.177
in.) below flush with edge of bore. "O" rings (45) fit
into the recesses.

18
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 16-19

FRONT DRIVE SYSTEM

(FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE 235 AND 235H MODELS)
16. Mechanical front-wheel drive is available on Rim size W8-16
235, 235H, 245, 255 and 275 models. Paragraphs 17 Front
through 24 co\ er service to the Front Drive System Size 6-14-4 ply
used on 235 and 235H models. Refer to paragraph 26 Tread type FD
through 33 for jservice to the Front Drive System used Max. Infiation Pressure 200 kPa (28 psi)
on 245 and 255 models or to paragraph 35 through 42 Rim size 5JA-14
for service to the Front Drive System used on 275 Rear
models. Size 9.5-18-4 ply
Tread type FD
MAINTENANCE Max. Infiation Pressure 85-135 kPa (12-20 psi)
Rim size W8-18
Four-wheel- Drive 235 And 235H Models
Front
17, Oil should be maintained at level of plugs Size 20.5 x 8.00-10-4 ply
(PFig. 8) located on both wheel hub cases. Oil is Tread type PD
added at fill plug (F). After the first 50 hours of Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi)
operation and every 200 hours thereafter, drain oil Rim size 6.001-10
from front drive axle by removing the two plugs (D) Rear
from final drive; housings and plug (34) from center of Size 31 X 15.5-15-4 ply
axle. Fill with "Case IH 135 HEP SAE 85W-140" or Tread type PDl
equivalent gear lubricant to the level of plug (P). Max. Infiation Pressure 70-135 kPa (10-20 psi)
Capacity is approximately 2.5 L (2.6 qt.); however, Rim size 13LB-15
some lubricant may be trapped in housing. Front wheels should be installed with concave
Refer to the following for matched (front and rear) (cupped) side in, toward center, and should not be
standard tire siize and recommended pressure. Op- reversed. Tighten front wheel retaining nuts to 83-93
tional tires and wheels may be offered and pressures N.m (61-69 ft.-lbs.) torque. Rear wheel to axle hub
may be differeint than shown, depending upon load bolts should be tightened to 118-132 N.m (87-98 ft.-
and ground corLditions, but front and rear wheel and lbs.) torque and nuts securing rear wheel rim to wheel
tire sizes should be matched as indicated. Mismatch- disc should be tightened to 152-172 N.m (112-127
ing front and rear wheel sizes may cause excessive ft.-lbs.) torque.
tire slippage and possibly accelerate wear of drive
system components. FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY AND
Front STEERING LINKAGE
Size 5-12-4 ply
Tread type; FSLM Four-Wheel-Drive 235 And 235H Modeis
Outside diameter 550 mm (21.65 in.)
Max. Inflation Pressure 200 kPa (28 psi) 18. TIE ROD AND TOE-IN. A single tie rod (62
Rim size 4JA x 12 Fig. 8) connects left and right steering arms (63 and
Rear 65). Automotive type ends are not adjustable for wear
Size 8-18-4 ply and should be renewed if worn. Attach steering tie
Tread type FSLH rod ends to steering arms, tighten castellated nuts
Outside diameter 840 mm (33.07 in.) and install cotter pins. Recommended toe-in is 0-5
Max. Infiation Pressure 85-160 kPa (12-23 psi) mm (0-0.20 in.) and is adjusted by threading rod ends
Rim size W6-18 onto tie rod to change the distance between ends. To
Front check alignment, measure distance between wheel
Size 6-12-4 ply rims at front and rear on centerline of axle, parallel
Tread type; FSLM to ground. Rotate wheels and re-measure to be sure
Outside diameter 564 mm (22.20 in.) that wheels are not bent, giving incorrect reading.
Max. Infiation Pressure . . . . . 200 kPa (28 psi) Tighten rod end jam nut to 59-88 N.m (43-65 ft.-lbs.)
Rim size 5JA x 12 torque after wheel alignment is correctly set.
Rear
Size 9.5-16-4 ply 19. R&R AXLE ASSEMBLY. Tb remove front axle
Tread type FSLF assembly, first remove any front mounted equipment
Max. Infiation Pressure 85-135 kPa (12-20 psi) and weights. Detach front end of drag link (64Fig.

19
Paragraph 19 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

65

59
58

57

Fig. 8Exploded view of front drive axie used on four-wiieei drive 235 and 235H modeis.
D. Drain plug 15. Snap ring (28 mm ID) 32. Tapered roller bearing 49. Shims (left side)
F. Fill plug 16. Washer 33. Upper bearing holder 50. Differential pinion shaft
P. Level plug 17. Shims 34. Drain plug 51. Thrust washer
1. Right housing 18. Bevel gear (29 teeth) 35. Pinion gear (same as 28) 52. Differential side gear
2. Vent tube & cap 19. Inner bearing 36. Bearing locknut 53. Thrust washer
3. Center pivot shaft 20. Pinion gear (15 teeth) 37. Lockwasher 54. Differential pinion
4. Spacer collar 21. Lower cover 38. Spacer 55. Retaining screws & lock plate
5. Shims 22. Tapered roller bearing 39. "O" ring (25 mm) 56. Roll pin
6. Bushings 23. Final drive housing 40. Oil seal 57. Differential housing
7. Left housing 24. Bushings (30 & 50 mm long) 41. Tapered roller bearing 58. Ball bearing
8. "O" ring 25. Seal 42. Pinion shafl housing 59. Shims
9. Inner axle shaft 26. King pin housing 43. Shims 60. Shims
10. Wheel axle shaft 27. Snap ring (23 mm ID) 44. "O" ring (60 mm) 61. Bushing
11. Seal 28. Pinion gear (14 teeth) 45. Tapered roller bearing 62. Tie rod
12. Cover 29. Shims 46. Pinion gear & shafl 63. Lefl steering arm
13. Outer ball bearing 30. Ball bearing 47. Ring gear 64. Drag link
14. Snap ring (66 mm OD) 31. Kingpin shafl 48. Ball bearing 65. Right steering arm

20
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
8) from left steering arm (63), raise front of tractor
and block in such a way that it will not interfere with
removal of axle. Support tractor frame behind axle
and remove both front wheels. If unit is to be disas-
sembled, remove plugs (D and 34) to drain oil from
front axle assembly. Remove the front axle drive
shaft. Support, axle level with floor to prevent tipping,
in such a way that it can be lowered and moved away
from tractor. Remove screws retaining pivot shaft (3),
then carefully remove shims (5). Remove pivot pin (3),
carefully lower the axle assembly and roll axle from
under tractor.
Check ixle pivot bushings (6) and renew if neces-
sary. Bushings are pressed into bore of axle housing
and should be installed flush with bore.
Reverse removal procedure when assembling all
models. Be sure to lubricate bushings and pivot pin
(3) with greases before installing. Axle end play should
be 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.). To measure and adjust end
play, push axle to the rear, then measure clearance
between front of axle and collar (4) with a feeler
gauge. Shims (5) should be added to increase clear-
ance. Make sure that screws attaching plate (3) are
tight when measuring, but that axle does not bind.
Tighten pivot pin retaining screws to 49-58 N.m
(36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque. Attach drag link to the left
steering arm, tighten castellated nuts and install
cotter pins. Refer to paragraph 17 for capacities and
additional tonjue values.
FRONT FINAL DRIVES AND
WHEEL AXLES
Four-Wheel-Drive 235 And 235H Models
20. R&R A>[D OVERHAUL. Raise and block front
of tractor in a way that is safe and will not interfere
with the removal of front wheels or final drive, then
remove the front wheels. Remove drain plug (DFig.
8) and permit oil to drain from axle housing. Remove
the six screws; that attach cover (12) to final drive
housing (23), then separate housings. Use a suitable
puller, if necessary, to remove gear (18) and bearing
(19). Be carefi:! and not damage shims and washers
(16 and 17). Remove snap ring (15). Wheel axle (10)
should be easily bumped from inner race of bearing
(13). Outer race of bearing (13) is retained in bore of
cover (12) by snap ring (14). Seal (11) can be removed
if renewal is required. Be sure to remove old sealer
from mating surfaces of final drive housing (23) and
cover (12).
To assemble, press bearing (13) into bore of cover
(12), install snap ring (14), press new seal (11) into
bore of cover (12) and grease lips of seal. Insert wheel
SDcle shaft (10) through seal and press into bearing
inner race, until seated. Install snap ring (15), washer
(16) and bevel gear (18). Leave inner bearing off and
Paragraphs 20-21
Fig. 9Measure backlash between bevel gears (18 &
20Fig. 8) at the outer edge of the wheel mounting flange,
using a dial indicator as shown.
install cover and wheel axle assembly to final drive
housing (23), tightening retaining screws to 25-30
N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Mount a dial indicator as
shown in Fig. 9 and measure backlash of bevel gears
at outer edge of wheel mounting flange. Desired back-
lash is 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.) and is reduced by
adding shims (17Fig. 8) between washer (16) and
gear (18). After correct thickness of shims (17) has
been installed, remove cover and wheel axle assem-
bly, press inner bearing (19) onto axle, apply sealer to
mating surface of cover, then install cover. Tighten
cover retaining screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Refer to paragraph 17 for capacities and
torque values.
FRONT DRIVE SPINDLES AND
INNER AXLES
Four-Wheel-Drive 235 And 235H Models
21. R&R AND OVERHAUL. The front drive spin-
dle assembly, including housings (23 and 26Fig. 8)
and related parts can be separated from axle housing
(1 or 7) as a unit. Raise and block front of tractor in a
way that is safe and will not interfere with the re-
moval of front wheels or final drive, then remove the
front wheels. Remove drain plugs (D and 34) and
permit oil to drain from axle housing. Disconnect rod
end from steering arm (63 or 65). Steering drag link
(64) must be disconnected if left spindle is removed.
Remove the four screws attaching king pin housing
(26) to axle housing (1 or 7), then lift unit from tractor.
Refer to paragraph 20 for removal and service to
the wheel axle (10) and final drive bevel gear (18).
Unbolt and remove steering arm (63 or 65), then
unbolt and remove upper bearing holder (33). Do not
21
Paragraph 22 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

lose or damage shims (60), which are used to adjust

end play of king pin. Bump top of shaft (31) lightly to
remove final drive housing (23) from king pin housing y
(26). Unbolt and remove lower cover (21), then with-
draw shaft (31) and gears (20 and 35). Inner axles (9),
gears (28) and bearings (30) can be withdrawn if
service is required. Shims (29), used to adjust back-
lash of gears (28 and 35), should not be lost or dam-
aged.
Clean and inspect all parts for wear or damage,
then renew as necessary. The seal (25) is thin and
easily distorted if not pressed into place carefully
using a close fitting piloted assembly tool.
Assemble shaft (31), gear (35) and upper bearing
(32) on king pin housing (26), with larger diameter of
shaft and outer cup of bearing toward top. Apply
sealer to mating surface of upper bearing holder (33),
coat threads of retaining screws with sealing tape or
sealer, then install upper bearing holder, tightening
Fig. 10Measure bacidash between gears (28 & 35Fig.
screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Lubricate 8) using a diai indictor against teeth of iower gear (20).
the installed seal (25), bushing (24) and pilot surface
of king pin housing (26), then slide housings together
while installing gear (20). Install lower bearing (22),
apply sealer to mating surface of lower bearing holder sary to turn spindle should be 0.30 N.m (2.64 in.-lbs.)
(21), coat threads of retaining screws with sealing torque.
tape or sealer, then install bearing holder, tightening Refer to paragraph 20 for assembly of final drive
screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Check to bevel gear (18), wheel axle (10), cover (12) and related
be sure that housing (23) will rotate freely on king pin parts. Refer to paragraph 17 for capacities and torque
(26). Be sure that bushing (61) is properiy installed values.
and serviceable, then install steering arm (63 or 65)
and measure axial play. Determine sufficient thick-
ness of shims (60) to reduce axial play to 0-0.2 mm DIFFERENTIAL BEVEL PINION
(0-0.008 in.), then remove the steering arm (63 or 65).
Coat bushing (61) and holder (33) with water- and
heat-resistant grease, then reinstall steering arm Four-Wiieei-Drive 235 And 235H Modeis
with correct thickness of shims (60). Tighten the close
fitting piloted screws retaining steering arm to hous- 22, R&R AND OVERHAUL. Remove drain plugs
ing (23) to 83-93 N.m (61-69 ft.-lbs.) torque. Check to (D and 34Fig. 8) and drain lubricant from axle, then
make sure that upper plug, above bearing (61), is refer to paragraph 19 and remove the front drive axle.
properly installed and sealed. If the complete drive axle is to be disassembled and
overhauled, refer to paragraph 21 and remove the
Tb determine proper thickness of shims (29), tem- spindle assemblies from both sides. Pull the inner
porarily install the front drive spindle and attach a axles (9), bearings (30) and bevel gears (28) from axle
dial indicator as shown in Fig. 10. Measured backlash housings.
should be 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.), with screws Remove screws attaching pinion housing (42) to left
attaching king pin housing (26Fig. 8) to axle hous- ixle housing (7), then carefully withdraw pinion as-
ing (1 or 7) tightened. Remove the spindle assembly, sembly (36 thorough 46). Be careful not to lose or
snap ring (27) and gear (28), then add or remove damage shims (43) which adjust pinion mesh posi-
shims (29) to change backlash. When correct thick- tion. Straighten tab washer (37) and remove nut (36).
ness of shims has been determined and installed, coat Pinion shaft (46) can be pushed from bearing (41) and
"O" ring (8) with grease and install on fiange hub of housing.
housing (1 or 7). Tighten retaining screws to 49-58
N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque, making sure that two Clean and inspect all parts carefully. Pinion (46)
lower retaining screws are close fitting piloted bolts. and differential ring gear (47) are available only as a
Do not replace the special piloted screws with stand- matched set. Seal (40) should be renewed each time
ard screws. A torque wrench can be attached to drain the pinion is disassembled.
plug (D) and used to measure the torque necessary to If new bearings are installed, press cups into hous-
turn spindle in bushings. The measured force neces- ing (42) until seated against shoulder. Press bearing

22
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
tf
Fig. 11Cone position of tiie pinion is the distance from
tip of pinion gear (46) to fiange of housing (or shims) as
shown at (C). Correct cone distance is 42.95-43.05 mm
(1.691-1.695 in.).
cone for bearing (45) onto pinion shaft (46) until
seated against shoulder. Position pinion shaft and
bearing cone in housing and bearings cups, then
install cone for bearing (41). Install "O" ring (39) and
spacer (38). Lubricate seal (40) with grease, then
press seal into housing until outer surface is flush
with face of housing. Install tab washer (37) and nut
(36), tightening nut until the torque required to turn
pinion shaft in bearings is 0.39-0.59 N.m (3.48-5.16
in.-lbs.). When bearing preload is correct, bend tab of
washer (37) against nut (36).
Shims (43) are used to set the cone point (mesh
position) of the pinion. To determine the thickness of
shims (43) to install, measure between tip of pinion
and flange surface of pinion housing as shown at
(CFig. 11). Agange is available, but distance can be
measured with standard gauge blocks. Correct set-
ting distance (C) is 42.95-43.05 mm (1.691-1.695 in.).
If the complete drive axle was disassembled and
overhauled, refer to paragraph 23 and install the
differential assembly. If spindles were removed, refer
to paragraph !21 and install spindle assemblies.
Position selected correct thickness of shims (43) on
housing, grease "O** ring (44), then position "O" ring
on housing. Attach pinion assembly to the axle hous-
ing (7), tightening screws retaining pinion housing to
25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to paragraph
19 to install tlie front drive axle. Refer to paragraph
17 for capacities and additional torque values.
Paragraph 23
DiFFERENTiAL
Four-Wheel-Drive 235 And 235H i\/iodeis
23. R&R AND OVERHAUL. TD remove tbe differ-
ential, first remove drain plugs (D and 34Fig. 8)
and drain lubricant from axle, then refer to para-
graph 19 and remove the front drive ixle. Refer to
paragraph 21 and remove the spindle assemblies
from both sides, then pull the inner axles (9), bearings
(30) and bevel gears (28) from axle housings. Remove
screws attaching pinion housing (42) to left axle hous-
ing (7), then carefully withdraw pinion assembly (36
thorough 46). Be careful not to lose or damage shims
(43) which adjust pinion mesb position. Refer to para-
graph 22 for service to tbe removed pinion assembly.
Unbolt right axle housing (1) and separate from
differential housing and right axle housing (7). Dif-
ferential assembly can be lifted from housing. Be
careful not to lose shims (49 and 59), if carrier bear-
ings (48 and 58) are removed from axle housings.
Use puller to remove bearings (48 and 58). Ring
gear (47) is attached to differential case (57) with
eight screws locked by lock plates (55). Drive roll pin
(56) from case and cross shaft (50), then drive cross
shaft from case and gears (54). Roll gears (54) and
thrust washers (53) from differential case, then with-
draw side gears (52) and thrust washers (51).
Assembly of differential is reverse of disassembly
procedure. Apply medium strength thread lock to
screws retaining ring gear (47), tighten screws and
lock by bending tab of lock plate against flat of screw
head.
To adjust bevel gear backlash, refer to paragraph
22, measure bevel pinion gear cone point and install
the bevel pinion assembly with the selected shims
(43). Make sure tbat bearings (48 and 58) are both
flrmly seated against shoulder of differential case
(57). Install the differential assembly in the left axle
housing (7), using some of tbe selected shims (49).
Make sure that bearing (48) is seated firmly against
shims (49), then measure backlash of gears (46 and
47), using a dial indicator against heads of screws
(55). Correct backlash is 0.25-0.35 mm (0.010-0.014
in.). If backlash is excessive, remove some of the
shims from left side (49) and install at right (59).
Make sure that differential left carrier bearing (48)
is fully seated when measuring and that some back-
lash exists.
To adjust differential carrier bearing side play,
measure distance between outside edge of bearing
(58) and flange of left axle housing (7) as shown at
(AFig. 12), then measure depth of bearing bore in
right axle housing. A special gauge is available which
can be used to measure these distances directly, but
if the gauge is not available, depth of bore in right
axle housing can be measured as described in Fig. 13.
Subtract measured protrusion of bearing (AFig. 12)
23
Paragraph 24 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 12Differential carrier bearings should have 0-0.1

mm (0-0.004 in.) play in bores of housings. Measure dis-
tance (A) from outer race of bearing (58) to surface of axle
housing.

from depth of bearing bore from housing fiange (C Fig. 1^Because of projections on axle housing, first
minus BFig. 13). Select thickness of shims (59 measure depth of bearing bore (C) from straight edge (S),
Fig. 8) for installation on right side that will remove then measure distance (B) from straight edge to housing
all but 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.) play when axle housings fiange. Depth of bearing bore from fiange is determined
are assembled. The total thickness of shims (49 and by subtracting measurement (B) from measurement (C).
59) adjusts side play of carrier bearings, but moving
shims from one side to the other changes backlash
between pinion and ring gear.
After shims (59) are selected, coat mating surfaces
of housings (1 and 7) with sealer and attach right
housing to left. Make sure that shims (59) remain in
position while assembling and tighten retaining
screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 fb.-lbs.) torque. Refer to
paragraph 21 to determine correct thickness of shims
(29). Refer to paragraph 19 to install the front drive
axle and to paragraph 17 for capacities and additional
torque values.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE

Four-Wheel-Drive 235 And 235H Models

24. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Power for front
wheel drive is from the pto front drive shaft located Fig. 14Expioded view of drive shaft and cover typical of
below the rear drive bevel pinion shaft. Refer to 235, 235H, 245 and 255 models with mechanical front
paragraph 126 for service to the front wheel drive wheel drive.
shaft and related gears. An external drive shaft (3 1, "IT joint cover 5. Cover
2, Universal joint 6. Retainer ring
Fig. 14) transfers power from the pto front shaft to 3. Front wheel drive shaft 7. Retaining pin
the front-wheel drive axle. 4. Drive shaft cover 8. Rear universal joint

24
MODELS 23i), 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 25-27

FRONT AXLE SYSTEM

(FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE 245 AND 255 MODELS)
25. Mechanic;al front-wheel drive is available on Outside diameter 1095 mm (43.1 in.)
235, 235H, 245, 255 and 275 models. The following Max. Inflation Pressure 85-125 kPa (12-18 psi)
paragraphs 26 through 33 cover service to the Front Rim size WlO-24
Drive System used on 245 and 255 models. Refer to
Front
paragraph 17 through 24 for service to the Front
Size 7-14-4 ply
Drive System used on 235 and 235H models or to
Tread type FD
paragraph 35 through 42 for service to the Front
Max. Inflation Pressure 180 kPa (26 psi)
Drive System used on 275 models.
Rim size 5JA-14
Rear
MAINTENANCE Size 11.2/10-24-4 ply
Tread type FD
Four-Wheel-Drive 245 And 255 Models Max. Inflation Pressure 85-125 kPa (12-18 psi)
Rim size WlO-24
26. Oil should be maintained at level of plugs Front
(PFig. 15) located on both wheel hub cases. Oil is Size . 24 X 8.50-14-4 ply
added at fill plug (F) located on each bousing (1 and Tread type PDl
7). After the first 50 hours of operation and every 200 Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi)
hours thereafter, drain oil from front drive axle by Rim size 7JA-14
removing the tv/o plugs (D) and plug (34). Fill with Rear
"Case IH 135 HEP SAE 85W-140" or equivalent gear Size 13.6-16-4 ply
lubricant to connect level. Capacity is approximately Tread type PDl
3.5 L (3.7 qt.); however, some lubricant may be Max. Inflation Pressure 75-100 kPa (11-14 psi)
trapped in housing. Rim size W12-16
Refer to the fcllowing for matched (front and rear)
standard tire size and recommended pressure. Op- Front
tional tires and wheels may be offered and pressures Size 27 X 8.50-15-4 ply
may be different than shown, depending upon load Tread type G2
and ground conditions, but front and rear wheel and Max. Inflation Pressure 205 kPa (30 psi)
tire sizes should be matched as indicated. Mismatch- Rim size 7JA-15
ing front and rear wheel sizes may cause excessive Rear
tire slippage and possibly accelerate wear of drive Size 355/80D20-4 ply
system components. Tread type PDl
Front Max. Inflation Pressure 70-100 kPa (10-14 psi)
Size 6-14-4 ply Rim size Wll-20
Tread type Rl Front wheels should be installed with concave
Outside diameter 650 mm (25.6 in.) (cupped) side in, toward center, and should not be
Max. Inflation Pressure 200 kPa (28 psi) reversed. Tighten front wheel retaining nuts to 118-
Rim size 5JAx 14WDC 132 N.m (87-98 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Rear Rear wheel to axle hub bolts should be tightened to
Size 9.5-24 ply 118-132 N.m (87-98 ft.-lbs.) torque and nuts securing
Tread type . Rl rear wheel rim to wheel disc should be tightened to
Outside diameter 1045 mm (41.1 in.) 152-172 N.m (112-127 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Max. Inflation Pressure 85-135 kPa (12-20 psi)
Rim size . . W7-24 FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY AND
Front STEERING LINKAGE
Size 7-14-4 ply
Tread type Rl Four-Wheel-Drive 245 And 255 Models
Outside diameter 690 mm (27.2 in.)
Max. Inflation Pressure 180 kPa (26 psi) 27. TIE ROD AND TOE-IN. A single tie rod (62
Rim size . 5JA-14 Fig. 15) connects left steering arm (63) and right
Rear steering arm. Automotive type ends are not adjust-
Size 11.2-24-4 ply able for wear and should be renewed if worn. Attach
Tread type Rl steering tie rod ends to steering arms, tighten castel-

25
Paragraph 27 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 15Expioded view of front drive axie used on four-wheei drive 245 and 255 modeis.
D. Drain plug 16. Shims 34. Drain plug 52. Differential side gear
F. Fill plugs 17. Shims 35. Pinion gear (same as 28) 53. Thrust washer
P. Level plug 18. Bevel gear (32 teeth) 36. Bearing locknut 54. Differential pinion
1. Right housing 19. Inner ball bearing 37. Lockwasher 55, Retaining screws & lock plate
2. Vent tube & cap 20. Pinion gear (12 teeth) 38. Spacer 56. Roll pin
3. Center pivot shaft 21. Lower cover 39. "0" ring (36 mm) 57. Differential housing
4. Spacer collar 22. Ball bearing 40. Oil seal 58. Ball bearing
5. Shims 23. Final drive housing 41. Tapered roller bearing 59. Shims (left side)
6. Bushings 24. Bushings 42. Pinion shaft housing 60. Shims
7. Left housing 25. Seal 43, Shims 61. Bushing
8. "0" ring (75 mm) 26. King pin housing 44. "0" ring (60 mm) 62. Tie rod
9. Inner ixle shaft 27. Snap ring (22 mm ID) 45. Tapered roller bearing 63. Left steering arm
10. Wheel axle shaft 28. Pinion gear (15 teeth) 46, Pinion gear & shaft 64. Drag link
11. Seal 29. Shims 47. Ring gear 66. "0" ring (24 mm)
12. Cover 30. Ball bearing 48. Ball bearing 67. "0" ring (150 mm)
13. Outer ball bearing 31. King pin shaft 49. Shims (right side) 68. Ball thrust bearing
14. Snap ring (76 mm OD) 32. Ball bearing 50. Differential pinion shaft 69. "0" ring (145 mm)
15. Snap ring (23 mm ID) 33. Upper bearing holder 51. Thrust washer 70. "0" rings (25 mm)

26
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
lated nuts and install cotter pins. Recommended toe-
in is 0-5 mm (0-0.20 in.) and is adjusted by threading
rod ends onto tie rod to change the distance between
ends. To check alignment, measure distance between
wheel rims at front and rear on centerline of axle,
parallel to ground. Rotate wheels and re-measure to
be sure that v/heels are not bent, giving incorrect
reading. Tighte n rod end jam nut to 59-88 N.m (43-65
ft.-lbs.) torque after wheel alignment is correctly set.
28. R&R AXLE ASSEMBLY. To remove front axle
assembly, first remove any front mounted equipment
and weights. Remove drive shaft covers (1Fig. 14).
Disengage snap rings (6) from front universal joint
(2) and remove pins (7). Push the universal joint
rearward off tYie axle pinion shaft. Detach front end
of drag link (64Fig. 15) from left steering arm (63).
Raise and support tractor frame behind the axle.
Remove both front wheels. If unit is to be disassem-
bled, remove plugs (D and 34) to drain oil from front
axle assembly. Support axle level with fioor to prevent
tipping, in such a way that it can be lowered and
moved away from tractor. Remove screws retaining
pivot shaft (3), then carefully remove shims (5). Re-
move pivot pin (3), carefully lower the axle assembly
and roll axle from under tractor.
Check axle pivot bushings (6) and renew if neces-
sary. Bushings should be pressed into housing far
enough to instaill "O" rings (70).
Reverse removal procedure when assembling. Axle
end play should be 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.). Be sure to
lubricate bushings, pivot pin and "O" rings (70) with
grease before installing. "O" rings shouldfitin coun-
terbore. To measure and adjust end play, push axle to
the rear, then measure clearance between front of
axle and plate en pivot pin with a feeler gauge. Shims
(5) should be added to increase clearance. Make sure
that screws attaching plate (3) are tight when meas-
uring, but that axle does not bind. Tighten pivot pin
retaining screA^ s to 49-58 N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Attach drag link to the left steering arm, tighten
castellated nuts and install cotter pins. Refer to para-
graph 26 for ca]jacities and additional torque values.
FRONT FINAL DRIVES AND
WHEEL AXLES
Four-Wheel-Drive 245 And 255 Models
29. R&R AN13 OVERHAUL. Raise and block front
of tractor in a ^?/ay that is safe and will not interfere
with the removal of front wheels or final drive. Re-
move drain plug (DFig. 15) and permit oil to drain
from axle housi ng. Remove the six screws that attach
cover (12) to final drive housing (23), then separate
housings. Bearing (19) is retained on wheel axle shaft
(10) by snap ring (15). Use a suitable puller to remove
Paragraphs 28-29
K////////////////////////J
Fig. 16To determine proper thickness of shims (17
Fig, 15), distance from mating surface of cover (12) to
inner race of bearing (13) must be determined. The ridge
of cover makes direct measurement impossible, so meas-
ured distance (B) must be subtracted from distance (A).
Distances (A & B) are both measured from a straight edge
(S) piaced across the cover as shown.
gear (18) and bearing (19). Be careful and not damage
shims and washers (16 and 17). Wheel axle (10)
should be easily bumped from inner race of bearing
(13). Outer race of bearing (13) is retained in bore of
cover (12) by snap ring (14). Seal (11) can be removed
if renewal is required. Be sure to remove "O" ring (69)
from mating surfaces of final drive housing (23) and
cover (12).
Tb assemble, proceed as follows. Press bearing (13)
into bore of cover (12) and install snap ring (14). Press
new seal (11) into bore of cover (12) and lubricate lip
of seal with grease.
The thickness of shims (17) determines the back-
lash between bevel gears (18 and 20). Thickness of
shims (17) should normally be 2.95-3.05 mm (0.116-
0.120 in.) less than the distance from inner race of
bearing (13) to the mating surface of cover (12). To
determine distance from mating surface of cover to
the inner race of bearing, measure distances (A and
BFig. 16), then subtract distance (B) from (A).
Subtract 2.95-3.05 mm (0.116-0.120 in.) from the
computed distance, then install shims (17Fig. 15)
equal to this result. To check backlash, insert wheel
axle shaft (10) through seal and press into bearing
inner race, until seated. Install the selected shims
(17) and gear (18), then attach the partially assem-
bled wheel axle, cover and gear to housing (23). Tem-
porarily tighten screws retaining the cover, attach a
dial indicator similar to method shown in Fig. 9 and
measure backlash between bevel gears. If backlash is
not within the range of 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.),
add or reduce thickness of shims (17Fig. 15).
To complete final assembly, install inner bearing
(19), shims (16) and snap ring (15). Shims (16) should
be thick enough to fill gap between inner race of
bearing (19) and snap ring (15). Thickest shim (16)
should be against snap ring. Install "O" ring (69) and
apply sealer to mating surfaces before attaching the
cover, then tighten retaining screws to 49-58 N.m
(36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque.
27
Paragraphs 30-31
FRONT DRIVE SPINDLES AND
INNER AXLES
Four-Wiieei-Drive 245 And 255 Modeis
30. R&R AND OVERHAUL. The front drive spin-
dle assembly, including housings (23 and 26Fig. 15)
and related parts can be separated from axle housing
(1 or 7) as a unit. Raise and block front of tractor in a
way that is safe and will not interfere with the re-
moval of front wheels or final drive, then remove the
front wheels. Remove drain plugs (D and 34) and
permit oil to drain from axle housing. Disconnect tie
rod end from steering arm. Steering drag link (64)
must be disconnected if left spindle is removed. Re-
move the six screws attaching king pin housing (26)
to axle housing (1 or 7), then lift unit from tractor.
Refer to paragraph 29 for removal and service to
the wheel axle (10) and final drive bevel gear (18).
Unbolt and remove steering arm (63), then unbolt
and remove upper bearing holder (33). Do not lose or
damage shims (60), which are used to adjust end play
of king pin. Bump top of shaft (31) lightly to remove
final drive housing (23) from king pin housing (26).
Unbolt and remove lower cover (21), then withdraw
shaft (31) and gears (20 and 35). Inner axles (9), gears
(28) and bearings (30) can be withdrawn if service is
required. Shims (29) are used to adjust backlash of
gears (28 and 35) and should not be lost or damaged.
Clean and inspect all parts for wear or damage,
then renew as necessary. The seal (25) is thin and
easily distorted if not pressed into place carefully
using a close fitting piloted assembly tool. Coat thrust
bearing (68) with grease, then position bearing in
bore of housing (23).
Assemble shaft (31), gear (20) and lower bearing
(22) in housing (23), with larger diameter of shaft
toward top. Apply sealer to mating surface of lower
bearing holder (21), then install lower bearing holder,
tightening screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Lubricate the installed seal (25), bushing (24) and
pilot surface of king pin housing (26), then slide
housings together while installing gear (35). Install
upper bearing (32), apply sealer to mating surface of
upper bearing holder (33), then install bearing holder,
tightening screws to 49-58 N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Check to be sure that housing (23) will rotate freely
on king pin (26). Be sure that bushing (61) is properly
installed and serviceable, then install steering arm
(63) and measure axial play. Determine sufficient
thickness of shims (60) to reduce axial play to 0-0.2
mm (0-0.008 in.), then remove the steering arm (63).
Coat bushing (61), "O" ring (66) and holder (33) with
water-resistant high temperature grease, then rein-
stall steering arm with correct thickness of shims
(60). Tighten the close fitting piloted screws retaining
steering arm to housing (23) to 83-93 N.m (61-69
28
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
ft.-lbs.) torque. Check to make sure that upper plug,
above bushing (61), is properly installed and sealed.
To determine proper thickness of shims (29), tem-
porarily install the front drive spindle and attach a
dial indicator as shown in Fig. 10. Measured backlash
should be 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.), with screws
attaching king pin housing (26Fig. 15) to axle hous-
ing (1 or 7) tightened. Remove the spindle assembly,
snap ring (27) and gear (28), then add or remove
shims (29) to change backlash. When correct thick-
ness of shims has been determined and installed, coat
"O" ring (8) with grease and install on flange hub of
housing (1 or 7). Tighten retaining screws to 49-58
N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque, making sure that special
piloted retaining screws are in the two close fitting
piloted holes (front and rear). Do not replace the
special piloted screws with standard screws. A torque
wrench can be attached to drain plug (D) and used to
measure the torque necessary to turn spindle in bush-
ings. The measured force necessary to turn spindle
should be 0.30 N.m (2.64 in.-lbs.) torque.
Refer to paragraph 29 for assembly of final drive
bevel gear (18), wheel axle (10), cover (12) and related
parts. Refer to paragraph 26 for capacities and torque
values.
DIFFERENTIAL BEVEL PINION
Four-Wheei-Drive 245 And 255 Models
31. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Remove drain plugs
(D and 34Fig. 15) and drain lubricant from axle,
then refer to paragraph 28 and remove the front drive
axle. If the complete drive axle is to be disassembled
and overhauled, refer to paragraph 30 and remove
the spindle assemblies from both sides. Pull the inner
axles (9), bearings (30) and bevel gears (28) from axle
housings.
Remove screws attaching pinion housing (42) to
right axle housing (1), then carefully withdraw pinion
assembly (36 thorough 46). Be careful not to lose or
damage shims (43) which adjust pinion mesh posi-
tion. Straighten tab washer (37) and remove nut (36).
Pinion shaft (46) can be pushed from bearing (41) and
housing.
Clean and inspect all parts carefully. Pinion (46)
and differential ring gear (47) are available only as a
matched set. Seal (40) should be renewed each time
the pinion is disassembled.
If new bearings are installed, press cups into hous-
ing (42) until seated against shoulder. Press bearing
cone for bearing (45) onto pinion shaft (46) until
seated against shoulder. Position pinion shaft and
bearing cone in housing and bearings cups, then
install cone for bearing (41). Install "O" ring (39) and
spacer (38). Lubricate seal (40) with grease, then
press seal into housing until outer surface is flush
with face of housing. Install tab washer (37) and nut
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
(36), tightening nut until the torque required to turn
pinion shaft in bearings is 0.39-0.59 N.m (3.48-5.16
in.-lbs.). When bearing preload is correct, bend tab of
washer (37) against nut (36).
Shims (43) are used to set the cone point (mesh
position) of thes pinion. To determine the thickness of
shims (43) to install, measure between tip of pinion
and flange surface of pinion housing as shown at
(CFig. 11). A gauge is available, but distance can be
measured with standard gauge blocks. Correct set-
ting distance (C) is 42.95-43.05 mm (1.691-1.695 in.).
If the complete drive axle was disassembled and
overhauled, refer to paragraph 32 and install the
differential assembly. If spindles were removed, refer
to paragraph 30 and install spindle assemblies.
Position the selected thickness of shims (43Fig.
15) on bousing, grease "O" ring (44), then position "O"
ring on housing. Attach pinion assembly to the axle
housing (1), tightening screws retaining pinion hous-
ing to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to
paragraph 28 to install the front drive axle. Refer to
paragraph 26 for capacities and additional torque
values.
DIFFERENTIAL
Four-Wheel-Drive 245 And 255 Models
32. R&R AND OVERHAUL. To remove the differ-
ential, first remove drain plugs (D and 34Fig. 15)
and drain lubricant from axle, then refer to para-
graph 28 and remove the front drive axle. Refer to
paragraph 30 and remove the spindle assemblies
from both sides, then pull tbe inner axles (9), bearings
(30) and bevel gears (28) from axle housings. Remove
screws attaching pinion bousing (42) to right axle
housing (1), then carefully withdraw pinion assembly
(36 thorough 4(3). Be careful not to lose or damage
shims (43) which adjust pinion mesh position. Refer
to paragraph 31 for service to the removed pinion
assembly.
Unbolt left ajcle housing (7) and separate from
differential housing and right axle housing (1). Dif-
ferential assembly can be lifted from housing. Be
careful not to lose shims (49 and 59), if carrier bear-
ings (48 and 58; are removed from axle housings.
Use puller to remove bearings (48 and 58). Ring
gear (47) is attached to differential case (57) with
eight screws locked by lock plates (55). Drive roll pin
(56) from case and cross shaft (50), then drive cross
shaft from case and gears (54). Roll gears (54) and
thrust washers (53) from differential case, then with-
draw side gears (52) and thrust washers (51).
Assembly of d ifferential is reverse of disassembly
procedure. Apply medium strength thread lock to
Paragraphs 32-33
screws retaining ring gear (47), tighten screws and
lock by bending tab of lock plate against flat of screw
head.
To adjust bevel gear backlash, refer to paragraph
31, measure bevel pinion gear cone point and install
the bevel pinion assembly with the selected shims
(43). Make sure that bearings (48 and 58) are both
firmly seated against shoulder of differential case
(57). Install the differential assembly in the right axle
housing (1), using some of the selected shims (49).
Make sure that bearing (48) is seated firmly against
shims (49), then measure backlash of gears (46 and
47), using a dial indicator against heads of screws
(55). Correct backlash is 0.25-0.35 mm (0.010-0.014
in.). If backlash is excessive, remove some of the
shims from right side (49) and install at left (59).
Make sure that differential right carrier bearing (48)
is fully seated when measuring and that some back-
lash exists.
To adjust differential carrier bearing side play,
measure distance between outside edge of bearing
(58) and flange of axle housing as shown at (AFig.
12), then measure depth of bearing bore in left axle
housing. A special gauge is available which can be
used to measure these distances directly, but if the
gauge is not available, depth of bore in axle housing
can be measured as described in Fig. 13. Subtract
measured protrusion of bearing (AFig. 12) from
depth of bearing bore from housing flange (C minus
BFig. 13). Select thickness of shims (59Fig. 15)
for installation on left side that will remove all but
0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.) play when axle housings are
assembled. The total thiclaiess of shims (49 and 59)
adjusts side play of carrier bearings, but moving
shims from one side to the other changes backlash
between pinion and ring gear.
After shims (59) are selected, coat mating surfaces
of housings (1 and 7) with sealer and attach left
housing to right. Make sure that shims (59) remain
in position while assembling and tighten retaining
screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to
paragraph 30 to determine correct thickness of shims
(29). Refer to paragraph 28 to install the front drive
axle and to paragraph 26 for capacities and additional
torque values.
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
Four-Wheel-Drive 245 And 255 Models
33. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Power for front
wheel drive is from drive shaft located below the pto
front shaft. Refer to paragraph 152 for service to the
front wheel drive shaft and related gears.
29
Paragraphs 34-35 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

FRONT AXLE SYSTEM

(FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE 275 MODEL)
34. Mechanical front-wheel drive is available on Outside diameter 1071 mm (42 in.)
235, 235H, 245, 255 and 275 models. The following Max. Inflation Pressure 115 kPa (17 psi)
paragraphs 35 through 42 cover service to the Front Rim size W9 x 24
Drive System used on 275 model. Refer to paragraph
Front
17 through 24 for service to the Front Drive System
Tire size 7-16-4 ply
used on 235 and 235H models or to paragraph 26
Tread type FSLM
through 33 for service to the Front Drive System used
on 245 and 255 models. Max. Infiation Pressure 180 kPa (26 psi)
Rim size 5 JA x 16
Rear
MAINTENANCE Tire size 12.4-24-4 ply
Tread type Rl
Four-Wheel-Drive 275 Model Max. Infiation Pressure 85-110 kPa (12-16 psi)
Rim size WIO x 24
35. Oil should be maintained at level of plugs Front
(PFig. 17) located on both wheel hub cases. Oil is Tire size 8-16-4 ply
added at fill plug (F) located on each housing (1 and Tread type FSLM
7). After the first 50 hours of operation and every 200 Max. Inflation Pressure . . 155 kPa (23 psi)
hours thereafter, drain oil from front drive axle by Rim size 5JAxl6
removing the two plugs (D) and plug (34). Fill with Rear
"Case IH 135 HEP SAE 85W-140" or equivalent gear Tire size . 13.6-24-4 ply
lubricant to correct level. Capacity is approximately Tread type Rl
7.3 L (7.7 qt.); however, some lubricant may be Max. Inflation Pressure . . 95 kPa (14 psi)
trapped in housing. Rim size Wll X 24
Refer to the following for matched (front and rear)
standard tire size and recommended pressure. Op- Front
tional tires and wheels may be offered and pressures Tire size 27 X 8.50-15-4 ply
may be different than shown, depending upon load Tread type G2
and ground conditions; but front and rear wheel and Max. Inflation Pressure . 205 kPa (30 psi)
tire sizes should be matched as indicated. Mismatch- Rim size 7JAxl5
ing front and rear wheel sizes may cause excessive Rear
tire slippage and possibly accelerate wear of drive Tire size 355/80D20-4 ply
system components. Tread type PDl
Front Max. Inflation Pressure 70-95 kPa (10-14 psi)
Tire size 7-14-4 ply Rim size Wll X 20
Tread type AG Front
Outside diameter 687 mm (27 in.) Tire size 212/80D15-4 ply
Max. Inflation Pressure 175 kPa (25 psi) Tread type PDl
Rim size 5 JA x 14 Max. Inflation Pressure 165 kPa (24 psi)
Rear Rim size 7JAxl5
Tire size 12.4-24-4 ply Rear
Tread type AG Rl Tire size 18.4-16.1-4 ply
Outside diameter 1150 mm (45 in.) Tread type G2
Max. Inflation Pressure 85-110 kPa (12-16 psi) Max. Infiation Pressure 85kPa(12psi)
Rim size WIO x 24 Rim size . . 16LBxl6.1
Front Front wheels should be installed with concave
Tire size 7-14-4 ply (cupped) side in, toward center, and should not be
Tread type ES reversed. Tighten front wheel retaining nuts to 118-
Outside diameter 660 mm (26 in.) 132 N.m (87-98 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Max. Inflation Pressure 175 kPa (25 psi)
Rim size 5JA x 14 Rear wheel to axle hub bolts should be tightened to
Rear 118-132 N.m (87-98 ft.-lbs.) torque and nuts securing
Tire size 11.2/10-24-4 ply rear wheel rim to wheel disc should be tightened to
Tread type ES 152-172 N.m (112-127 ft.-lbs.) torque.

30
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY AND
STEERING LINKAGE
Four-Wheel-Drive 275 Model
36. TIE ROD AND TOE-IN. A single tie rod (62
Fig. 17) connects left and right steering arms (71 and
72). Automotive type ends are not adjustable for wear
and should be renewed if worn. Attach steering tie
rod ends to steering arms, tighten castellated nuts
and install cotter pins. Recommended toe-in is 0-5
mm (0-0.20 in.) and is adjusted by threading rod ends
into tie rod to change the distance between ends. To
check alignmeiit, measure distance between wheel
rims at front and rear on centerline of axle, parallel
to ground. Rotate wheels and re-measure to be sure
that wheels are not bent, giving incorrect reading.
Tighten rod end jam nut to 59-88 N.m (43-65 ft.-lbs.)
torque after wheel alignment is correctly set.
37. R&R AXLE ASSEMBLY. To remove front axle
assembly, flrst remove any front mounted equipment
and weights. Detach front end of drag link from left
steering arm (613Fig. 17), raise front of tractor and
block in such a way that it will not interiere with
removal of axle. Support tractor frame behind axle
and remove both front wheels. If unit is to be disas-
sembled, remove plugs (D and 34) to drain oil from
front axle ass(?mbly. Remove the front axle drive
shaft. Support axle level withfloor,in such a way that
it can be lowered and moved away from tractor.
Remove screws attaching pivot brackets (77 and 84)
to frame, carefully lower the axle assembly, then roll
axle from unde r tractor.
If removed, install new "O" ring (88), tighten screws
retaining housing front pivot (87) to axle housing and
tighten retaining screws to 73-83 N.m (54-61 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Tighten nut (80) until bracket (84) moves
freely without end play, then stake nut in position.
Reverse removal procedure to install axle. Tighten
screws attachiiig front bracket (84) to 54-64 N.m
(40-47 ft.-lbs.) torque, then tighten screws attaching
rear bracket (77) to the same torque. Refer to para-
graph 35 for ca]>acities and additional torque values.
FRONT FINAL DRIVES AND
WHEEL AXLES
Four-Wheel-Drive 275 Model
38. R&R ANID OVERHAUL. Raise and block front
of tractor in a v/ay that is safe and will not interfere
with the removal of front wheels or final drive. Re-
move drain plug (DFig. 17), drain oil from axle
housing and remove wheel assembly. Remove the
screws that attach cover (12) to flnal drive housing
(23), then separate housings. Bearing (19) is retained
Paragraphs 36-39
on wheel axle shaft (10) by snap ring (15). Use a
suitable puller to remove gear (18) and bearing (19).
Be careful and not damage shims and washers (16
and 17). Wheel axle (10) should be easily bumped
from inner race of bearing (13). Outer race of bearing
(13) is retained in bore of cover (12) by snap ring (14).
Seal (11) can be removed if renewal is required. Be
sure to remove "O" ring (69) from mating surfaces of
flnal drive housing (23) and cover (12).
To assemble, proceed as follows. Press bearing (13)
into bore of cover (12), install snap ring (14), press
new seal (11) into bore of cover (12) and grease lips of
seal.
The thickness of shims (17) determines the back-
lash between bevel gears (18 and 20). To check back-
lash, insert wheel axle shaft (10) through seal and
press into bearing inner race, until seated. Install the
selected shims (17) and gear (18), then attach the
partially assembled wheel axle, cover and gear to
housing (23). Temporarily tighten screws retaining
the cover and measure backlash between bevel gears
using a dial indicator. If backlash is not within the
range of 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.), add or reduce
thickness of shims (17Fig. 17).
To complete flnal assembly, install inner bearing
(19), shims (16) and snap ring (15). Shims (16) should
be thick enough to fill gap between inner race of
bearing (19) and snap ring (15). Thickest shim (16)
should be against snap ring. Apply sealer to mating
surfaces before attaching the cover, then install the
retaining screws, making sure that the one special
piloted screw is installed in the close fitting hole.
Tighten all eight retaining screws to 30-39 N.m (22-
29 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to paragraph 35 for capaci-
ties and additional torque values.
FRONT DRIVE SPINDLES AND
INNER AXLES
Four-Wheei-Drive 275 Model
39. R&R AND OVERHAUL. The front drive spin-
dle assembly, including housings (23 and 26Fig. 17)
and related parts can be separated from axle housing
(1 or 7) as a unit. Raise and block front of tractor in a
way that is safe and will not interfere with the re-
moval of front wheels or flnal drive, then remove the
front wheels. Remove drain plugs (D and 34) and
permit oil to drain from axle housing. Disconnect tie
rod end from lower steering arms (71 and 72). Steer-
ing drag link must be disconnected from steering arm
(63) if left spindle is removed. Remove the six screws
attaching king pin housing (26) to axle housing (1 or
7), then lift unit from tractor. Notice that one screw
is a special close fltting pilot screw.
Refer to paragraph 38 for removal and service to
the wheel axle (10) and final drive bevel gear (18).
31
Paragraph 39 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 17Expioded view of front drive axie used on four-wtieei drive 275 modeis.
D. Drain plug 45. Tapered roller bearing 68. Ball thrust bearings
F. Fill plugs 23. Final drive housing 46. Pinion gear & shaft 69. "O" ring (56 mm ID)
P. Level plug 24. Bushing 47. Ring gear 71. Steering arm
1. Right housing 25. Seal 48. Ball bearing 72. Steering arm
2. Vent cap 26. King pin housing 49. Shims (left side) 73. Right pivot arm
7. Left housing 27. Snap ring (28 mm ID) 50. Differential pinion shafl 74. Spacer
8. "O" rings (80 mm) 28. Pinion gear (15 teeth) 51. Thrust washer 75. "O" ring (65 mm ID)
9. Inner axle shaft 29. Shims 52. Differential side gear 76. Seal
10. Wheel axle shaft 30. Ball bearing 53. Thrust washer 77. Rear bracket
11. Seal 31. Kingpin shaft 54. Differential pinion 78. Bushing
12. Cover 32. Ball bearing 55. Retaining screws & lock plate 79. "O" ring (80 mm ID)
13. Outer ball bearing 33. Upper bearing holder 56. Roll pin 80. Nut
14. Snap ring (86 mm OD) 35. Pinion gear (17 teeth) 57. Differential housing 81. Flat spacer (62 mm OD)
15. Snap ring (32 mm ID) 36. Bearing locknut 58. Ball bearing 82. "O" ring (40 mm)
16. Shims & spacer 38. Spacer 59. Shims (right side) 83. Bushing
17. Shims 39. "O" ring (30 mm ID) 60. Shims 84. Front bracket
18. Bevel gear (38 teeth) 40. Oil seal 61. Bushing 85. "O" ring (40 mm)
19. Inner ball bearing 41. Tapered roller bearing 62. Tie rod 86. Flat spacer (same as 81)
20. Pinion gear (13 teeth) 42. Pinion shaft housing 63. Left steering arm 87. Housing pivot
21. Lower cover 43. Shims 66. "O" ring (29 mm ID) 88. "O" ring (70 mm ID)
22. Ball bearing 44. "O" ring (75 mm) 67. "O" ring (175 mm OD) 89. Shims

32
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Unbolt and remove steering arm (63) or pivot arm
(73), then unbolt and remove upper bearing holder
(33). Do not lose or damage shims (60), which are used
to adjust end ]3lay of king pin or shims (89), which are
used to adjust bearings (22 and 32). Upper thrust
bearing (68) v^ill be removed with holder (33). Shims
may be located between holder (33) and upper thrust
bearing (68). Unbolt and remove steering arm (71 or
72) and lower cover (21). Lower thrust bearing (68)
will be remo\ed with cover. Shims may be located
between lower cover (21) and lower thrust bearing
(68). Bump top of shaft (31) lightly to remove shaft
and lower bearing (22). Separate final drive housing
(23) from king^ pin housing (26) and withdraw gears
(20 and 35). Inner axles (9), gears (28) and bearings
(30) can be withdrawn if service is required. Shims
(29) are used to adjust backlash of gears (28 and 35)
and should not be lost or damaged.
Clean and inspect all parts for wear or damage,
then renew as necessary. The seal (25) is thin and
easily distortesd if not pressed into place carefully
using a close fitting piloted assembly tool. Coat thrust
bearing (68) with grease and position in bore of hous-
ing (23).
Lower cover (21), thrust bearing (68) and lower
bearing (22) should be assembled, measured and
shims should he added between thrust bearing and
lower cover if necessary before final installation. The
upper holder (33), thrust bearing (68) and upper
bearing (32) sh ould also be measured and shims (89)
added if necessary before installing these parts.
Thrust bearin|:s (68) must be installed in lower cover
(21) or upper holder (33) with the races having
smaller inside diameter contacting the bearing (22 or
32). Position be aring (22 or 32) on the installed thrust
bearing and measure distance (A or BFig. 18).
Distance (B) for lower cover should be 25.0 mm (0.984
in.) and is measured between top of bearing and
flange of cover. Distance (A) for upper holder should
be 28.2 mm (1.11 in.) and is measured between bot-
tom of bearing and lower surface of shims or bore for
thrust bearing (if shims are not installed). Add shims
between bore cf cover or holder and race of thrust
bearing to incn^ase distance (A or B).
Coat "O" ring (69Fig. 17) vdth grease and install
over hub of lower cover. Press lower bearing (22) into
gear case (23), then install the lower cover (21), se-
lected shims, thrust bearing (68) and steering arm (71
or 72). Tighten the retaining screws to 30-40 N.m
(22-29 ft.-lbs.) torque. Notice that one of the screws
is a tight fitting piloted screw. Position lower gear (20)
and insert shafi: (31).
Press upper bearing (32) into bore of king pin
housing (26). Coat mating surfaces of king pin hous-
ing (26) and holder (33) with sealer and pack upper
thrust bearing with grease, then install the holder
(33) with upper thrust bearing (68) and selected
shims. Coat threads of retaining screws with sealing
Paragraph 39 (Cont.)
33 68
32.
OA/D
Fig. 18Shims should be instaiied between thrust bear-
ing (68) and bore of cover (21) or hoider (33) to establish
dimension (A or B). Smaller inner diameter (L) of thrust
bearings shouid be next to bail bearing (22 or 32) as
shown.
tape or sealer, then tighten to 30-40 N.m (22-29
ft.-lbs.) torque.
Coat bushing (24), machined surface of king pin
housing (26) and lips of the installed seal (25) with
grease. Position gear (35) in king pin housing and
carefully slide king pin housing (26) into housing (23),
seal (25) and bushing (24). Splines of shaft (31) should
enter splines of gear (35) and piloted end of shaft
should enter bearing (32). Install steering arm (63) or
right pivot arm (73) temporarily and tighten retain-
ing screws. Measure clearance between holder (33)
and steering arm (63) or right pivot arm (73), then
select shims (60) of sufficient thickness to limit clear-
ance to 0.05-0.20 mm (0.0020-0.0079 in.). Remove
steering arm (63) or right pivot arm (73), then grease
"O" ring (66) and bushing (61). Install "O" ring (66)
and selected shims (60) and reinstall steering arm or
right steering pivot (73). The special piloted retaining
screws are in the two close fitting piloted holes. Do
not replace the special piloted screws with standard
screws. Turning the spindle should not require exces-
sive force.
Thickness of shims (29) determines the backlash
between bevel gears (28 and 35). Tb check backlash,
install inner axle (9), bearing (30), shims (29) and
snap ring (27), then temporarily attach king pin (26)
to axle housing. Attach a dial indicator as shown in
Fig. 19 and measure backlash between bevel gears.
If backlash is not within the range of 0.2-0.4 mm
(0.008-0.016 in.), add or reduce thickness of shims
(29Fig. 17). Before final assembly, make sure "O"
rings (8) are installed, coated with grease and in good
33
Paragraph 40
Fig. 19A diai indicator can be attached as shown to
measure bacidash between gears (26 & 35Fig. 17). Diai
indicator is contacting teeth of iower gear (20Fig. 17).
Fig. 20A diai indicator can be attached as shown to
measure bacidash between gears (16 & 20Fig. 17). Diai
indicator is contacting teeth of gear (35Fig. 17).
condition, then tighten retaining screws to 54-63 N.m
(40-47 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Thickness of shims (17) determines the backlash
between bevel gears (18 and 20). To check backlash,
attach the wheel axle shaft (10), seal (11), cover (12),
bearing (13), snap ring (14), selected shims (17) and
gear (18) to housing (23). Bearing (19), shims (16) and
snap ring (15) do not need to be installed to check the
backlash. Temporarily tighten screws retaining the
cover. With king pin housing (26) separated from axle
housing (7), attach a dial indicator as shown in Fig.
20 and measure backlash between bevel gears. If
backlash is not within the range of 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-
0.016 in.), add or reduce thickness of shims (17Fig.
17). If removed, install inner bearing (19), shims (16)
34
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
and snap ring (15). Shims (16) should be thick enough
to flll gap between inner race of bearing (19) and snap
ring (15). Thickest shim (16) should be against snap
ring. Apply sealer to mating surfaces before attaching
the cover, then install the retaining screws, making
sure that the one special piloted screw is installed in
the close fltting hole. Tighten all eight retaining
screws to 30-39 N.m (22-29 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to
paragraph 35 for capacities and additional torque
values.
DiFFERENTiAL BEVEL PINION
Four-Wheel-Drive 275 Modei
40. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Remove drain plugs
(D and 34Fig. 17) and drain lubricant from axle,
then refer to paragraph 37 and remove the front drive
axle. If the complete drive axle is to be disassembled
and overhauled, refer to paragraph 39 and remove
the spindle assemblies from both sides. Pull the inner
axles (9), bearings (30) and bevel gears (28) from axle
housings.
Remove screws attaching pinion housing (42) to left
axle housing (7), then carefully withdraw pinion as-
sembly (36 thorough 46). Be careful not to lose or
damage shims (43) which adjust pinion mesh posi-
tion. Original thickness of shims (43) can be rein-
stalled unless a different pinion housing (42), axle
housing (7), bearing (45) or bevel pinion (46) is being
installed or if mesh position was incorrect. Pinion
shaft (46) can be pushed from bearing (41) and hous-
ing after unstaking, then removing nut (36).
Clean and inspect all parts carefully. Pinion (46)
and differential ring gear (47) are available only as a
matched set. Seal (40) should be renewed each time
the pinion is disassembled.
To determine correct thickness for shims (43), press
bearing cups into housing (42) until seated against
shoulder. Position cone for bearing (45) in cup and
measure distance (DFig. 21). Add shims equal to
the difference between measured distance (D) and
27.9 mm (1.098 in.).
Press cone for bearing (45Fig. 17) onto pinion
shaft (46) until seated against shoulder. Position pin-
ion shaft and bearing cone in housing and bearings
cups, then install cone for bearing (41). Install "O"
ring (39) and spacer (38). Lubricate seal (40) with
grease, then press seal into housing until outer sur-
face is 5 mm (0.197 in.) below rear face of spacer (38).
Install nut (36), tightening nut until the torque re-
quired to turn pinion shaft in bearings is 0.29-0.39
N.m (2.6-3.5 in.-lbs.) if the old bearings are being
reused or 0.87-1.18 N.m (7.8-10.4 in.-lbs.) if bearings
are new. When bearing preload is correct, stake nut
(36) onto shaft (46).
If the complete drive axle was disassembled and
overhauled, refer to paragraph 41 and install the
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Fig. 21To determine thickness of shims (43Fig. 17),
measure distance (D), then refer to text.
diflferential assembly. If spindles were removed, refer
to paragraph 39 and install spindle assemblies.
Position th! selected thickness of shims (43) on
housing, grease "O" ring (44), then position "O" ring
on housing. Attach pinion assembly to the axle hous-
ing (7), tighterdng screws retaining pinion housing to
30-39 N.m (22-29 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to paragraph
37 to install the front drive axle. Refer to paragraph
35 for capacities and additional torque values.
DIFFERENTIAL
Four-Wheel-Drive 275 Model
41. R&R AJfD OVERHAUL. To remove the differ-
ential, first remove drain plugs (D and 34Fig. 17)
and drain lubricant from axle, then refer to para-
graph 37 and remove the front drive axle. Refer to
paragraph 39 and remove the spindle assemblies
from both sides, then pull the inner axles (9), bearings
(30) and bevel gears (28) from axle housings. Remove
screws attaching pinion housing (42) to left axle hous-
ing (7), then carefully withdraw pinion assembly (36
thorough 46). Be careful not to lose or damage shims
(43) which adjust pinion mesh position. Refer to para-
graph 40 for service to the removed pinion assembly.
Unbolt right axle housing (1) and separate from
differential housing and left axle housing (7). Differ-
ential assembly can be lifted from housing. Be careful
not to lose shims (49 and 59), if carrier bearings (48
and 58) are removed from axle housings.
Paragraph 41
Use puller to remove bearings (48 and 58). Ring
gear (47) is attached to differential case (57) with
eight screws locked by lock plates (55). Drive roll pin
(56) from case and cross shaft (50), then drive cross
shaft from case and gears (54). Roll gears (54) and
thrust washers (53) from differential case, then with-
draw side gears (52) and thrust washers (51).
Assembly of differential is reverse of disassembly
procedure. Apply medium strength thread lock to
screws retaining ring gear (47), tighten screws and
lock by bending tab of lock platfe against flat of screw
head. Make sure that ring gear is seated squarely
against differential case (57).
Ib adjust bevel gear backlash, first refer to para-
graph 40, determine correct thickness of shims (43),
then install the bevel pinion assembly with the se-
lected shims (43). Make sure that bearings (48 and
58) are both firmly seated against shoulder of differ-
ential case (57). Install the differential assembly in
the left axle housing (7), using some of the selected
shims (49). Make sure that bearing (48) is seated
firmly against shims (49), then measure backlash of
gears (46 and 47), using a dial indicator against heads
of screws (55). Refer to Fig. 22. Correct backlash is
0.15-0.30 mm (0.006-0.012 in.). If backlash is exces-
sive, remove some of the shims from left side (49),
then recheck. Add shims (49) to increase backlash.
Make sure that differential left carrier bearing (48)
is fully seated when measuring and that some back-
lash exists.
Add shims (59) of sufficient thickness to reduce
differential carrier bearing side play to 0-0.1 mm
(0-0.004 in,). To check differential carrier bearing side
play, measure distance between outside edge of bear-
ing (58) and flange of axle housing as shown at
(AFig. 12), then measure depth of bearing bore in
Fig. 22Measure backlash ofdlfferentiai bevel gears with
a dial Indicator against ring gear attaching screws as
shown.
35
Paragraph 42 CASE/INTERNATiONAL

left axle housing as described in Fig. 13. Subtract

measured protrusion of bearing (AFig. 12) from
depth of beppng bore from housing flange (C minus
BFig. 13). Select thickness of shims (59Fig. 17)
for installation on right side that will remove all but
0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.) play when axle housings are
assembled. The total thickness of shims (49 and 59)
adjusts side play of carrier bearings, but moving
shims from one side to the other changes backlash
between pinion and ring gear.
After shims (59) are selected, coat "O" ring (67) with
grease and install on housing (1), then attacb right
housing to left. Make sure that shims (59) remain in
position while assembling and tighten retaining
Fig. 23~~Exploded view of drive shaft and cover typical of screws to 54-63 N.m (40-47 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to
275 models with mechanical front wheel drive.
paragraph 39 to determine correct thickness of shims
1. Front coupler
2. Snap ring 8. Bearing (29). Refer to paragraph 37 to install the front drive
3. Drive shaft 9. Snap ring axle and to paragraph 35 for capacities and additional
4. Shaft cover 10. "O" rings torque values.
5. "O" ring 11. Collar
6. Bearing holder 12. Snap ring
7. Upper & lower covers 13. Rear coupler FRONT WHEEL DRIVE

Four-WheeI'Drive 275 Model

42. R&R AM) OVERHAUL. The drive shaft is
sbown in Fig. 23 and tbe gear box is shown in Fig. 24.
Power for front wbeel drive is from a gear located in
the lower section of the range transmission. To re-
move front drive gear case (Fig. 24), first drain oil
from transmission, rear axle center bousing and hy-
draulic system. Remove front axle drive shaft, re-
move the six screws attaching gear case housing to
rear axle center housing, then remove front drive
gear case and output shaft.

To disassemble, remove rubber cap (9Fig. 24) and

snap ring (8). Tap shaft (2) and bearing (7) rearward
out of housing and remove front bearing (4) and gear
(5).
Front seal (3) must be removed and installed from
Fig. 24Exploded view of front drive gear box used on inside case, with spring loaded lip toward inside.
275 models with mechanical front wheel drive. When assembling, reverse disassembly procedure.
1. Housing Tighten retaining screws to 26 N.m (19 ft.-lbs.)
2. Output shaft 6. Snap ring
3. Front seal 7. Ball bearing
torque. Fill transmission, rear axle center housing
4. Ball bearing 8. Snap ring and hydraulic system witb proper amount of CASE
5. Grear 9. Cap IH HY-TRAN PLUS or equivalent oil.

36
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 43-45

MANUAL STEERING SYSTEM

43. The manual steering gear used on some 235,
235H, 245 and 255 models is serviced as described in
tbe following: paragraphs 44, 45 and 46. Refer to
paragraphs 47, 48 and 49 for servicing the manual
steering gear used on 265 models and to paragraphs
50, 51 and 52 for servicing the manual steering gear
used on 275 models.
Manual Steering 235, 235H, 245 And 255
Models
44. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Ib remove the
steering gear, disconnect cables from battery, then
remove the l^attery. Detach wires which interfere
with removal of steering gear from glow plugs, oil
pressure sender, water temperature sender, starting
motor and alternator. Disconnect tachometer cable,
remove steering wheel, then remove panel and cover
from around steering shaft. Remove fuel tank and
bracket, detach drag link from steering arm, then
unbolt and remove the steering gear assembly.
When reinstalling, tighten screws attaching steer-
ing gear to clutch housing to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Be sure that wires are routed correctly and
reconnected to proper terminals.
45. OVERHAUL. Remove retaining nut, then use
suitable puller to remove steering (pitman) arm (9
Fig. 25) from steering shaft (11). Remove adjusting
screw locknut (22), then remove screws attaching
side cover (15) to housing (12). Turn the sector adjust-
ing screw (13) in all the way, while removing side
cover. Pull sector shaft (11) from bore in steering gear
housing. Unbolt and remove steering column (18),
then pull steering shaft (1) and ball nut assembly (7)
from steering gear housing. Be careful not to lose or
damage shims (20).
Clean and inspect all components for excessive
wear or damage. Check end play of the ball nut
assembly. Desired end play is 0-0.03 mm (0-0.0012
in.) and ball nut assembly should be renewed if play
exceeds 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Use a suitable puller to
remove races for bearings (5 and 8) and if new races
are to be installed.
Select thickness of shims (20) to provide bearings
(5 and 8) with proper preload as follows. Be sure that
bearing races are seated in bores, coat races with
grease, then install bearing balls. Insert ball nut and
shaft assembly (1 and 7) into housing (12), then
install column (18) using shims (20) which were origi-
nally installed. Tighten column retaining screws,
then measure torque necessary to turn steering shaft
(1). Correct torque is 0.24-0.54 N.m (2.2-4.8 in.-lbs.)
and is adjusted by changing thickness of shims (20).
This desired torque does not include any resistance
caused by bushing (17). After determining correct
thickness of shims (20), remove column, install "O"
ring (21), reinstall column and selected shims, then

Fig. 25Expioded view ofmanuai steer-

ing gear typicai of type used on some
235,235H, 245 and 255 modeis.
1. Steering shafl
2. Rivet 13. Sector adjusting
3. Roll pin screw & shim
4. Spring 14. Gasket
5. Upper bearing 15. Side cover
6. "O" rings 16. Column cover
7. Ball nut & 17. Column
shafl assy. bushing
8. Lower bearing 18. Column
9. Pitman arm 19. Vent
10. Oil seal 20. Shim
11. Sector shaft 21. "Cring
12. Steering gear 22. Locknut
housing 23. Pill plug

\ X

37
Paragraphs 46-47 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

tighten retaining screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) Install steering arm (9) with punch mark on shaft (11)
torque. and arm aligned.

46. ADJUSTMENT. Steering wheel free play

Check clearance between sector shaft (11) and foot
of adjusting screw (13) with a feeler gauge. Shims of
various thicknesses can be installed on foot of adjust-
ing screw to reduce clearance between screw and
sector shaft. Adjusting screw and shim should slide
easily in groove of sector shaft, but should have less
than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) clearance. Install seal (10)
with lip toward inside. Grease seal lip, assemble
selected shim and screw (13) in sector shaft (11), then
install sector shaft and adjusting screw. Coat mating
surface of side cover (15) and housing (12) with sealer,
then install side cover, tightening the retaining
screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Fill steer-
ing gear with 0.3 L (0.63 pint) of gear oil and install
steering wheel. Attach a spring scale to outer edge of
steering wheel and measure torque required to begin
turning. Proper starting torque is 0.61 kg (1.34 lbs.).
Measure the amount of backlash at the outer edge of
steering wheel and adjust to nearly 0 by turning
adjusting screw (13). Tighten locknut after adjusting
the screw (13). Backlash at wheel rim should be less
than 10 mm (0.4 in.), but should not cause binding.
(backlash) can be adjusted by turning the steering
sector adjusting screw (13Fig. 25) without remov-
ing the steering gear assembly. Tb adjust screw (13),
first loosen locknut (22), then turn screw in to de-
crease free play and out to increase. Specified free
play is 0-10 mm (0-0.4 in.), as measured at outside
rim of steering wheel. Excessive play which is not
affected by the adjustment screw can be caused by
wear or damage.
Refer to paragraph 45 for checking ball nut end
play and adjusting end play of steering shaft bear-
ings.
Manual Steering 265 Model
47. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. The steering
gear assembly (3Fig. 26) is attached to the front
frame as shown and can be removed after detaching
the steering rods from steering arm (9) and universal
joint (2) from steering shaft.
Fill steering gear vdth gear oil through opening for
plug (23Fig. 27) before installing. Make sure that
all retaining screws and nuts are tightened securely
when installing.

Fig. 27Expioded view of manual steering gear used on

some Modei 265 tractors.
Fig. 26 View of steering gear assembiy and reiated parts
5. Upper bearing
for 265 modei. Refer to Fig. 27 for exploded view of manual 7. Ball nut & shaft assy.
steering gear (3). 8. Lower bearing 14. Gasket
1. Steering shaft 9. Steering arm 15. Side cover
2. Universal joint 18. Column 10. Oil seal 19. Adjuster
3. Steering gear 24. Upper column support 11. Sector shaft 20. Locknut
4. Dowel pin 25. Lower column support 12. Steering gear housing 21. Seal
9. Steering arm 26. Bearing 13. Sector adjusting 22. Locknut
17. Column bushing 27. Snap ring screw & shim 23. Fill plug

38
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
48. OVERHAUL. Remove retaining nut, then use
suitable puller to remove steering (pitman) arm (9
Fig. 27) fronri steering shaft (11). Remove adjusting
screw locknut (22), then remove screws attaching
side cover (15) to housing (12). Turn the sector adjust-
ing screw (13) in all the way, while removing side
cover. Pull sector shaft (11) from bore in steering gear
housing. Loosen locknut (20), unscrew and remove
adjuster (19), then pull ball nut and shaft assembly
(7) from steeiring gear housing.
Clean and inspect all components for excessive
wear or damage. Check end play of the ball nut
assembly. Deisired end play is 0-0.03 mm (0-0.0012
in.) and ball nut assembly should be renewed if play
exceeds 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Use a suitable puller to
remove races for bearings (5 and 8) and if new races
are to be installed.
Adjust preload of bearings (5 and 8) while assem-
bling, as follows. Install seal (21) with lip toward
inside. Be sui'e that bearing races are seated in bores,
coat races with grease, then install bearing balls.
Insert ball nut and shaft assembly (7) into housing
(12), then install and tighten adjuster (19). Torque
necessary to turn steering shaft (7) should be 0.2-0.5
N.m (1.8-4.4 in.-lbs.) and is adjusted by loosening or
tightening adjuster (19). Tighten locknut (20) to
maintain adjustment position.
Check clearance between sector shaft (11) and foot
of adjusting screw (13) with a feeler gauge. Shims of
various thicknesses can be installed on foot of adjust-
ing screw to reduce clearance between screw and
sector shaft. Adjusting screw and shim should slide
easily in groove of sector shaft, but should have less
than 0.05 mra (0.002 in.) clearance. Install seal (10)
with lip toward inside. Grease seal lip, assemble
selected shim and screw (13) in sector shaft (11), then
install sector shaft and adjusting screw. Coat mating
surface of side cover (15) and housing (12) with sealer,
then install side cover, tightening the retaining
screws to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Fill steer-
ing gear with approximately 0.3 L (0.63 pint) of gear
oil before installing steering gear assembly. Measure
the amount of backlash at the outer edge of steering
shaft (7) and adjust to nearly 0 by turning adjusting
screw (13). Backlash, measured at steering shaft,
should be less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), but should not
cause bindin[j. Tighten locknut (22) after adjusting.
Install steering arm (9) with punch mark on shaft (11)
and arm aligned. Tighten steering arm retaining nut
to 140-180 N.m (103-132 ft.-lbs.) torque.
49. ADJUSTMENT. Steering shaft free play
(backlash) can be adjusted by turning the steering
sector adjusting screw (13Fig. 27) without remov-
ing the steering gear assembly. Tb adjust screw (13),
first loosen locknut (22), then turn screw in to de-
crease free play and out to increase. Specified free
play is 0-0.5 mm (0-0.020 in.) when measured at
Paragraphs 48-51
steering shaft (7), but should not cause binding. Back-
lash should be approximately 0-10 mm (0-0.4 in.),
when measured at outside rim of steering wheel.
Excessive play which is not affected by the adjust-
ment screw can be caused by wear or damage.
Refer to paragraph 48 for checking ball nut end
play and adjusting end play of steering shaft bear-
ings.
Manuai Steering 275 Model
50. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the
steering gear assembly, proceed as follows. Remove
steering wheel retaining nut, then use suitable puller
to remove steering wheel from shaft. Unbolt and
remove covers from around steering assembly, then
detach lower end of air inlet hose from engine. Dis-
connect tachometer cable, remove the throttle hand
control lever assembly, then unbolt and remove the
hood assembly. Unbolt and remove fuel tank and
bracket, then disconnect drag link from steering pit-
man arm. Unbolt and remove the steering gear as-
sembly.
When installing, tighten the two 85 mm (3.35 in.)
long retaining screws and the two 35 mm (1.38 in.)
long screws to 30-39 N.m (22-29 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Tighten nut retaining pitman arm to 118-156 N.m
(87-115 ft.-lbs.) torque. Tighten tbe 12 screws attach-
ing hood to 25-30 N.m (18-21 ft.-lbs.) torque. Adjust
tension of throttle lever so that 3-4 kg. (6.6-8.8 lbs.)
of force is necessary to move lever from slow speed to
high speed. Install steering wheel with center spoke
up, toward front. Nut attaching steering wheel
should be tightened to 49-78 N.m (36-57 ft.-lbs.)
torque.
51, OVERHAUL. Remove retaining nut, then use
suitable puller to remove steering (pitman) arm (9
Fig. 28) from steering shaft (11). Remove adjusting
screw locknut (22), then remove screws attaching
side cover (15) to housing (12). Turn the sector adjust-
ing screw (13) in all the way, while removing side
cover. Pull sector shaft (11) from bore in steering gear
housing. Loosen locknut (20), unscrew steering col-
umn (19) from housing (12), then pull ball nut and
shaft assembly (1 and 7) from steering gear housing.
Clean and inspect all components for excessive
wear or damage. Check end play of the ball nut
assembly. Desired end play is 0-0.03 mm (0-0.0012
in.) and ball nut assembly should be renewed if play
exceeds 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Use a suitable puller to
remove races for bearings (5 and 8) and if new races
are to be installed.
Adjust preload of bearings (5 and 8) while assem-
bling, as follows. Be sure that bearing races are
seated in bores, coat races with grease, then install
bearing balls. Insert ball nut and shaft assembly (1
39
Paragraphs 52-54 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

pull is 0.1-0.25 kg. (0.22-0.55 lbs.) v^^hen measured at

rim of steering wheel by a spring scale.
Check clearance between sector shaft (11) and foot
of adjusting screw (13) with a feeler gauge. Shims of
various thicknesses can be installed on foot of adjust-
ing screw to reduce clearance between screw and
sector shafl. Adjusting screw and shim should slide
easily in groove of sector shaft, but should have less
than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) clearance. Install seal (10)
with lip toward inside. Grease seal lip, assemble
selected shim and screw (13) in sector shaft (11), then
install sector shaft and adjusting screw. Install side
cover (15) and gasket (14), tightening the retaining
screws to 17-27 N.m (13-20 ft.-lbs.) torque. Fill steer-
ing gear to level of plug (23) with approximately 200
mL (0.42 pint) of gear oil before installing steering
gear assembly.
Tighten adjusting screw (13) until the torque is
increased slightly. Bearings (5 and 8) were previously
adjusted to a slight preload, so the exact amount of
measured torque will be slightly higher than before.
When measured at steering shaft (1), preload should
be approximately 0.44-0.93 N.m (3.89-13.23 in.-lbs.)
and when measured by attaching spring scale to
steering wheel, pull should be approximately 0.2-0.5
kg. (0.44-1.10 lbs.). Steering should not bind. Tighten
locknut (22) after adjusting. Install steering arm (9)
with punch mark on shaft (11) and arm aligned.
Tighten steering arm retaining nut to 118-156 N.m
Fig. 28Exploded view of manual steering gear used on (87-115 fl.-lbs.) torque.
some Model 275 tractors.
1, Steering shaft 12. Steering gear housing 52. ADJUSTMENT. Steering shaft free play
2, Rivet 13. Sector adjusting
3, Roll pin screw & shim (backlash) can be adjusted by turning the steering
4, Spring 14. Gasket sector adjusting screw (13Fig. 28) without remov-
5, Upper bearing 15. Side cover ing the steering gear assembly. Ib adjust screw (13),
6, "O" rings 17. Bushing first loosen locknut (22), then tum screw in to de-
7, Ball nut & shafl assy, 19, Column & adjuster
8, Lower bearing 20, Locknut crease free play and out to increase. When correctly
9, Steering arm 21, "O" ring adjusted, torque required to tum steering shaft (1)
10. Oil seal 22, Locknut should be approximately 0.44-0.93 N.m (3.89-13.23
11, Sector shaft 23, Fill plug
in.-lbs.) and when measured by attaching spring
scale to steering wheel, pull should be approximately
and 7) into housing (12), then install and tighten 0.2-0.5 kg. (0.44-1.10 lbs.). Steering should not bind.
steering column (19) into housing. The torque neces- Excessive play which is not affected by the adjust-
sary to tum steering shaft (1) should be 0.2-0.5 Nm ment screw can be caused by wear or damage.
(1.8-4.4 in.-lbs.) and is adjusted by loosening or tight- Refer to paragraph 51 for checking ball nut end
ening column (19). Tighten locknut (20) to maintain play and adjusting end play of steering shaft bear-
adjustment position. The same (correct) amount of ings.

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

53. The power steering system used on some 245
and 255 models is serviced as described in the follow-
ing paragraphs 54,55 and 56. Refer to paragraphs 57,
58 and 59 for servicing the power steering system
available on some 265 models. Refer to paragraphs
60,61 and 62 for servicing the power steering system
used on some 275 models.
Power Steering 245 And 255 Models
54. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Ib remove the
power steering gear, first open hood, remove engine
side covers, disconnect headlight wires, remove grille
and headlight assembly and disconnect battery ca-

40
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 55

bles. Remove nut attaching steering wheel and use a
suitable puller to remove the steering wheel. Remove
hose between air cleaner and inlet manifold. Discon-
nect fuel gauge wire, then unbolt and remove covers
from around steering assembly. Disconnect tachome-
ter cable from side of engine. Remove screws attach-
ing bood to both sides of radiator and to steering
column, then remove the hood assembly. Close fuel
shut off valve at filter, disconnect the fuel supply line
at injection pump, disconnect speed control rod from
speed control ] ever and disconnect fuel return lines.
Unbolt and remove fuel tank and bracket. Disconnect
drag link from steering pitman arm and the hydraulic
lines from the ]3ower steering gear. Plug open hydrau-
lic lines and ports, then unbolt and remove the steer-
ing gear assembly.
Reverse removal procedure when installing.
55. OVERHAUL. Loosen locknut and unscrew
steering column (22Fig. 29) from top cover (23).
Remove rivet (19), drive out roll pin (20) and discon-
nect shaft (21) from worm shaft (49). Remove top
cover (23) and "O" ring (27). Fabricate a plate as
shown in Fig. 30 and install in place of top cover as
shown in Fig. 31. Straighten lock tab and remove nut
(36Fig. 29). Unbolt and remove fabricated plate
being careful not to lose pistons (28) or springs (29
and 29A). Remove washer (24), bearing (25) and
washer (26). Valve plate assembly (30A) can now be
lifted away from steering gear. Remove cover (11)
from steering gear housing. Note that sector adjust-
ing screw (7) will have to be turned clockwise while
cover is being lifted away from gear. Remove sector
shaft (12) from housing. Remove snap ring (1) and
lower cover assembly (2), then pull ball nut and worm
shaft assembly (49) out through bottom of housing.
Do not remove needle bearings from housing, sector
cover or lower cover unless new bearings are being
installed.
Renew ball nut and worm shaft assembly if shaft
does not rotate freely. Desired diameter of worm shaft
at seal surface is 24.996-25.009 mm (0.984-0.985 in.)
with wear limit of 24.9 mm (0.980 in.). End play of
worm shaft in ball nut should not exceed 0.1 mm

Fig. 29Exploded view of power steering

gear used on some 245 and 255 models.
1. Snap ring
2. Cover 27. "0" ring
3. "0" ring 28. Piston (4 used)
4. Iteflon seal 29. Piston spring
5. Bearing (2 used)
6. "0" ring 29A. Valve housing
7. Sector adjusting spring (2 used)
screw 30A. Valve body assy.
7A. Locknuts 30B. Valve spool
8. Adjust screw 31. Poppet valve
retainer 32. Spring
9. Bearing 33. Screw
10. "0" ring 34. "O" ring
11. Sector end cover 35. Nut
llA. Seals 36. Nut
12. Sector shaft 37. "0" ring
13. Bearing 38. Thrust washer
14. Packing 39. Bearing
15. Bearing 40. Thrust washer
16. Oil seal 41. "0" ring
17. Snap ring 42. "0" rings (2)
18. Spring 43. Seal
19. Rivet 44. Housing
20. Roll pin 45. Packing
21. Shaft 46. Seal
22. Column 47. "0" ring
22A. Bushing 48. "O" rings
23. Cover 49. Ball nut & worm
24. Washer shaft assy.
25. Bearing 50. Nut
26. Washer 51. Pitman arm

41
 Paragraph 56
Fig. 30Fabricate a speciai tooi from metai 8-10 mm
(0.315-0.394 in.) thici(. Dimension (A) is circie diameter for
ttie three equaiiy spaced 11 mm (0.433 in.) diameter hoies
(E). Distance (D) is approximate distance between iioie
centers.
A. 87 mm (3.425 in.) C. 54 mm (2.126 in.)
B. 107 mm (4.213 in.) D. 74.5-75 mm (2.933-2.953 in.)
Fig. 31Viewsiiowing the fabricated piate (T) instaiiedin
piace of top cover. Refer to text for assembiy procedure.
(0.004 in.). Desired clearance between ball nut and
housing cylinder is 0.030-0.079 mm (0.0012-0.0031
in.) and the wear limit is 0.15 mm (0.006 in.). Housing
cylinder should not be out-of-round more than 0.15
mm (0.006 in.). Inspect ball nut and housing cylinder
and renew if scored or worn excessively. Desired
outside diameter of sector shaft at bearing is 32 mm
(1.260 in.) and minimum allowable limit is 31.9 mm
(1.256 in.). Renew shaft if excessively worn or if
scored or cracked.
Specified clearance between spool valve (30B) and
valve body assembly (30A) is 0.008-0.015 mm
(0.0003-0.0006 in.). If spool or bore in valve body is
excessively worn or other damage is evident, renew
the assembly. Do not disassemble relief valve assem-
bly (31 through 34) if not required. If relief valve must
42
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
be disassembled, record the number of turns that the
adjusting screw (32) is turned into housing so that it
can be reassembled in the same position. Turning the
screw 90 degrees will change relief pressure approxi-
mately 882 kPa (123 psi). Specified relief valve set-
ting pressure is 10,294 kPa (1493 psi).
Assemble gear by reversing disassembly proce-
dure. Renew all seals and "O" rings when reassem-
bling. Use ring compressor to compress Teflon ring
when installing ball nut in housing, then install lower
end cover assembly (1 through 6). Place ball nut
assembly at center of travel and install sector shaft
(12). Sector adjusting screw (7) must be threaded into
cover (11) while cover is being installed. Tighten
sector cover screws to 35-55 N.m (26-40 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Turn sector adjusting screw (7) clockvdse
until sector shaft has very slight end play, tighten
locknut, then check the torque to begin turning steer-
ing wheel shaft. Steering shaft should begin to turn
when less than 1.2 N.m (10.4 in.-lbs.) torque is ap-
plied.
Install "O" ring (37) and thrust washer/bearing
assembly (38,39 and 40) over the shaft and two small
"O" rings (42) on housing. Assemble valve spool (30B)
and housing (30A) over the shaft. Install pistons (28)
and springs (29 and 29A) in appropriate holes of valve
body (30A). Install plate, fabricated as shown in Fig.
30, in place of top cover as shown in Fig. 31. Tighten
retaining screws to 37-57 N.m (27-42 ft.-lbs.) torque
making sure that "O" rings (42Fig. 29) remain in
correct position. Assembly plate will compress
springs (29). Install upper thrust washer/bearing as-
sembly (24, 25 and 26) and turn worm shaft counter-
clockwise with wrench on top flats until shaft stops
at end of travel. Install nut (36) as tight as possible
by hand (do not use a wrench) and stake top to
prevent loosening. To check after staking, turn worm
shaft counterclockwise fully (using a wrench), then
check nut for looseness. Remove plate and install
upper "O" ring (27) and cover (23). Tighten bolts to
37-57 N.m (27-42 ft.-lbs.) torque. Install "O" rings (48)
to flat sides of worm shaft and install spring (18) in
slot on top of worm shaft. Slide steering shaft (21) into
worm shaft and drive in roll pin (20). Install a new
rivet (19) and split the end so that it will remain in
shaft. Install column (22) and bushing (22A). Tighten
column locknut to 98-127 N.m (73-94 ft.-lbs.) torque.
56. ADJUSTMENTS. Refer to paragraph 55 for
internal adjustments normally accomplished during
overhaul. The sector adjusting screw (7Fig. 29)
should be set to limit end play of sector shaft (12).
Screw (7) can be adjusted while steering gear is
assembled and installed. To adjust screw (7), first
loosen locknuts (7A), then turn screw in to decrease
free play or out to increase. When correctly adjusted
and tested on a bench (drag link not attached and
v^thout hydraulic pressure), torque required to turn
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
steering shaft (21) v^ill be less than 1.2 N.m (10.4
in.-lbs.). When measured by attaching spring scale to
steering whee^l, pull should be approximately 0.12 kg.
(0.87 lbs.). Steering should not bind. Excessive play
which is not affected by the adjustment screw can be
caused by wear or damage. After adjustment is com-
plete, make sure that sealing washers are in good
condition and tighten nuts (7A) to 20-29 N.m (15-21
ft.-lbs.) torque.
Relief valve pressure can be checked by attaching
a suitable pressure gauge to pressure supply line
using appropriate "T" fitting. Pressure should be
10,294 kPa (1493 psi) and is adjusted by turning
screw (33). Be sure to tighten locknut after adjust-
ment is complete.
Power Steering 265 Model
57, REMOVE AND REINSTALL. The power
steering gear assembly (3Fig. 32) is attached to the
front frame SLS shown and can be removed after de-
taching hydraulic lines, steering rods and universal
joint (2).
Make sure that all retaining screws and nuts are
tightened securely when installing.
58. OVERiaAUL. Remove cover (23Fig. 33) and
**0" ring (27), Fabricate a plate as shown in Fig. 30
and install in place of cover as shown in Fig. 31.
Straighten lcck tab and remove nut (36Fig. 33).
Unbolt and remove fabricated plate being careful not
to lose pistons (28) or springs (29 and 29A). Remove
washer (24), bearing (25) and washer (26). Valve plate
assembly (30A) can now be lifted away from steering
gear. Remove cover (11) from steering gear housing.
Note that sector adjusting screw (7) vdll have to be
turned clockv^dse while cover is being lifted away from
gear. Remove sector shaft (12) from housing. Remove
snap ring (1) and lower cover assembly (2), then pull
ball nut and worm shaft assembly (49) out through
bottom of housing. Do not remove needle bearings
from housing, sector cover or lower cover unless new
bearings are being installed.
Renew ball nut and worm shaft assembly if shaft
does not rotate freely. End play of worm shaft in ball
nut should not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Housing
cylinder should not out-of-round more than 0.15 mm
(0.006 in.). Inspect ball nut and housing cylinder and
renew if scored or worn excessively. Renew shaft if
excessively worn or if scored or cracked.
If spool valve (30B) or bore in valve body (30A) is
excessively worn or other damage is evident, renew
the assembly. Do not disassemble relief valve assem-
bly (31 through 34) if not required. If relief valve must
be disassembled, record the number of turns that the
adjusting screw (32) is turned into housing so that it
can be reassembled in the same position. Turning the
screw 90 degrees will change relief pressure approxi-
Paragraphs 57-58
Fig, 32View of power steering gear assembly and re-
iated parts for 265 model. Refer to Fig. 33 for exploded
view of manual steering gear (3).
1. Steering shaft
2. Universal joint 18. Column
3. Steering gear 24. Upper column support
4. Dowel pin 25. Lower column support
9. Steering arm 26. Bearing
17. Column bushing 27. Snap ring
mately 882 kPa (123 psi). Specified relief valve set-
ting pressure is 10,294 kPa (1493 psi).
Assemble gear by reversing disassembly proce-
dure. Renew all seals and "O" rings when reassem-
bling. Use ring compressor to compress Tfefion ring
when installing ball nut in housing, then install lower
end cover assembly (1 through 6). Place ball nut
assembly at center of travel and install sector shaft
(12). Sector adjusting screw (7) must be threaded into
cover (11) while cover is being installed. Tighten
sector cover screws to 35-55 N.m (26-40 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Turn sector adjusting screw (7) clockwise
until sector shaft has very slight end play, tighten
locknut, then check the torque to begin turning steer-
ing wheel shaft. Steering shaft should begin to turn
when less than 1.2 N.m (10.4 in.-lbs.) torque is ap-
plied.
Install "O" ring (37) and thrust washer/bearing
assembly (38,39 and 40) over the shaft and two small
"O" rings (42) on housing. Assemble valve spool (30B)
and housing (30A) over the shaft. Install pistons (28)
and springs (29 and 29A) in appropriate holes of valve
body (30A). Install plate, fabricated as shown in Fig.
30, in place of top cover as shown in Fig. 31. Tighten
retaining screws to 37-57 N.m (27-42 ft.-lbs.) torque
43
Paragraphs 59-60 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 33Expioded view ofpower steer-

ing gear used on some 265 modeis.
1. Snap ring 29. Piston spring
2. Cover (2 used)
3. "0" ring 29A. Valve housing
4, Teflon seal spring (2 used)
5. Bearing 30A. Valve body assy.
6. "0" ring 30B. Valve spool
7. Sector adjusting 31. Poppet valve
screw 32. Spring
7A. Locknuts 33. Screw
8. Adjust screw 34. "0" ring
retainer 36. Nut
9. Bearing 37. "0" ring
10. "0" ring 38. Thrust washer
11. Sector end cover 39. Bearing
llA. Seals 40. Thrust washer
12. Sector shaft 41. "0" ring
13. Bearing 42. "0" rings (2)
14. Packing 43. Seal
15. Bearing 44. Housing
16. Oil seal 45. Packing
17. Snap ring 46. Seal
23. Cover 47. "0" ring
24. Washer 49. Ball nut &
25. Bearing worm shaft assy.
26. Washer 50. Nut
27. "0" ring 51. Pitman arm
28. Piston (4 used) 52. Dust seal

making sure that "O** rings (42Fig. 33) remain in
correct position. Assembly plate will compress
springs (29). Install upper thrust washer/bearing as-
sembly (24, 25 and 26) and turn worm shaft counter-
clockwise with wrench on top flats until shaft stops
at end of travel. Install nut as tight as possible by
hand (do not use a wrench) and stake top to prevent
loosening. To check after staking, turn worm shaft
counterclockwise fully (using a wrench), then check
nut for looseness. Remove plate and install upper "O"
ring (27) and cover (23). Tighten bolts to 37-57 N.m
(27-42 ft.-lbs.) torque.
is not affected by the adjustment screw can be caused
by wear or damage. After adjustment is complete,
make sure that sealing washers are in good condition
and tighten nuts (7A) to 20-29 N.m (15-21 ft.-lbs.)
torque.
Relief valve pressure can be checked by attaching
a suitable pressure gauge to pressure supply line
using appropriate "T" fitting. Pressure should be
10,294 kPa (1493 psi) and is adjusted by turning
screw (33). Be sure to tighten locknut after adjust-
ment is complete.

59. ADJUSTMENTS. Refer to paragraph 58 for Power Steering 275 Model

internal adjustments normally accomplished during
overhaul. The sector adjusting screw (7Fig. 33)
should be set to limit end play of sector shaft (12).
Screw (7) can be adjusted while steering gear is
assembled and installed. Tb adjust screw (7), first
loosen locknuts (7A), then turn screw in to decrease
free play or out to increase. When correctly adjusted
and tested on a bench (drag link not attached and
without hydraulic pressure), torque required to turn
steering shaft will be less than 1.2 N.m (10.4 in.-lbs.).
When measured by attaching spring scale to steering
wheel, pull should be approximately 0.12 kg. (0.87
lbs.). Steering should not bind. Excessive play which
60. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the
steering gear assembly, proceed as follows. Remove
steering wheel retaining nut, then use suitable puller
to remove steering wheel from shaft. Unbolt and
remove covers from around steering assembly, then
detach lower end of air inlet hose from engine. Dis-
connect tachometer cable, remove the throttle hand
control lever assembly, then unbolt and remove the
hood assembly. Unbolt and remove fuel tank and
bracket, then disconnect drag link from steering pit-
man arm. Detach hydraulic pressure lines, then un-
bolt and remove the steering gear assembly.

44
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
When installing, tighten screws to 30-39 N.m (22-
29 ft.-lbs.) torque. Tighten nut retaining pitman arm
to 118-156 N.m (87-115 ft.-lbs.) torque. Tighten the
12 screws attaching hood to 25-29 N.m (18-21 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Adjust tension of throttle lever so that 3-4 kg.
(6.6-8.8 lbs.) of force is necessary to move lever from
slow speed to high speed. Install steering wheel with
center spoke up, toward front. Nut attaching steering
wheel should be tightened to 49-78 N.m (36-57 ft.-
lbs.) torque.
ENGINE
63. Mitsubishi, three-cylinder, diesei engines are
used on all models.
MAINTENANCE
All Models
64. LUBRICATION. Recommended engine lubri-
cant is CASE ];H NO. 1 engine oil or a good quality API
service CD engine oil. Select oil viscosity depending
on the ambient temperature. Recommended oil vis-
cosity for ambient temperature ranges are as follows:
SAE 5W-20
or SAE 5W-30 Use only below -18^ C
(Below 0^ F)
SAE low -22 degrees to 0 C
(-8 degrees to +32 F)
SAE 30 -1 C and above
(H-30 F and above)
Drain engin e oil and refill with new oil after every
100 hours of normal operation. The manufacturer
recommends i^emoving oil filter and installing new
filter after evcsry 200 hours of operation.
Capacity of ongine crankcase, including filter, is 3.5
L (3.7 qt.) for 235 and 235H models, 4.5 L (4.8 qt.) for
245 and 255 models or 4.7 L (5.0 qt.) for 265 and 275
models. Oil should be maintained between full and
add marks on dipstick of all models.
65. AIR FILTER. The air filter should be cleaned
at least every 200 hours of operation or more fre-
quently if operating in extremely dusty conditions.
Remove dust from filter element by tapping lightly
with your hand. Low pressure air (less that 687 kPa
or 100 psi) can be directed through filter from the
inside, toward outside, to blow dust from filter. Be
careful not to damage filter element while cleaning.
A new element should be installed if condition of old
element is questionable, after three cleanings or once
each year. If special air cleaner solution and water are
Paragraphs 61-68
61. OVERHAUL. Refer to paragraph 55 and Fig.
29 for service to the power steering gear used on 275
models with power steering.
62. ADJUSTMENTS. Refer to paragraph 56 for
adjustments to the power steering gear and pressure.
Relief valve setting pressure should be 10,270 kPa
(1490 psi) with engine running at 2130 Rpm.
used to wash air cleaner, make sure element is dry
before installing.
NOTE: Do not wash filter with any petroieum
solvent.
66. WATER PUMP/EAN/ALTERNATOR BELT.
Fan belt tension should be maintained so belt will
deflect approximately 13 mm (V2 in.) when moderate
thumb pressure (about 10 kg./22 lbs.) is applied to
belt midway between crankshaft and alternator pul-
leys. Reposition alternator to adjust belt tension.
67. FUEL FILTER. A renewable paper filter ele-
ment type fuel filter is located between fuel tank and
fuel injection pump. Check the clear filter sediment
bowl daily for evidence of water or sediment. Bowl
should be drained and new filter installed if filter
appears dirty, if engine is misfiring or if engine has
lost power. Air must be bled from filter and fuel
system as outlined in paragraph 90 each time filter
is removed.
R&R ENGINE ASSEMBLY
All Models
68. Ib remove the engine from tractor, first drain
coolant and the engine oil pan if engine is to be
disassembled. Remove hood, engine side panels,
grille, battery and radiator. Remove the air cleaner
assembly and muffler. Detach fuel lines, throttle con-
trol rod and tachometer cable. Remove the steering
wheel and panels around steering gear of 245, 255
and 275 models, then remove the fuel tank and brack-
ets. Disconnect wires to fuel shut-off solenoid, glow
plug, thermo switch, alternator, oil pressure sending
unit, temperature sender, and starter motor at elec-
trical connectors or terminals from all models. Detach
clamps holding wiring harness, then move wiring and
cables out of the way. On all models except 265,
45
 Paragraph 69
Fig. 34^-The front axle and frame can be separated from
engine as shown on 235 models. On some tractors^ re-
moval may be easier If engine Is separated with the front
axle and frame, then engine is lifted from frame.
detach drag link from steering gear. On 265 model,
detach steering shaft at universal joint. Disconnect
hydraulic lines from power steering of 265 models so
equipped. Remove the front axle drive shaft from
four-wheel-drive models. On all models, disconnect
(or remove) hydraulic lines from pump. Position a
jack under the clutch housing, unbolt frame, then
carefully roll the frame and front axle forward away
from engine as shown in Fig. 34. Support engine, then
unbolt engine from clutch housing and separate.
On some models, it may be easier to unbolt and
separate the engine from the clutch housing and roll
the front axle, frame and engine forward as a unit,
then unbolt and lift the engine from the frame.
Reassemble by reversing removal procedure.
Tighten the 8M screws attaching engine to clutch
housing to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque and 12M
screws to 83-93 N.m (61-69 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to
paragraph 90 for bleeding the fuel system.
CYLINDER HEAD
All Models
69. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Ib remove cyl-
inder head, drain coolant, engine oil and disconnect
battery ground. Remove upper radiator hose, air
cleaner, muffler and exhaust manifold. Disconnect
wires to glow plug, thermo switch, alternator and
temperature sender at electrical connectors or termi-
nals. Unbolt alternator brace from cylinder head.
Remove fuel injection lines, fuel return lines, rocker
arm cover, rocker arm assembly and push rods. Cover
all fuel line openings to prevent tbe entrance of dirt.
The inlet manifold, glow plugs and injection nozzles
do not need to be removed to remove cylinder head,
but if required for other service, these parts should
be removed before removing bead. To reduce chance
for distortion, loosen the cylinder head retaining
46
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
FRONT
o O O o
9 7 5 11
10 4 6 8
\ o o o o
L "V,
O 2 01 O3
Fig. 35~-Screws retaining cylinder head should be tight-
ened In sequence shown. Reverse sequence when loos-
ening to reduce distortion.
screws in three stages in reverse of the tightening
sequence shown in Fig. 35. Remove retaining screws,
then lift cylinder head from engine.
Refer to appropriate paragraphs for servicing
valves, guides and springs. Clean cylinder block and
cylinder bead gasket surfaces and inspect cylinder
bead for cracks, distortion or other defects. Check
head gasket surface with a straightedge and feeler
gauge. Recondition or renew cylinder head if distor-
tion exceeds 0.1 mm (0.004 in.).
Make sure that surfaces of cylinder block and bead
are clean and dry, tben position cylinder head gasket
on cylinder block and carefully install cylinder head.
Do not use any sealer or lubricant on cylinder head
gasket. Lubricate cylinder head retaining screws
lightly with engine oil and install, tightening in three
steps in the sequence shown in Fig. 35.
On 235, 235H, 245 and 255 models, lOM screws at
locations (1, 2 and 3) should be tightened to the final
torque of 69-78 N.m (51-58 ft.-lbs.) and the remaining
12M screws should be tightened to final torque of
108-117 N.m (80-87 ft.-lbs.).
On 265 model, 12M screws at locations (1, 2 and 3)
should be tightened to the final torque of 98-108 N.m
(73-79 ft.-lbs.) and the remaining 14M screws should
be tightened to final torque of 147-167 N.m (109-123
ft.-lbs.).
On 275 model, screws at locations (1, 2 and 3)
should be tightened to the final torque of 98-108 N.m
(72-80 ft.-lbs.) and the remaining screws should be
tightened to final torque of 146-157 N.m (108-116
ft.-lbs.).
On all models, it is important to tighten cylinder
head retaining screws in the proper sequence, gradu-
ally (three steps) and evenly for proper sealing. If
glow plug was removed, tighten to 15-20 N.m (11-14
ft.-lbs.) torque.
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 70-72

Fig. 36When the singie marii is aiigned with stationary

marie as shown at (T), the front cyiinder is at top dead
center of either the exhaust stroiie or compression stroiie. Fig. 37View of rocicer arms and associated parts. Marie
Mariis (i) are for injection timing. (M) shouid be assembied toward front of engine.
1. Cam follower 8. Spring retainer
2. Push rod 9. Spring
VALVE CLEARANCE 3. Adjusting screw 10. Stem seal
4. Locknut 11. Valve
5. Rocker arm 12. Shaft support
All Models 6. Snap ring 13. Seat (2 used)
7. Keepers 14. Separator spring
70. Valve ckiarance should be adjusted with engine
cold. Specified clearance is 0.25 mm (0.010 in.) for 235, 235H, 245 and 255 Models
both the inlet and exhaust valves. Inlet and exhaust valve stem OD 6.6 mm (0.260 in.)
Stem to guide clearance, maximum
Inlet 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Tb adjust vailve clearance, turn crankshaft in nor- Exhaust 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
mal direction of rotation so that front (number 1)
piston is at top dead center of compression stroke.
TDC mark on crankshaft pulley is single mark (T 265 Model
Fig. 36). Adjustment is made by loosening locknut Inlet and exhaust valve stem OD 8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
and turning adjusting screw (3Fig. 37) at push rod Stem to guide clearance, maximum
end of rocker arm. Adjust clearance of inlet and ex- Inlet 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
haust valves for front cylinder. Turn crankshaft 240 Exhaust 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(Vi turn) until next piston in firing order (rear) is at Valve guide height. . 14.5-15.5 mm (0.570-0.610 in.)
top dead centesr and adjust clearance for both valves
of that cylindejr. Turn crankshaft another 240 until 275 Models
last piston in firing order (center) is at top dead Inlet and exhaust valve stem OD 8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
center, then adjust valve clearance for both valves of Stem to guide clearance, maximum
the last cylinder. Inlet 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Exhaust 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Valve guide height. . 11.5-12.5 mm (0.453-0.492 in.)
Valve seat width can be narrowed using 60 and 30
VALVES, GUIDES AND SEATS stones. Valve heads should not be recessed more than
2.42 mm (0.095 in.) below the gasket surface of cylin-
All Models der head. Valve guides are available for service.

71. Inlet and exhaust valves seat directly in cylin-

der head. Valve face and seat angle is 45 for both
inlet and exhaust. Seat width for all valves should be
1.3-1.8 mm (0.051-0.071 in.) and should be narrowed
if width exceeds 2.5 mm (0.098 in.). Refer to the
following recommended valve, guide and seat speci-
fications.
VALVE SPRINGS
All Models
72. Valve springs are identical for inlet and exhaust
valves. Renew springs which are distorted, discolored

47
 Paragraphs 73-75 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
by heat or fail to meet the following test specifica-
tions. CAM FOLLOWERS

235 and 235H Models All Models

Valve spring free length
New 43 mm (1.693 in.)
Minimum 41.7 mm (1.642 in.) 74. Cam followers (1Fig. 37) can be removed after
Pressure at installed height 130.8-144.1 N removing cylinder head as outlined in paragraph 69.
@ 36 mm (29.4-32.4 lbs. @ 1.417 in.) Cam followers must be identified as they are removed
so that they can be reinstalled in same bores. Outside
diameter of cam follower should be 23 mm (0.9055 in.)
245 and 255 Models and cam follower to bore clearance should not exceed
Valve spring free length 0.15 mm (0.006 in.).
New 43 mm (1.693 in.)
Minimum 41.7 mm (1.642 in.)
Pressure at installed height 109.9-121.4 N TIMING GEARS
@ 37.1 mm (24.7-27.3 lbs. @ 1.461 in.)
All Models
265 Model
Valve spring free length
75. The timing gear train consists of crankshaft
New 45.9 mm (1.807 in.)
gear, idler gear, camshaft gear and fuel injection
Minimum 44.5 mm (1.752 in.)
pump drive gear. Timing gear marks are visible after
Pressure at installed height 115.2-142.8 N
removing timing gear cover as outlined in paragraph
@ 36 mm (25.9-32.1 lbs. @ 1.417 in.)
77. Valves and injection pump are properly timed to
crankshaft when marks on gears are aligned as
275 Models shown in Fig. 38. Because of the number of teeth on
Valve spring free length idler gear, timing marks will not align every other
New 45.85 mm (1.805 in.) revolution of the crankshaft. Alignment can be
Minimum 44.5 mm (1.752 in.) checked by turning crankshaft until mark on crank-
Pressure at installed height 122.8-136.1 N shaft gear is positioned as shown at (1Fig. 38), then
@ 41.8 mm (27.6-30.6 lbs. @ 1.65 in.) checking location of marks (2 and 3) on camshaft
gears. If marks on camshaft gears (3 and 4Fig. 39)
are away from idler gear (2), turn crankshaft (7) one
ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS complete turn until ke5rway (K) is again vertical.
Remove idler gear, then reinstall idler gear with
All Models marks on all gears aligned as shown in Fig. 38.

73. The rocker arms assembly (Fig. 37) can be NOTE: Before removing any gears, first refer to
unbolted and removed after removing rocker arm paragraph 69 and remove rocker arm assembiy to
cover. Push rods (2) can be withdrawn after removing avoid possible damage to piston or vaive train.
the rocker arms (5). Rocker arms are not interchange- Damage could resuit if eitiier camshaft or crank-
able and must be assembled to position ends correctly shaft is turned independentiy from the other uniess
rocker arms are removed.
over valve and push rod. All valve train components
should be identified as removed so they can be rein-
stalled in original locations if reused. Inside diameter
of new rocker arm is 18.9 mm (0.744 in.). Install new
components if clearance between rocker arm and
shaft exceeds 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) or is scored. Install
new push rod if bent more than 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
within its length.
Mark (MFig. 37) on rocker shaft should be to-
ward front and on the valve (right) side of engine.
Assemble rocker arms (5), springs (14) and remaining
supports (12), then install snap rings (6) at ends of
shaft. Tighten studs and screw retaining rocker arm
assembly to cylinder head and adjust valve clearance 1
as outlined in paragraph 70. Fig. 38View of engine timing gears with cover removed.

48
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 76-77

Check hydraulic pump gear bearings (8Fig. 39)

for smoothness and slot coupling at rear of shaft for
damage. Renew parts as necessary.
Gears for injection pump camshaft (11) and valve
camshaft (9) are shrink fitted to their respective
shafts. Tb remove these gears, it is first necessary to
remove the camshafts as outlined in paragraph 78 or
paragraph 94. Gears may be pressed on or off shafts
after heating gear to 140-150 C (284-302*= F). To
reassemble, refer to Fig. 38 and align timing marks
as shown.

TIMING GEAR COVER

All Models
77. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the
timing gear cover, drain engine coolant and oil. Re-
move hood, engine side panels, grille, battery and
radiator. Remove the air cleaner assembly and muf-
Fig, 39Expioded view of timing gears, craniishaft and fler. On all models except 265, detach drag link from
camshafts. steering gear. On 265 model, detach steering shaft at
1. Crankshaft geiar 7. Crankshaft universal joint. Disconnect hydraulic lines from
2. Idler gear 8. Bearings power steering of 265 models so equipped. Remove
3. Valve camshaEl gear 9. Valve camshaft
4. Injection pump camshaft gear 10, Bearing the front axle drive shaft from four-wheel-drive mod-
5. Hydraulic pump drive gear 11. Injection pump els. On all models, disconnect (or remove) hydraulic
6. Crankshaft pulley camshaft lines from pump. Position a jack under the clutch
housing, unbolt frame, then carefully roll the frame
76, With timing gear cover removed as outlined in and front axle forward away from engine as shown in
paragraph 77, refer to Fig. 38 and Fig. 39 for gear Fig. 34. Remove the hydraulic pump, mounting
placement. Check all gears for wear or chipped teeth flange, pump drive gear and bearing assembly. Re-
and renew as needed. If backlash is excessive, check move fan, fan belt, alternator and crankshaft pulley.
to be sure th at bushings and shafts are not worn, Remove governor control rod from governor external
causing the excessive backlash. control lever (3Fig. 40). Remove injection pump

Fig. 40View of governor iinicage

at injection pump.
1. Tie rod
2. Tie rod retainer spring
3. Governor external control lever
14. Bleeder screw

49
Paragraphs 78-79
side cover, then disconnect tie rod retainer spring (2)
and governor tie rod (1). Remove timing gear case
mounting bolts, then remove case using care not to
damage governor tie rod and tie rod spring.
Clean and inspect case for damage or cracks, which
would require renewal. Inspect camshaft thrust plug
in timing gear cover for excessive wear and inspect
governor linkage for wear, binding or other damage.
Install new crankshaft front oil seal and reassemble
using new gasket by reversing disassembly proce-
dure. Coat lip of front seal with grease and lubricate
governor linkage with oil before assembling. Do not
damage the injection pump control tie rod and spring
as timing gear cover is moved rearward toward en-
gine block. Tighten the crankshaft pulley retaining
nut to 196-245 N.m (145-180 ft.-lbs.) torque.
CAMSHAFT
All Models
78* The camshaft is supported in three bearing
bores in cylinder block. The front bore is equipped
with a renewable bushing and the two rear journals
operate directly in the unbushed bores.
Ib remove the valve camshaft, remove the cylinder
head as outlined in paragraph 69 and pull the cam
followers up out of the cylinder block bores. Refer to
paragraph 77 and remove the timing gear cover.
Remove the tachometer drive gear assembly from left
side of cylinder block, then withdraw camshaft and
timing gear from cylinder block bores.
Clearance between any of the camshaft journals
and bushing bore should not exceed 0.15 mm (0.006
in,). Cam lobe height should be 35.76 mm (1.408 in.).
Install new camshaft if cam lobe height is less than
34.76 mm (1.3685 in.) or if lobes are not smooth. It is
suggested that new cam followers be installed when
cam is renewed. Be sure that oil hole in bushing is
aligned with passage in block when installing front
bushing. Front edge of bushing should be just below
flush with cylinder block. Heat gear to approximately
140-150 C (284-302'^ F) before pressing from or onto
camshaft.
ROD AND PISTON UNITS
All Models
79. Ib remove the rod and piston units, remove the
cylinder head as outlined in paragraph 69 and the
engine oil pan. Remove the ridge at top of cylinder
using a ridge reamer and make sure that each piston
and each connecting rod and cap are marked with the
cylinder number before removing. Cylinder number
marks on connecting rod and cap should be on right
side of engine and number "1" cylinder is at front.
Remove nuts retaining connecting rod cap, remove
cap, then carefully push connecting rod and piston up
out of cylinder block bore.
50
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Four-Ring Three-Ring
Piston Piston
Comprtftion Comprntion
ring ring
I |NO.2
ComprMSion No. 2
ring
Comprettion
ring
Comprettion
ring
Fig. 41Shapes of piston rings. No. 1 (top) compression
ring for 235 and 235H models Is rectangular instead of
semi-keystone design shown in above drawing.
On 235, 235H and 245 models, the piston pin is a
press fit in connecting rod. Note that a suitable piston
support tool, such as Case tool number ST332301,
must be used when removing and installing piston
pin to prevent damage to piston. When attaching
piston to connecting rod, make sure that arrow on top
of piston and mark on beam of connecting rod are both
toward front. Notches for rod bearing inserts should
both be toward right side of engine. Piston pin should
require at least 500 kg (1103 lbs.) but less than 1500
kg (3308 lbs.) force to press into connecting rod bore.
Pin should be centered in piston and should not bind.
Install the three compression rings and one oil control
ring with mark on side toward top of piston. See Fig.
41 for shape of piston rings and correct installation
position of rings for four-ring piston. Space the piston
ring end gaps around cylinder before inserting piston
assembly into cylinder. The arrow mark on top of the
piston must be pointing toward front of engine.
Tighten connecting rod retaining nuts to 32-34 N.m
(23-25 ft.-lbs.) torque.
On 255, 265 and 275 models, the piston pin is full
floating and retained in piston by wire retaining
rings. The piston and pin are matched parts and pin
should not be interchanged with similar parts from
other pistons. When attaching connecting rod to pis-
ton, make sure that arrow on top of piston and mark
on beam of connecting rod are both toward front.
Notches for rod bearing inserts should both be toward
right side of engine. Heat piston and connecting rod
in hot oil to approximately 80 C (176 F) before
inserting the piston pin. Install retaining ring on each
side of piston and make sure that pin is centered in
connecting rod. Make sure that semi-keystone ring is
installed in top groove and inside groove of second
ring is toward top of piston. Marks on the two com-
pression rings and one oil control ring should be on
side toward top of piston. See Fig. 41 for shape of
piston rings and correct installation position for
three-ring piston. Space the piston ring end gaps
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 80

around cylinder before inserting piston assembly into 265 Model

cylinder. Thi arrow mark on top of the piston must Piston diameter
be pointing toward front of engine. Tighten connect- Standard 78 mm (3.071 in.)
ing rod retaining nuts of 255 models to 32-34 N.m Piston to cylinder clearance
(23-25 ft.-lbs.) torque. Tighten connecting rod retain- Maximum 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
ing nuts for 265 and 275 models to 54-58 N.m (40-43 Cylinder bore diameter
fb.-lbs.) torque. Tighten screws retaining oil pan to Standard 78.00-78.2 mm (3.0709-3.0787 in.)
27-31 N.m (20-23 ft.-lbs.) torque. Ring side clearance in groove
Top ring 0.06-0.12 mm (0.0024-0.0047 in.)
PISTONS, CYLINDER BLOCK AND RINGS Second ring.... 0.05-0.09 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.)
Bottom (oil) ring 0.03-0.07 mm (0.0012-0.0028 in.)
All Models
275 Model
Piston diameter
80, Inspect pistons for scoring, scuffing, cracks,
Standard 84 mm (3.307 in.)
breakage or other damage and renew if necessary.
Piston to cylinder clearance
New pistons are available in sets of three and include
Maximum 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
the piston pins. Pistons and rings are available in
Cylinder bore diameter
standard size and oversizes of 0.25,0.50 and 0.75 mm.
Standard 84.00-84.2 mm (3.3071-3.3150 in.)
Measure piston diameter at bottom of skirt and at
Ring side clearance in groove
right angles to pin.
Top ring 0.06-0.12 mm (0.0024-0.0047 in.)
Second ring 0.05-0.09 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.)
235 and 235 H Models Bottom (oil) ring 0.03-0.07 mm (0.0012-0.0028 in.)
Piston diameiter
Standard 68 mm (2.677 in.)
Piston to cylinder clearance Cylinder bores are unsleeved and are serviced us-
Maximum 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) ing standard machine shop procedures. Maximum
Cylinder bore diameter allowable cylinder bore taper or out-of-round (at any
Standard 68.00-68.2 mm (2.6772-2.6850 in.) location in bore) is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). The top surface
Ring side clearance in groove of block should be fiat witbin 0.05 mm (0.002 in.). The
Top ring 0.06-0.12 mm (0.0024-0.0047 in.) piston and pin are matched and pin should not be
Second ring 0.05-0.09 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) interchanged with similar parts from other pistons.
Third ring 0.04-0.08 mm (0.0016-0.0031 in.) When attaching piston to connecting rod, make sure
Bottom (oil) ring 0.03-0.07 mm (0.0012-0.0028 in.) that arrow on top of piston and mark on beam of
connecting rod are both toward front. Notches for rod
245 Model bearing inserts should both be toward right side of
Piston diameter engine.
Standard 73 mm (2.874 in.) On 235, 235H and 245 models, the piston pin is a
Piston to cylinder clearance press fit in connecting rod and should require at least
Maximum 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) 500 kg (1103 lbs.) but less than 1500 kg (3308 lbs.)
Cylinder bore diameter force to press into connecting rod bore. Center the
Standard 73.00-73.2 mm (2.8740-2.8819 in.) piston pin in piston and connecting rod.
Ring side clearance in groove On 255, 265 and 275 models, the piston pin is full
Top ring 0.06-0.12 mm (0.0024-0.0047 in.) floating and retained in piston by wire retaining
Second ring 0.05-0.09 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) rings. Heat piston and connecting rod in hot oil to
Third ring 0.04-0.08 mm (0.0016-0.0031 in.) approximately 80 C (176 F) before inserting the
Bottom (oil) ring 0.03-0.07 mm (0.0012-0.0028 in.) piston pin. Install retaining ring on each side of piston
and make sure that pin is centered in connecting rod.
255 Model Make sure that semi-keystone ring is installed in top
Piston diamcjter groove and inside groove of second ring is toward top
Standard 76 mm (2.992 in.) ofpiston(Fig. 41).
Piston to cyl] nder clearance For all models and all rings, end gap should be
Maximum 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) 0.15-0.40 mm (0.006-0.016 in.), but should never ex-
Cylinder bore diameter ceed 1.5 mm (0.059 in.). Install all piston rings with
Standard 76.00-76.2 mm (2.9921-3.0000 in.) marks on sides toward top of piston. See Fig. 41 for
Ring side clearance in groove shape of piston rings and correct installation position.
Top ring 0.06-0.12 mm (0.0024-0.0047 in.) Space the piston ring end gaps around cylinder before
Second ring 0.05-0.09 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) inserting piston assembly into cylinder. Make sure
Bottom (oil) ring 0.03-0.07 mm (0.0012-0.0028 in.) that arrow on top of piston and identification mark

51
Paragraphs 81-83
on connecting rod are both toward front of engine.
Tighten connecting rod retaining nuts to 32-34 Nm
(23-25 ft.-lbs.) torque on 235, 235H, 245 and 255
models. Tighten connecting rod retaining nuts for 265
and 275 models to 54-58 N.m (40-43 ft.-lbs.) torque.
CONNECTING RODS AND BEARINGS
All Models
81. Connecting rod bearings are insert type and are
renewable from below. Mark connecting rod and cap
with corresponding cylinder number on right side
before removing rod caps. Number "1" is front cylin-
der. Connecting rods and caps should not be inter-
mixed and notches in connecting rod and cap for
bearing insert tang should both be on right side.
Inspect crankshaft crankpins for out-of-round,
wear or scoring. Standard diameter of crankpin is 42
mm (1.6535 in.) for 235, 235H, 245 and 255 models.
Standard crankpin diameter is 48 mm (1.8898 in.) for
265 and 275 models. On all models, connecting rod
bend or distortion should not exceed 0.05 mm (0.002
in.). Crankpin to bearing insert clearance should not
exceed 0.15 mm (0.006 in.). Connecting rod bearing
inserts are available in standard size and 0.25, 0.50
and 0.75 mm undersizes. If necessary to machine
crankpin to undersize, crankshaft should be ma-
chined following standard machine shop procedures.
Connecting rod bearing side (thrust) clearance on
crankpin should be 0.1-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.), but
should not exceed 0.5 mm (0.020 in.).
Refer to paragraph 79 and paragraph 80 for piston
ring and cylinder bore specifications and for assembly
of piston to connecting rod. Tighten connecting rod
retaining nuts of 235, 235H, 245 and 255 models to
32-34 N.m (23-25 ft.-lbs.) torque. Tighten connecting
rod retaining nuts for 265 and 275 models to 54-58
N.m (40-43 ft.-lbs.) torque.
CRANKSHAFT AND MAIN BEARINGS
All Models
82. To remove the crankshaft, first remove the
engine, flywheel, rear engine plate, timing gear cover,
timing idler gear, valve camshaft, injection pump
camshaft and engine front plate. Invert engine, re-
move connecting rod caps of rod and piston units,
then remove main bearing caps and lift crankshaft
from cylinder block.
The crankshaft is supported in four insert t3q)e
main bearings and end thrust is taken by the number
three bearing. Crankshaft end play should not exceed
0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Inspect crankshaft crankpins and
main journals for out-of-round, wear or scoring. Rod
bearing clearance should not exceed 0.15 mm (0.006
52
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
in.) and main bearing clearance should not exceed 0.1
mm (0.004 in.). Main and connecting rod bearing
inserts are available in standard size and 0.25, 0.50
and 0.75 mm undersizes. If necessary to machine
main journals or connecting rod crankpins to under-
size, crankshaft should be machined following stand-
ard machine shop procedures.
235, 235H, 245 and 255 Models
Connecting rod crankpin
Standard diameter 42 mm (1.6535 in.)
Main journal
Standard diameter 52 mm (2.0472 in.)
265 and 275 Models
Connecting rod crankpin
Standard diameter 48 mm (1.8898 in.)
Main journal
Standard diameter 57 mm (2.2441 in.)
When assembling, reverse removal procedure.
Main bearing caps are marked for correct installa-
tion. Front cap is marked "F," rear cap is marked "R,"
the second cap is marked "2" with an arrow indicating
front of engine and the third cap is marked "3" with
an arrow. Apply a thin, but even coating of "Loctite
515" or equivalent sealer to cap mating surface of
cylinder block when installing the front and rear
main bearing caps. Install second and third caps with
arrows toward front. Tighten main bearing cap re-
taining screws to 49-54 N.m (36-40 ft.-lbs.) torque for
235, 235H, 245 and 255 models or 54-58 N.m (40-43
ft.-lbs.) torque for 265 and 275 models. Apply sealer
to outer surface of side seals and press seals along
sides of front and rear main bearing caps. Rounded
ends (RFig. 42) of side seals should be inserted into
groove between main bearing caps and cylinder block.
Refer to paragraph 80 for assembly of piston rings,
then to paragraph 79 and paragraph 81 for installa-
tion of connecting rods and pistons.
CRANKSHAFT SEALS
All Models
83. FRONT. To remove the timing gear front oil
seal, first drain engine coolant. Remove hood, engine
side panels, grille, battery and radiator. Remove the
air cleaner assembly and muffler. On all models ex-
cept 265, detach drag link from steering gear. On 265
model, detach steering shaft at universal joint. Dis-
connect hydraulic lines from power steering of 265
models so equipped. Remove the front axle drive shaft
from four-wheel-drive models. On all models, position
a jack under the clutch housing, unbolt frame, then
carefully roll the frame and front axle forward away
from engine as shown in Fig. 34. Loosen alternator
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 84-86

Fig. 42Rounded ends of rear main

bearing cap side seals should be
inserted first into grooves. Maite
sure that side seals are coated with
sealer and that seals are instaiied
completely to end of grooves to pre-
vent leakage.

and remove drive belt, then remove retaining nut and injection pump camshaft and pump is attached be-
pull crankshaft pulley from crankshaft. hind fuel injection pump on right side of engine. The
Pry the ci'ankshaft front seal from timing gear oil filter is attached to rear of oil pump. The oil
cover, being <:areful not to damage cover bore. Lubri- pressure relief valve (1Fig. 44) should limit oil
cate lip of n(iw seal with engine oil, then press seal pressure to 392 kPa (57 psi). The low oil pressure
squarely into bore of timing gear cover using a suit- switch (9) should make contact and lamp on dash
able size driver. Tighten crankshaft pulley retaining should light when pressure falls below 14.7-29.4 kPa
nut to 196-245 N.m (145-180 ft.-lbs.) torque. (2.13-4.27 psi).
84. REAE:. Ib install new rear oil seal, refer to
paragraph 115, paragraph 116 or paragraph 117 to To remove engine oil pump, first clean area around
split tractor and remove clutch, then unbolt and pump and filter, then remove filter. Remove the four
remove the engine fiywheel. Oil leakage may be from screws attaching oil pump to engine block and remove
seals (Fig. 42) between sides of rear main bearing and pump. Clean and inspect all parts for wear or dam-
cylinder block. Check and identify location of leak
before proceeding. Unbolt rear seal housing from rear
of cylinder block, remove old seal and clean rear face
of block and seal housing. Carefully press new seal
into housing. Coat lip of seal with grease, install new
gasket, then install seal and housing assembly. On
235, 235H, 245 and 255 models, arrow on seal hous-
ing should b! toward top of engine. Tighten fiywheel
retaining screws to 112.5-122.0 N.m (83-90 ft.-lbs.)
torque.
FLYWHEEL
All Modeis
85. TD remove the flywheel, first split tractor and
remove the clutch assembly as outlined in paragraph
115, paragraph 116 or paragraph 117, then unbolt
and remove fi5nvheel. Inspect ring gear teeth for
damage and jDilot bearing for smooth operation.
Tighten fiywheel retaining screws to 113-122 N.m
(83-90 ft.-lbs.) torque and refer to paragraph 118 for
installing clutch.
OIL PUMP
All Models Fig. 43Drawing of engine lubrication system showing
direction of oil flow and relative location of components.
86. The engine lubrication system (Fig. 43) is 1. Oil pressure switch
2. Valve camshaft 5. Pressure relief valve
equipped witli a gerotor t5^e oil pump and full fiow 3. Crankshaft 6. Filter bypass valve
filter. Oil purip is driven by coupling at rear of fuel 4. Oil pump 7. Oil filter

53
Paragraphs 87-89 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

age. Check pump clearances with feeler gauge

against the values which follow.

Inner rotor to outer rotor

Standard 0.05-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.)
Wear limit 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

Outer rotor to body

Standard 0.15-0.2 mm (0.006-0.008 in.)
Wear limit 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

Rotor to cover
Standard . 0.03-0.07 mm (0.001-0.003 in.)
Wear limit 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)

Renew parts as necessary. Relief valve poppet

should move freely in bore of body and should not
stick. Install new "O" ring (5) and gasket (7), then coat
all parts with clean oil when assembling. Oil filter
by-pass is located in filter canister (2). Lubricate seal
on new oil filter with clean oil and tighten to 11-13
N.m (96-113 in.-lbs.) torque. Start engine and check
filter for leaks after assembling.

F/g. 44Expioded view of engine oii pump, fiiter and oii

picii-up tube typicai of aii modeis. OH pump body and rear OIL PAN
cover are avaiiabie oniy as a compiete pump assembiy.
Tachometer drive parts are shown at (10-14).
All Models
1. Pressure relief valve
2. Oil filter 9, Pressure switch
3. Pump cover 10. Retainer & screw 87. Removal of oil pan is conventional. Make sure
4. Pump rotors assy. 11. "O" ring to clean all parts and prevent dirt from entering
5. "O" ring 12, Drive housing engine when pan is removed. Install new gasket and
6. Pump body 13. Washer
7. Gasket 14. Driven gear tighten retaining screws to 27-31 N.m (20-23 ft.-lbs.)
8. Oil pick-up tube & screen 15. Pin torque.

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM

88. All models are equipped with a three piston diesei
injection pump which is driven by a separate fuel
injection camshaft located in the timing gear housing.
The pump is controlled by the governor attached to
timing gear housing in front of injection pump drive
gear. Delivery nozzles direct the high pressure diesei
fuel into the precombustion chambers.
FUEL FILTER AND LINES
All Models
89. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. The
use of good quality, approved fuel, the careful storage
and proper handling of fuel for the diesei engine can
not be over emphasized.
Because of extremely close tolerances and precise
requirements of all diesei components, it is of utmost
importance that clean fuel and careful maintenance
be practiced at all times. Unless service personnel
have been trained to adjust, disassemble and repair
the specific injection system and necessary special
tools are available, limit service to pump and nozzles
to removal, installation and exchange of complete
assemblies. It is impossible to recalibrate an injection
pump or reset an injector without proper specifica-
tions, equipment and training.
A renewable paper filter element type fuel filter
(Fig. 45) is located in fuel line between fuel tank and

54
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 90-92

Fig. 45Expioded view of fuei fiiter and shut off valve.

1. Retaining ring 7. Bleed screws
2, Bowl 8. Valve retaining screw
3, "0" ring 9. Shut-off valve
4, Filter element 10. Spring
5, "O** ring 11. "O" ring
6, Housing 12. Shut-off handle
Fig. 46Exploded view of typical fuel injection pump.
1. Delivery valve holder 10. Spring
injection pump. The fuel filter housing incorporates 2. "O" ring 11. Lower spring seat
a fuel shut-off valve. Check the clear filter sediment 3. Delivery valve spring 12. Shim
bowl (2) every 10 hours of operation or daily for 4. Gasket 13. Cam follower
evidence of water or sediment. Bowl should be 5. Delivery valve 14. Bleeder screw
6. Pump element 15. Control rack
drained and new filter element (4) installed at least 7. Pump body 16. Adjusting plate & screw
once each year or whenever filter appears dirty. Air 8. Plunger control sleeve 17. Smoke set plate & spring
must be bleci from filter and fuel system as outlined 9. Upper spring seat 18. "Ungleich" set plate & spring
in paragraph 90 each time fllter is removed.
The fuel s^^stem should also be bled if the fuel tank crank engine with the starter to remove air from high
has been allowed to run dry or if components within pressure lines and nozzles. Tighten compression fit-
the system have been disconnected or removed. If the ting when fuel without air begins to flow from loos-
engine starts, then stops, the cause could be air in the ened connection.
system whic li is removed by bleeding. Refer to para-
graph 90.
INJECTION PUMP
90, BLEEDING. Before attempting to bleed the
fuel system, make sure that sufficient supply of clean All Models
fuel is contained in the tractor fuel tank.
Loosen both bleed screws (7Fig. 45) and tum 91, Only trained service personnel with proper
shut-off valve (12) to ON position. Fuel should begin tools and equipment should attempt to disassemble
to flow from opened bleeder screws. Close bleeder or adjust the fuel injection pump. Specific procedures
screws when fuel without air bubbles flows from must be performed under conditions of strict cleanli-
openings. Loosen bleed screw (14Fig. 46) on injec- ness, and exact measurements require accurate test
tion pump a]id allow fuel with bubbles to flow from equipment.
opened bleed er screw. Close pump bleed screw when
fuel flowing Irom opened screw is free of bubbles. 92. TIMING TO ENGINE. Timing of the injection
Engine will usually start after bleeding at filter and pump camshaft (11Fig. 39) and drive gear (4) is
pump, but it may be necessary to advance throttle considered correct if timing gear marks (1 and 3Fig.
slightly, loosen flttings at each injection nozzle, then 38) are aligned as shown.

55
 Paragraphs 93-95
Start of injection should occur at 19 BTDC for 235
and 235H models, 23 BTDC for 245 and 255 models,
or 21 BTDC for 265 and 275 models. Timing marks
are located on the crankshaft pulley as shown at
(IFig. 36). Injection pump timing should be checked
if any of the following components have been re-
newed: injection pump assembly, injection pump
camshaft or timing gears. Timing is adjusted by
changing the thickness of sbims located between
injection pump and cylinder block mounting surface.
Refer to paragraph 93 for removing pump and setting
initial timing.
Ib check timing of installed pump, shut fuel OFF
at fuel filter shut-off valve and remove rocker arm
cover. Disconnect injector line from front fitting (de-
livery valve holder) on pump. Remove the delivery
valve holder (1Fig. 46), delivery valve (5) and
spring (3), then attach a test drip tube to the outlet
port. Turn engine crankshaft clockwise until front
(No. 1) cylinder is on compression stroke and TDC
mark (TFig. 36) on crankshaft pulley is aligned
with timing pointer. The TDC mark is a single mark
as sbown and, if front cylinder is on compression
stroke, the exhaust valve for number two cylinder
will be starting to open. Turn crankshaft counter-
clockwise (opposite normal direction of rotation) ap-
proximately Vs turn, move speed control to low speed
position and turn fuel ON. Fuel should fiow freely
from the front outlet port, then turn crankshaft clock-
wise until fuel almost stops flowing from the outlet
port. If timing is correct, tbe correct mark of the three
marks (I) on crankshaft pulley will be aligned with
pointer. The first mark indicates 23, the second 21
and the last mark indicates 19 BTDC. The moment
that fuel stops flowing from outlet port, is the time
injection begins. If timing is incorrect, refer to para-
graph 93 and remove injection pump and change
thickness of shims located between injection pump
and cylinder block mounting surface. Tb advance
timing, remove shims; add shims to retard timing.
Refer to the following to help determine the number
of shims to add or remove, but timing must be
checked again after changing shims and assembling.
Shim thickness of 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) will change
timing approximately V2 degree or about 0.6 mm
(0.0236 in.) on crankshaft pulley rim. Shim thickness
of 0.10 mm (0.039 in.) will change timing approxi-
mately one degree or 1.2 mm (0.0472 in.) on crank-
shaft pulley rim. Shim thickness of 0.2 mm (0.078 in.)
will change timing approximately two degrees or 2.4
mm (0.0945 in.) on crankshaft pulley rim. Shim thick-
ness of 0.4 mm (0.157 in.) will change timing approxi-
mately four degrees or 4.8 mm (0.189 in.) on
crankshaft pulley rim.
93. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Shut fuel OFF
at fuel filter shut-off valve, disconnect fuel supply line
from pump. Remove cover from side of pump, then
56
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
disconnect spring (2Fig. 40) and tie rod (1) from
rack. Detach high pressure fuel lines, then unbolt
pump from block surface. Align injection pump rack
pin with notch in upper opening of cylinder block,
then withdraw pump. Be careful not to damage or
lose shims which adjust injection pump timing.
Tb determine thickness of shims to install and set
injection pump initial timing, use a depth gauge and
measure distance from the pump mounting surface
of block to the low circle of pump drive cam. Subtract
this measured distance from fixed height of pump.
Install shims equal to the remaining distance. This
procedure will provide initial timing, but final timing
should be checked as outlined in paragraph 92. Com-
plete assembly by reversing removal procedure. Refer
to paragraph 90 to bleed air from the system when
timing is complete.
GOVERNOR AND INJECTION PUMP
CAMSHAFT
All Models
94. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. It is necessary
to remove the timing gear cover as outlined in para-
graph 77 to service the governor weights, internal
governor linkage and injection pump camshaft. Slid-
ing shaft (7Fig. 47) can be withdrawn, then gover-
nor fiyweights and bracket (8) can be unbolted and
removed from gear (4) if service is required.
Tb remove the injection pump camshaft (11), refer
to paragraph 93 and remove the injection pump.
Remove screw (SFig. 48) retaining bearing (10)
through hole in gear (4), then withdraw gear (4),
bearing (10) and injection pump camshaft (11).
When assembling, refer to Fig. 38 and paragraph
75 for aligning marks on all timing gears, including
the injection pump drive gear. Governor weight lever
(21Fig. 47), shaft (19) and tension lever (12) should
move smoothly. Refer to paragraph 77 for installation
of the timing gear housing, to paragraph 93 for in-
stalling the fuel injection pump, to paragraph 92 for
timing the pump and to paragraph 95 for adjusting
engine governed speeds.
95. ENGINE SPEED AND GOVERNOR AD-
JUSTMENTS. Usually all governor adjustments
will not be required at the same time.
Stop lever adjustment is accomplished by setting
the stop cable to permit movement of lever from stop
position (SFig. 49) to running position (R).
Start engine and adjust stop screw (L) to provide
idle speed of 900-950 rpm, then tighten locknut.
Position of the high idle speed stop screw (H) is
sealed and disturbing seal will void warranties. Cor-
rect high idle speed is 2825-2900 Rpm. Tb adjust
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 96

fei^%
V 14
r / 15
Fig. 47Expioded view of governor as-
sembiy, timing gears and timing cover.
1. Crankshaft gear 12. Speed control
2. Idler gear lever
3. Valve camshaft 13. Grooved pin
gear 14. "0" ring
4. Injection pump 15. Spring arm
camshaft gear 16. Nuts & washers
5. Hydraulic pump 17. Spring
drive gear 18. Spring arm
6. Crankshaft pulley 19. Governor shaft
7. Sliding shaft 20. Grooved pin
8. Grovemor weights 21. Governor lever
assy. 22. Needle bearing
9. Drive key 23. Needle bearing
10. Bearing 24. Timing gear cover
11. Injection pump 25. Spring
camshafl 26. Tie rod

Fig. 48Cross-sectionai view of the

governor assembiy. Left view is from
side and right view is from top. Refer
to Fig. 47 for iegend except for screw
(S) which retains bearing (10) in biocit
bore and piug (24).

11

24

setting of high speed stop screw (H), loosen locknut
and back screw (D) out until the dampener spring no
longer contacts the tie rod (26). Start engine and run
at high idle speed, turn screw (H) to set high idle
speed to 2800-2840 rpm, tighten locknut, then adjust
damper screw (D) as follows.
Tb set the dampener (surge) screw (D), loosen
locknut and back screw (D) out until the dampener
spring no longcjr contacts the tie rod (26). Start engine
and run at higli idle speed, then turn dampener screw
(D) in until it just contacts the rack control tie rod
(26). Turn screw (D) in an additional V2-I turn, which
should push rack toward rear slightly and increase
engine speed 25-40 rpm, then lock position with
locknut.
INJECTOR NOZZLES
All Models
96. All models use ND-DN4SD24, throttling type
nozzles and service is limited to removal, cleaning,

57
Paragraphs 97-99
26
adjusting opening pressure and installation. Individ-
ual parts of injector are not available separately.
97. TESTING AND LOCATING FAULTY NOZ-
ZLES. If the engine is misfiring and fuel system is
suspected as being the cause, system may be checked
by loosening each injector line connection in turn
while engine is running at slow idle speed. If engine
operation is not affected when injector line is loos-
ened, that cylinder is misfiring. Remove and test (or
install new injector) as outlined in the following para-
graphs.
98. REMOVE AND REINSTALL, Before remov-
ing an injector or loosening injector lines, thoroughly
clean injector, lines and surrounding area using com-
pressed air and a suitable solvent. Remove high pres-
sure line leading from pump to injector and detach
return line from injector. Remove injector flange
screws and withdraw injector nozzle from cylinder
head.
Clean exterior surfaces of nozzle and bore in cylin-
der head being careful to keep all surfaces clean until
injector nozzle is reinstalled. When installing,
tighten fiange screws to 15-19 N.m (11-14 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Refer to paragraph 90 for bleeding procedure.
99. BENCH TESTING. A complete job of testing
and adjusting the injector requires the use of special
test equipment. Only clean, approved testing oil
should be used and nozzle should be tested for open-
ing pressure, seat leakage, back leakage and spray
pattern. When tested, nozzle should open with a
high-pitched buzzing sound, and should cut off
quickly at the end of injection with a minimum of seat
leakage and controlled amount of back leakage.
Before conducting test, operate tester lever until
fuel fiows, then attach injector. Close valve to tester
gauge and pump tester lever a few quick strokes to
be sure that nozzle valve is not stuck, and that
58
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Fig. 49View showing adjustment io-
cations of Injection pump dampening
screw (D)j governor low speed screw
(L) and governed high speed screw (H).
Stop iever shouid move freely between
stop position (S) and run position (R).
Dampener and high speed adjustment
screws are seaied and should be ad-
justed oniy by qualified personnel.
possibilities are good that injector can be returned to
service without disassembly.
WARNiNG: Fuel ieaves injector nozzie with suffi-
cient force to penetrate the sicin. Keep exposed
portions of your body ciear of nozzie spray when
testing.
OPENING PRESSURE. Open valve to tester
gauge and operate tester lever slowly while observing
gauge reading. Opening pressure should be 10,789-
12,749 kPa (1565-1849 psi) for 235, 235H, 245 and
255 models or 14,714-16,672 kPa (2134-2418 psi) for
265 and 275 models. Opening pressure is changed by
adding or removing shims (3-Fig. 50).
SPRAY PATTERN. Spray pattern should be well
atomized and slightly conical, emerging in a straight
axis from the nozzle tip. If pattern is wet, ragged or
intermittent, nozzle must be overhauled or renewed.
Fig. 50Expioded
view of fuei injector
nozzle assembiy.
1. Nozzle holder body
2. Hold down flange
3. Shim washer
4. Spring
5. Pressure pin
6. Distance piece
7. Needle valve assy.
8. Retaining nut
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
LEAKAGE TEST. Wipe end of nozzle ofT with a
clean cloth alter completing opening and spray pat-
tern tests. Operate tester until pressure reaches pres-
sure about 2068 kPa (300 psi) less than opening
pressure and maintain this pressure. Nozzle should
not drip for at least 10 seconds; however, end of nozzle
may become wet. Leakage can usually be corrected
by cleaning.
100. CLEANING. Do not use hard or sharp tools,
emery cloth, grinding compound or other than ap-
proved solvents or lapping compounds. Approved noz-
zle cleaning Idts are available from specialized tool
sources.
Wipe all dirt and loose carbon from exterior of
nozzle and holder assembly. Refer to Fig. 50 for ex-
ploded view and proceed as follows:
Secure nozzle in a soft jawed vise or holding fixture
and remove nut (8Fig. 50). Place all parts in clean
calibrating oil or diesei fuel as they are removed. Use
a compartmented pan and exercise care to keep parts
fi'om each injector together and separate from other
units that are disassembled at the same time.
Clean exte]dor surfaces with a brass wire brush,
soaking parts in an approved carbon solvent if neces-
sary, to loosen hard carbon deposits. Rinse parts in
clean diesei fuel or calibrating oil immediately after
cleaning to neutralize the solvent and prevent etch-
ing of polished surfaces.
Clean nozzle spray hole from inside using a pointed
hardwood stick or wood splinter, then scrape carbon
from pressure chamber using a hooked scraper. Clean
valve seat using brass scraper.
Reclean all parts, rinsing thoroughly in clean diesei
fuel or calibrating oil and assemble while parts are
immersed in cleaning fiuid. Make sure adjusting
shim pack is intact. Tighten nozzle retaining nut (8)
to 58.8-78.4 N.m (43.4-57.8 ft.-lbs.) torque. Do not
overtighten. Distortion may cause valve to stick and
no amount of overtightening can stop a leak caused
by scratches or dirt. Retest assembled injector as
previously outlined.
GLOW PLUGS
All Models
101. Glow plugs are connected in parallel with each
glow plug grounding through its mounting threads.
Paragraphs 100-102
Starting switch is provided with "HEAT" position
which can be used to energize the glow plugs for faster
warm up. If indicator lamp fails to light when start
switch is held in "HEAT" position, check for loose
connections at switch, indicator lamp, resistor con-
nections, glow plug connections and ground. A test
lamp can be used to check for current fiow to glow
plug. Internal resistance of each glow plug should be
approximately 1.0 ohm (hot) and 0.16 ohm (cold).
Tighten glow plugs into cylinder head with 15-19 N.m
(11-14 ft.-lbs.) torque.
FUEL SHUT-OFF SOLENOID
All Models
102. The electric fuel shut-off system is designed to
automatically shut fuel off when start switch is in
"OFF" position or when oil pressure drops below a
prescribed level. Major components of the system
include a solenoid, control timer, ignition switch and
oil pressure switch.
To check for proper operation, remove the injector
pump side cover so that the injector pump rack can
be seen. Turn ignition switch "ON" and check to see
that control rack moves forward to fuel shut-off posi-
tion. Turn ignition to "OFF" position and reinstall
injection pump side cover. Turn switch from "OFF," to
"ON," then to "START" position and check to be sure
that solenoid is energized when in "ON" position and
not energized when in "START" position.
Tb remove the fuel shut-off solenoid (27Fig. 49),
loosen locknut, disconnect wires and unscrew sole-
noid. Remove side cover from pump before installing,
so that solenoid can be adjusted to correct depth.
Coat threads with "Loctite 592" sealer or equiva-
lent and thread solenoid into block bore. Hold the
injection pump rack all the way forward and thread
solenoid IN until plunger contacts the rack. Back the
solenoid out approximately Vs turn, which will pro-
vide about 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) clearance between
solenoid plunger and rack. Lock solenoid in position
with locknut and make sure that arrow on rubber
boot is pointed up (which positions drain hole to
bottom). Connect wires to solenoid and install injec-
tion pump side cover.
59
Paragraphs 103-107 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR BELT

All Models All Models

103. Radiator pressure cap is used to increase
cooling system pressure. Valve in cap is set to open at
about 88 kPa (12.8 psi). Cooling system capacity is
6.0 L (6.34 qt.) for 235, 235H and 275 models; 5.3 L
(5.6 qt.) for 245 and 255 models; and 5.8 L (6.1 qt.) for
265 models.
Tb remove radiator, first drain coolant, then remove
hood, side panels and grille. Disconnect upper coolant
hose from thermostat housing outlet on engine and
lower coolant hose from water pump. Remove radia-
tor mounting screws, then lift radiator and fan
shroud from tractor.
105. The water pump, fan and alternator are
driven by a V belt from the engine crankshaft. Loosen
alternator brace and pivot bolts, then slide alternator
toward engine to remove drive belt. Standard belt
length is 932 mm (36 3/4 in.) for 235, 235H, 245 and
255 models; 972 mm (38 V4 in.) for 265 and 275
models. Tighten belt until defiection measures 13 mm
(V2 in.) with 10 kg (22 lbs.) pressure exerted midway
between alternator pulley and crankshaft pulley.
WATER PUMP
All Models

106. Ib remove water pump, drain cooling system,

THERMOSTAT
All Models
104. The thermostat is located in a spacer housing
located under the coolant outlet elbow at front of
cylinder head. Thermostat should begin to open at 82
C (180 F) and should be fully open at 95 C (203 F).
remove radiator as outlined in paragraph 103. Loosen
hose clamps and remove by-pass hose, loosen alter-
nator brace and pivot bolts, then slide alternator
toward engine. Unbolt and remove fan blades, then
unbolt and remove coolant pump.
Pump is non-repairable and must be renewed as an
assembly. Use new gasket and reinstall by reversing
removal procedure. Refer to paragraph 105 for tight-
ening belt.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR Voltage Regulator
Regulating voltage 14.5-15.1
All Models Pilot lamp OFF voltage 4.2-5.2
Pilot lamp ON voltage 0.5-3.0
107. A 12 volt, 35 amp, Mitsubishi AH2035M4 is
used on all models along with a Tirrill, 2 element CAUTION: When servicing the electrical system,
RQB2220D4 external regulator. The regulator is not observe the foiiowing precautions:
a. When installing battery or connecting a
externally adjusted. Specifications are as follows. booster battery, negative post must always be
grounded.
Alternator Output at 20 C (68 F) b. Never short across any terminal of alternator
Test rpm 1300 or regulator.
Volts 14 c. Do not attempt to polarize alternator.
Amperes 8 d. Disconnect battery cabies before disconnect-
ing wires from any other electricai unit.
Test rpm 2500 e. Do not operate aiternator on an open circuit
Volts 14 and be sure all leads are properly connected before
Amperes More than 30 starting engine.

60
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Fig. 51Expioded view of Mitsubishi
AH2035M4 alternator used on all mod-
els.
l.Nut 7. Rotor
2. Washer 8. Stator
3. Pulley 9. Brush holder assy.
4. Front cover 10. Diode assy.
5. Bearing retainer 11. Housing
6. Bearings 12. Brush & spring
If alternator output does not meet specifications,
check stator, rotor, diodes and brushes as follows.
Tb disassemble alternator, first scribe marks on
frame halves to aid reassembly. Remove screws and
pry altemato r apart with a screwdriver between sta-
tor frame (8Fig. 51) and drive end frame (4). Stator
assembly (8) must remain with end frame (11) when
unit is separ^ited. Clamp rotor (7) in a protected jaw
vise only tight enough to permit loosening pulley nut
(1). Rotor and end frame may be separated after
pulley and faia are removed.
Check bearing surface of rotor shaft for visible wear
or scoring. Spin bearings (6) to check for smooth
operation. Renew as needed. Examine slip ring sur-
faces for scoring or wear. Slip ring standard diameter
is 33 mm (1.299 in.) with a minimum wear limit of 32
mm (1.259 in).
Check rotor for grounded, shorted or open circuits
using an ohmmeter. Measure resistance with an ohm-
meter between rotor shaft and outer slip ring. Resis-
tance near 0 ohms indicates a ground. Resistance
between the two slip rings should be approximately
7.9 ohms at 20 C (68 F) and a lower resistance
indicates windings are shorted. If resistance reading
is too high, it indicates an open circuit. If resistance
of windings is correct and not shorted to ground,
mount rotor in a lathe and check for runout at slip
rings with a dial indicator. Runout should not exceed
0.051 mm (0.002 in.). Slip ring surfaces can be trued
if runout is excessive or if surfaces are scored. Finish
with 400 grit or finer polishing cloth until scratches
or machine marks are removed.
Inspect brushes and brush springs for wear or
damage. Standard brush length is 18 mm (0.71 in.)
with a minimum service limit of 8 mm (0.31 in.). If
brushes are I'eused, make sure that all grease is
removed before reassembling. New brush springs
Paragraph 108
exert 370 g (13.0 ozs.) of pressure and springs should
be replaced if pressure is less than 210 g (7.4 ozs.).
Test windings of stator (8) for grounded or open
circuits with an ohmmeter. Connect ohmmeter test
leads between each pair of leads. Note that stator
leads have a common connection in center of wind-
ings. A high resistance reading would indicate an
open circuit and a very low reading indicates a
grounded or shorted circuit. A short circuit within the
stator windings can not be readily determined by an
ohmmeter test because of the low resistance of the
windings; however, a stator with a short circuit will
usually have coils burned black in the area of the
short.
To test diodes, first remove the stator, then remove
diode and heat sink assembly (10) from end frame,
noting the insulator positions. Check the positive side
diode trio in both directions using an ohmmeter.
Ohmmeter should indicate continuity in one direction
and no continuity when test leads are reversed. If
continuity is noted in both directions, one or more of
the diodes are damaged. Diodes must be detached to
determine which is damaged, but the complete as-
sembly (10) must be renewed, making further check-
ing unnecessary. The negative side diode trio may be
tested in a similar manner.
Reassemble alternator by reversing disassembly
procedure.
STARTING MOTOR
All Models
108. A Mitsubishi starting motor with a magnetic
shift and gear reduction is used. Refer to Fig. 52 for
exploded view. With battery voltage of 11.5 volts and
no load, current draw should not exceed 100 amperes
and minimum speed should be 3000 rpm.
61
 Paragraph 108 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

F/g. 52Exploded view of Mit-

12 subishi starting motor used on ali
models.
1. Snap ring 12. Spacer shims
2. Retainer 13. Solenoid
3. Drive gear 14. Washer &
4. Spring retainer
5. Housing 15. Cover
6. Drive shaft & 16. Armature
lever assy. 17. Bearing
21 7. Springs 18. Washer
20 8. Retainer 19. Field coil &
9. Reduction gear housing
19 10. Drive gear depth 20. Brush &
adjusting shim holder assy.
11. Central housing 21. End plate

The starter can be removed in the usual manner

after disconnecting ground cable from battery. To
disassemble, detach wire from solenoid, remove the
two attaching screws and remove solenoid and
plunger (13). Remove through-bolts, then separate
rear cover (21), armature (16), field coil/housing (19)
and brush assembly (20). Remove cover (15), retainer
and washer (14), then remove screws attaching cen-
tral housing (11) to housing (5). Remove snap ring (1),
retainer (2), pinion gear (3) and spring (4), then
withdraw drive shaft and lever assembly (6) from
housing (5).

Fig, 55The stroke (5) of safety switches is 4-5 mm

d
(0.16-0.20) and switch is open when extended. Switches
can be damaged if forced in further than necessary.

Fig. 53View of safety switches (S) on range shifter and

pto shifter ievers (L) of 235 modeis with gear drive trans-
mission, initiai adjustment distance (1) shouid be 20-21
mm (0.79-0,83 in.) and distance (2) shouid be 7-8 mm
(0.28-0.31 in.).

Fig. 54View of safety switches (S) on range shifter and

pto shifter ievers (L) of 235H modeis with hydrostatic
transmission, initiai adjustment distance (3) shouid be Fig. 56View of safety switches (S) on range shifter and
20-21 mm (0.79-0,83 in,) and distance (4) shouid be 8-9 mm pto shifter ievers (L) of 265 modeis with, initiai adjustment
(0.31-0.35 in.). distances (6 & 7) shouid be 7-8 mm (0.28-0.31 in.).

62
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Refer to the following test specifications:
Standard length of brushes is 17 mm (0.67 in.) and
minimum servdce limit is 11.5 mm (0.45 in.). Brush
springs should exert 1.5 kg (3.31 lbs.) and should be
renewed if pressure is less than 0,7 kg (1.54 lbs.).
When assembling, add sufficient thickness of
shims (10) to reduce end play of shaft (6) to 5 mm (0.20
in.). When solenoid (13) is engaged, pinion (3) should
move to within 0.5-2.0 mm (0.0197-0.0787 in.) of end
of pinion shaft (6). To adjust pinion gap, add or remove
shims (12).
SAFETY SWITCHES
All Models
109. Safety starting switches are installed to pre-
vent accident^il, unsafe starting. Do not remove or
by-pass safety switches. Wires can be detached
and operation of the switches can be checked with
voltmeter or other continuity tester.
One safety starting switch is located on the pto
shift linkage ind one switch is located on the range
shift lever. These two safety switches prevent start-
ing the engine EXCEPT when the pto is disengaged
and the range transmission is in neutral.
On some models, a safety starting switch is located
under the en^^ne clutch pedal. This safety switch
prevents starting the engine EXCEPT when the en-
gine clutch pedal is depressed to the floor. ] shut-off solenoid.
Paragraphs 109-110
On all models, make sure that switches are ad-
justed to prevent accidental starting unless controls
are in safe positions. Released position of switch will
be an open circuit. All safety switches must be actu-
ated before starter will operate. Refer to Fig. 53, Fig.
54, Fig. 55 and Fig. 56 for typical shift linkage safety
switch installation and adjustment. Adjustment of
clutch pedal safety switch is covered in paragraph
112.
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
All Models
110. Refer to Fig. 57 for wiring diagram typical of
235, 235H, 245 and 255 models and Fig. 58 for draw-
ing showing typical location of components. Refer to
Fig. 59 for wiring and schematic of the control timer
unit used on all models. The control timer unit is
available only as an assembly. Refer to Fig. 60 for
wiring diagram typical of 275 models and Fig. 61 for
drawing showing typical location of components. Wir-
ing for 265 models is similar to the other models, but
system has a fusible link in the black (hot) wire from
starter. Two safety starting switches are used on all
models, but only one is shown in wiring diagrams.
Refer to paragraph 109 for adjusting the safety
switches, paragraph 101 for testing glow plugs and to
paragraph 102 for testing and adjusting the fuel
63
Paragraph 110 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

64
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 110 (Cont.)

Fig. 58Drawing of eiectricai system compo-

nents typicai of 235, 235H, 245 and 255 modeis.
Refer to Fig. 57 for iegend.

16
13

Fig. 59Wiring diagram for controi timer unit and

associated parts. Timer is avaiiabie oniyas a com-
piete unit and components can not be serviced
separateiy. Refer to Fig. 57 or Fig. 60 for iegend.

65
Paragraph 110 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

s ^
I 0
ho
b
iiij
mc^ too]''.Pg gj a;

JO
E MM^mMsflUl
i d <:d t> 00 05 o 1-H (N CO
IN* TH 1( i-H rH T( CO CO CO CO
CM

1^

8/tl ^^ 8/tt

Vfl

66
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 111-112

Fig. 61Drawing of electrical system com-

ponents typical of 275 model. Refer to Fig.
60 for legend.

17

\
16 13
14

CLUTCH
111. All except early 275 models are equipped with CLUTCH LINKAGE
a single plate, dry disc, diaphragm spring loaded
clutch, attached to the engine flywheel. The clutch on
early 275 models (before serial number 17657689) All Models Without Live Pto
uses coil springs. Clutch disc diameter is 184 mm
(7.24 in.) on 235 and 235H models, 200 mm (7.87 in.) 112. ADJUSTMENT. It is important to maintain
on 245, 255 and 265 models, and 215 mm (8.46 in.) on correct adjustment of linkage to make sure that
275 model. proper clearance is maintained between throw out

67
 Paragraph 112 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 62Drawing of dutch pedal and

externai iinkage typical of ali modeis
except 275. Adjust pedai linkage to
adjust free travel (F).
R Free play 2. Clevis
W. Working travel 3. Linkage rod
1. Locknut 4. Pin
w

3 1 2 4

bearing and fingers of clutch as well as making sure pedal free travel. Install cotter pin in clevis pin (4)
that clutch does not drag when disengaged. Checking and tighten clevis locknut (1) when adjustment is
is accomplished by measuring free travel (free play) correct.
of clutch pedal, from full up position to the point
Clutch pedal free travel (FFig. 63) should be
where throw out bearing contacts release fingers.
10-20 mm (0.39-0.79 in.) for 275 model. Adjust free
The clutch pedal free travel (FFig. 62) should be travel by loosening clevis locknut (1), disconnecting
20-30 mm (0.79-1.18 in.) for 235 and 235H models. clevis from operating lever, then turning clevis (2)
Effective (working) travel (W) of pedal should be further on or off connecting linkage (3). Reattach
65-75 mm (2.56-2.76 in.). Pedal free travel will de- clevis and recheck pedal free travel. Install cotter pin
crease as clutch lining wears. Adjust free travel by (4) in clevis pin and tighten clevis locknut (1) when
loosening clevis locknut (1), disconnecting clevis (2)
from pedal, then turning clevis further on or off
connecting linkage (3). Reattach clevis and recheck
pedal free travel (F). Install cotter pin in clevis pin (4)
and tighten clevis locknut (1) when adjustment is
correct.
Clutch pedal free travel (FFig. 62) should be
10-20 mm (0.0.30-0.79 in.) for 245 and 255 models.
Effective (working) travel (W) of pedal should be
80-90 mm (3.15-3.54 in.). Pedal free travel will de-
crease as clutch lining wears. Adjust free travel by
loosening clevis locknut (1), disconnecting clevis (2)
from pedal, then turning clevis further on or off
connecting linkage (3). Reattach clevis and recheck
pedal free travel. Install cotter pin in clevis pin (4)
and tighten clevis locknut (1) when adjustment is
correct.
Clutch pedal free travel (FFig. 62) should be
20-30 mm (0.79-1.18 in.) for 265 model. Effective
(working) travel (W) of pedal should be 30-45 mm
(1.18-1.77 in.) for 265 models with synchronized
transmission or 75-115 mm (2.95-4.53 in.) for models
with constant mesh transmission. Pedal free travel
will decrease as clutch lining wears. Adjust free travel Fig. 63Drawing of clutch pedal and external linkage
typicai of 275 modei. Safety starting switch (S) may be
by loosening clevis locknut (1), disconnecting clevis instaiied as shown.
(2) from pedal, then turning clevis further on or off 1. Locknut 3. Linkage rod
connecting linkage (3). Reattach clevis and recheck 2. Clevis 4. Pin

68
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Fig, 64^-Drawing of clutch pedal linkage for 245 and 255
models with live pto. When released, pedai is in position
(1). At position (2), engine clutch should be disengaged
and at position (3), pto dutch shouid disengage. Refer to
text.
adjustment is correct. Safety start switch (S) should
be adjusted to prevent starting unless clutch pedal is
fully depresseii.
Models With Live Pto
113, ADJUSTMENT. Depressing the pedal on
models with live pto first disengages the engine
clutch, then depressing further disengages the pto.
Conversely, releasing the pedal engages pto first,
then engages the engine clutch. It is important to
maintain correict adjustment of linkage to make sure
that proper clearance is maintained between throw
out bearing and fingers of the engine clutch as well
as making sui*e that clutch does not drag when dis-
engaged. Clutch pedal sbould have some free travel
(free play), but should be checked and adjusted as
follows.
On 245 and 255 models, refer to Fig. 64 and check
to make sure that engine clutch is disengaged or
begins to engage when pedal is 75-85 mm (3.0-3.3 in.)
from left step as indicated at (2). If clutch does not
engage/disengage when pedal is at correct position,
adjust by loosening clevis locknut (5Fig. 65), dis-
connecting clevis (6) from pedal, then turning clevis
ftirther on or off connecting linkage (7). Reattach
clevis and recheck point of engagement/disengage-
ment. Install cotter pin in clevis pin (8) and tighten
clevis locknut (5) when adjustment is correct. Con-
tinue to depress clutch pedal and check adjustment
of the pto opei'ating cable. With engine stopped, de-
press clutch pedal until distance (3Fig. 64) from
pedal to top of the left step is 50-60 mm (2.0-2.4 in.),
then check pto control valve plunger (P). Plunger
should be puslied fully into control valve, but if not,
adjust cable at nuts (N).
On 265 model, refer to Fig. 66 and check to make
sure that engine clutch is disengaged or begins to
engage when ])edal is 105-115 mm (4.1-4.5 in.) from
Paragraph 113
Fig, 65Drawing of dutch pedai and external linkage for
engine dutch of 245 and 255 models with iive pto,
5. Locknut 7. Linkage rod
6. Clevis 8. Pin
step as indicated at (2). If clutch does not engage/dis-
engage when pedal is at correct position, adjust by
loosening clevis locknut (5), disconnecting clevis (6)
from pedal, then turning clevis further on or off
connecting linkage (7). Reattach clevis and recheck
point of engagement/disengagement. Install cotter
pin or "E" ring in clevis pin (8) and tighten clevis
locknut (5) when adjustment is correct. Continue to
depress clutch pedal and check adjustment of the pto
operating cable. With engine stopped, depress clutch
pedal until distance (3) from pedal to top of step is
75-85 mm (3.0-3.3 in.), then check pto control valve
plunger (P). Plunger should be pushed fully into
control valve, but if not, adjust cable at nuts (N).
On 275 model, refer to Fig. 67 and check to make
sure that engine clutch is disengaged or begins to
engage when pedal is 85-95 mm (3.35-3.74 in.) from
step as indicated at (2). If clutch does not engage/dis-
engage when pedal is at correct position, adjust by
disconnecting clevis (6), then turning clevis further
on or off connecting linkage (7). Reattach clevis and
recheck point of engagement/disengagement. Con-
tinue to depress clutch pedal and check adjustment
of the pto operating cable. With engine stopped, de-
press clutch pedal until distance (3) from pedal to top
of step is 45-55 mm (1.77-2.17 in.), then check pto
control valve plunger. Plunger should be pushed fully
into control valve, but if not adjust cable at nuts (N).
When assembling linkage, height of cam bolt (11
Fig. 68) should be set so that it contacts cam as
shown. Pedal free play (travel) should be about 10
mm (0.39 in.) when linkage is correctly adjusted. If
free play is not correct, adjust by loosening bolts
(9Fig. 67), repositioning cam plate (10), then
retightening bolts (9) to 12-17 N.m (9-13 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Move cam plate (10) forward to reduce free
play or toward rear to increase free play.
69
 Paragraph 113 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 66Drawing of ciutch pedai iinieage for 265 modei with iive pto. When reieased, pedai is in position (1). At position
(2), engine ciutch shouid be disengaged and at position (3), pto ciutch shouid disengage. Refer to text.
5. Locknut 7. Linkage rod 9. Locknut 11. Linkage rod
6. Clevis 8. Pin 10. Clevis 12. Pin

Fig. 67Drawing of ciutch pedai iinie-

age for 275 modei with iive pto. When
reieased, pedai is in position (1). At
position (2), engine ciutch shouid be
disengaged and at position (3), pto
ciutch shouid disengage. Refer to text.
5. Locknut 8. Pin
6. Clevis 9. Locknut
7. Linkage rod 10. Clevis

9 6 8

70
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
12
Fig. 68View of cam and cam boit showing correct ad-
justment height (11) of bolt. Be sure that locknut (12) Is
tightened to prevent changes in adjustment.
CLUTCH SPLIT
114. The clutch housing must be separated from
the engine to service other components as well as to
remove the clutch assembly from engine fl3rsvheel.
The following procedures describe splitting for the
removal of the; clutch, but may be adapted for other
services.
235, 235H And 265 Models
115. Remove? the hood, side panels and grille, then
disconnect both cables from battery. Detach electrical
wiring from glow plugs, injection pump shut off sole-
noid, coolant temperature sender, alternator, starter
motor and any other components which would pre-
vent separating clutch housing from engine, then lay
the wiring back out of the way. Turn fuel off at filter
shut off valve and remove fuel line between filter and
injection pump. Detach governor control rod from
speed control lever and stop cable from engine man-
ual stop lever. Detach hydraulic lines from hydraulic
pump, being CEtreful to prevent damage to fittings and
line seals. Remove the oil cooler outlet pipe from left
side of 235H models. On all models except 265, detach
drag link from steering gear. On 265 model, detach
steering shaft at universal joint and disconnect hy-
draulic lines from power steering of 265 models so
equipped. Remove the front-wheel drive shaft from
models so equipped. On all models, detach, then
remove the fuel line which returns fuel from injection
nozzles to the fuel tank. Unbolt and remove left and
right floor boards and steps.
Paragraphs 114-116
Place wedges between the front axle and front sub
frame on both sides to prevent tipping and turn the
front wheels to straight ahead. Support, but do not
raise, front axle and engine by attaching a movable
hoist to the engine lifting eyes. Support, but do not
raise, rear of tractor safely and securely under clutch
housing. Remove screws attaching clutch housing to
engine, then carefully separate between engine and
clutch housing.
Clean mating surfaces of clutch housing and en-
gine, then apply a light coat of "Loctite 515" or equiva-
lent sealer to surface before rejoining. Apply a thin
coat of grease to clutch shaft splines and make sure
that clutch disc is centered. It may be necessary to
turn crankshaft slightly to align splines of clutch disc
with splines of clutch shaft. Make sure that mating
surfaces of clutch housing and engine are together
before tightening screws. Do not attempt to draw
engine and clutch housing together by tightening
screws. Tighten 8M screws to 25-29 N.m (18-22 fb.-
lbs.) torque and 12M screws to 83-93 N.m (61-69
ft.-lbs.) torque. Adjust clutch linkage as outlined in
paragraph 112.
245 And 255 Models
116. Remove hood panel and engine side panels,
then disconnect both cables from battery. Disconnect
tachometer cable from drive at engine, hoses from air
cleaner and wires from fuel level sensor in fuel tank.
Remove grille, steering wheel and panels from
around steering gear. Remove fuel line which returns
fuel from injection nozzles to fuel tank, then remove
the fuel tank and brackets. Remove fuel line to injec-
tion pump. Detach electrical wiring from glow plugs,
injection pump shut-off solenoid, coolant temperature
sender, alternator, starter motor and any other com-
ponents which would prevent separating clutch hous-
ing from engine, then lay the wiring back out of the
way. Detach governor control rod from speed control
lever and stop cable from engine manual stop lever.
Detach hydraulic lines from hydraulic pump, being
careful to prevent damage to fittings and line seals.
Disconnect or remove upper and lower radiator
hoses, turn the front wheels to straight ahead and
detach drag link. Remove the front-wheel drive shaft
from models so equipped. Unbolt and remove left and
right floor boards and steps. Place wedges between
the front axle and front sub frame on botb sides to
prevent tipping. Support, but do not raise, front axle
and frame side rails. Support, but do not raise, rear
of tractor safely and securely under clutch bousing.
Remove screws attaching engine side rails to the
engine and clutch housing, then roll the front axle
and side rails forward away from tractor. Attach hoist
to the engine lifting eyes, unbolt engine from clutch
housing, then carefully separate between engine and
clutch housing.
71
 Paragraphs 117-118
Clean mating surfaces of clutch housing and en-
gine, apply a thin coat of grease to clutch shaft splines
and make sure that clutch disc is centered. It may be
necessary to turn crankshaft slightly to align splines
of clutch disc with splines of clutch shaft. Make sure
that mating surfaces of clutch housing and engine are
together before tightening screws. Do not attempt to
draw engine and clutch housing together by tighten-
ing screws. Tighten 8M screws to 25-29 N.m (18-22
ft.-lbs.) torque and 12M screws to 83-93 N.m (61-69
ft.-lbs.) torque. Adjust clutch linkage as outlined in
paragraph 112. Refer to paragraph 90 for bleeding the
fuel system.
275 Model
117. Remove hood panel and engine side panels,
then disconnect both cables from battery. Remove
grille, steering wheel and panels from around steer-
ing gear, then unbolt and remove the engine cover.
Remove fuel line which returns fuel from injection
nozzles to fuel tank, then remove the fuel tank and
brackets. Detach engine manual stop cable, throttle
control rod and tachometer drive cable. Disconnect
wires to fuel shut-off solenoid, glow plug, thermo
switch, alternator, oil pressure sending unit, tem-
perature sender, and starter motor at electrical con-
nectors or terminals from all models. Detach drag
link from steering gear, detach clamps holding wiring
harness, then move wiring and cables out of the way.
Remove the front axle drive shaft from four-wheel-
drive models. On all models, disconnect (or remove)
hydraulic lines from pump. Unbolt and remove left
floor board, right floor board and steps.
Place wedges between the front axle and front sub
frame on both sides to prevent tipping and turn the
front wheels to straight ahead. Support, but do not
raise, front axle and engine by attaching a movable
hoist to the engine lifting eyes. Support, but do not
raise, rear of tractor safely and securely under clutch
housing. Remove screws attaching clutch housing to
engine, then carefully separate between engine and
clutch housing.
Before rejoining, clean mating surfaces of clutch
housing and engine, then apply a light coat of "Loctite
515" or equivalent sealer to surface. Apply a thin coat
of grease to clutch shaft splines and make sure that
clutch disc is centered. It may be necessary to turn
crankshaft slightly to align splines of clutch disc with
splines of clutch shaft. Make sure that mating sur-
faces of clutch housing and engine are together before
tightening screws. Do not attempt to draw engine and
clutch housing together by tightening screws.
Tighten screws attaching engine to clutch housing to
54-64 N.m (40-47 ft.-lbs.) torque. When tightening
hydraulic lines, tighten pressure and pump inlet lines
to 3.9-6,9 N.m (35-61 in.-lbs.) torque and union bolt
to 39-44 N.m (29-32 ft.-lbs.) torque. Adjust clutch
72
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
linkage as outlined in paragraph 112. Refer to para-
graph 90 for bleeding the fuel system.
COVER, PRESSURE PLATE AND DISC
All Models
118. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Separate between
the clutch housing and engine as outlined in para-
graph 115, paragraph 116 or paragraph 117. Remove
screws attaching clutch cover to engine flywheel
evenly until spring tension is relieved to prevent
distortion and possible injury.
Except for early 275 model tractors, the clutch
cover, diaphragm spring and pressure plate are avail-
able only as a complete assembly. Inspect flngers of
the diaphragm spring for excessive wear and surface
of pressure plate for wear or scoring. Renew assembly
if damaged.
The clutch used on early 275 tractors is equipped
with coil springs and can be disassembled for service.
Adjust release lever height to 20.3-21.7 mm (0.799-
0.843 in.) when reassembling. Adjustment of release
lever height will be simplifled by the use of a special
setting gauge, which can be fabricated using the
dimensions shown in Fig. 69. Variation in height of
the three release levers should not exceed 0.7 mm
(0.027 in.).
Inspect clutch disc of all models for wear or dam-
age. Countersink rivets 1.2-2.0 mm (0.05-0.08 in.)
when installing new lining and install new disc or
lining if rivets are closer than 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) to
worn surface of lining. Inspect flywheel for scoring,
Setting Gauge
Fig, 69^Reiease iever height of dutch with coii springs
used on eariy 275 tractors shouid be set to 20.3-21.7 mm
(0.799-0.843 in.). Speciai gauge can be used to measure
height of reiease ievers.
A. 75 mm (2.953 in.) C. 300 mm (11.81 in.)
B. 260 mm (10.24 in.) D. 20.3-21.7 mm (0.799-0.843 in.)
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
then remove and resurface if necessary. Inspect
clutch shaft pilot bearing and renew if rough or worn.
Remove and renew throwout bearing if fingers of
diaphragm spring are worn or if condition of throwout
bearing is qi;Lestionable. It may be difficult to deter-
mine condition of bearing smoothness under load
when checking by hand.
When reinstalling, apply a thin coat of grease to
pilot bearing. Install clutch lined disc with longer side
TRANSMISSION (SLIDING GEAR)
119. The main sliding gear transmission of 235
model tractors has three forward speeds and one
reverse speed, and the two-speed range transmission
compounds tlie total number of gear reductions to six
forward and two reverse. Shift patterns of the two
levers are shown in Fig. 70 and cross section is shown
in Fig. 71.
The front-wheel-drive axle, of models so equipped,
is powered by shaft driven by the countershafii firont
gear.
INSPECTION
235 Model
120. Removal of the main transmission shift cover
with shift rails and forks from top of transmission
housing as outlined in paragraph 123 will permit
visual inspection of most transmission components.
Removal of th e rockshaft housing as outlined in para-
LOW
1 0 O 2
R 6 63
Fig. 70Shift pattern for 235 modeis with sliding gear
transmission is as shown. Range shift lever (R) is moved
forward for low range. Pattern for speed shift lever (S) is
shown and pto engagement iever is iocated at (P),
Paragraphs 120-122
of hub and cushion springs toward rear. Center clutch
disc to the pilot bearing using a centering tool while
installing the pressure plate assembly. Install the two
shoulder bolts in the correct holes of clutch cover and
tighten all six retaining screws evenly to bring cover
straight against fiywheel. Tighten the six screws to
25-29 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Apply coating of
grease to sliding surfaces of throwout bearing hub
and bushings before installing.
graph 214 will permit inspection of components fur-
ther to the rear. Check to be sure that forks are firmly
attached to shift rails and check condition and opera-
tion of detents in rails. Transmission, rear axle center
housing (differential and final drive), rear axles and
hydraulic system share a common sump (oil supply).
Check suction filter screen and drained fiuid for evi-
dence of metal particles. Refer to paragraph 121 for
lubrication requirements.
LUBRICATION
235 Model
121, Transmission, rear axle center housing (differ-
ential and final drive), rear axles and hydraulic sys-
tem share a common sump (oil supply). The drain
plugs are located at bottom of transmission. Capacity
is approximately 12 L (12.7 quarts) and hydraulic
system suction filter should be removed, cleaned and
reinstalled each time fluid is changed. The hydraulic
system suction filter screen, which also filters trans-
mission fluid, can be unbolted and withdrawn from
right side of transmission housing. Fluid and filter
should be serviced at least every 200 hours of opera-
tion. Recommended fluid is CASE IH HY-TRAN
PLUS or equivalent.
REMOVE AND REINSTALL
235 Model
122, Remove the drain plugs and hydraulic system
suction screen, then allow oil to drain from transmis-
sion housing. Place wedges between the front axle
and front sub frame on both sides to prevent tipping
and tum the front wheels to straight ahead. Support,
but do not raise, front axle, engine and clutch housing
by positioning a jack under clutch housing. Support
rear of transmission housing and raise axle housings
enough to remove rear wheels. Remove rear wheels,
then lower the transmission onto support. Remove
73
 Paragraph 123
28
Fig. 71Cross section of dutch and siiding gear transmission of 235 modeis.
fenders, covers, step plates and foot covers. Discon-
nect brake control rods being careful not to damage
the pedal return springs. Remove hydraulic suction
and pressure lines from left side of tractor. If equipped
with four-wheel drive, unbolt and remove the front
drive engagement lever from right side of clutch
housing. Remove the front drive shaft. Remove the
3-point hitch bracket from all models. Detach wires
from the safety start switches, rear lights and any
other components which would interfere with re-
moval of the transmission, then position wires out of
the way. Safely support the engine and clutch housing
separate from the transmission, then remove screws
attaching the transmission housing to the clutch
housing. Carefully separate the two housings. Make
sure that transmission, center housing and rear axles
are supported securely. Remainder of disassembly
will depend upon required service.
Be careful when removing the rockshaft housing
and transmission shift cover, because both are alumi-
num and can be easily damaged.
Before reconnecting transmission to clutch hous-
ing, check to be sure that recessed sides of clutch
release bearing are centered on release fork and that
clutch disc is centered. It may be necessary to sepa-
rate clutch housing from engine as outlined in para-
graph 115 if disc or release bearing are not correctly
positioned. Apply a thin coat of grease to clutch shaft
splines to ease entry. Reinstall by reversing removal
procedure.
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
OVERHAUL
235 Model
123. SHIFTER COVER. Remove screws attach-
ing cover to top of transmission housing and carefully
separate the cover from housing. Be careful when
removing cover, because it is aluminum and can be
easily damaged. Lift cover straight up, away from
transmission housing while closely observing the po-
sition of the shift rails and forks as they relate to the
respective gears.
Ib disassemble, straighten tabs of lock plate, then
remove screws (5Fig. 72) retaining the shift rails.
Pull shift rails (14 and 15) out toward front while
removing shift forks (11 and 12), detent balls (10),
springs (9) and interlock ball (26). Be careful not to
lose the IV32 inch diameter detent balls (10) and Vie
inch diameter interlock ball (26). Remove shift knob
and screws retaining bracket (8), then remove shift
lever from cover.
Inspect shift rails and forks for damage or excessive
wear. Be sure that all parts are cleaned, then lubri-
cated before assembling. A short plug the same di-
ameter as the shift rails (14 and 15) can be fabricated
and used to hold detent balls (10) compressed against
springs (9) while assembling and installing forks on
shift rails.
When assembling, note that shift rails (14 and 15)
are not interchangeable. Tighten screws attaching
bracket (8) to cover (4) and screws (5) to 24-29 N.m
(18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Coat mating surface of cover
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 124-127

lined in paragraph 214. Remove snap ring (16) and

pry main select shaft rearward until bearing (15) is
out of housing. Remove gears (10, 11 and 12) while
withdrawing shaft. Be careful not to damage bearing
(8) or lose thrust collar (9).
Clean and inspect all parts for damage or excessive
wear

125. MAIN INPUT SHAFT. Remove transmission

as outlined in paragraph 122 and shifter cover as
outlined in paragraph 123. Loosen locknuts, remove
retaining screws (SFig. 71), then remove the clutch
shaft and coupling from main input shaft. Unbolt and
remove front housing (18Fig. 73). If not removed
with housing (18), pull input shaft (7) and bearings
from transmission housing.
Clean and inspect all parts for damage or excessive
wear.

126. FRONT-WHEEL-DRIVE SHAFT. Gears (10

and 12Fig. 74), shaft (13) and related parts of
front-wheel-drive can be removed after removing
housing (18Fig. 73) as described in paragraph 125.
Examine all parts and install any that are worn or
Fig. 72Expioded view of speed and range shift linkage damaged. Install seal (15) with lip toward inside.
used on Modei 235 tractors.
1. Shift lever a3sy. 14. Shift rail (1st & Rev.) 127. COUNTERSHAFT (BEVEL PINION). Re-
2. Range shift 1 ever plate 15. Shift rail (2nd & 3rd) move the transmission as outlined in paragraph 122,
3. Oil filler cap 16. "O" rings
4. Shift cover 17. Range shift lever shifter cover as outlined in paragraph 123, rockshaft
5. Shift rail lockout 18. Pins housing as outlined in paragraph 214, rear axle hous-
bolt & plate 19. Bracket (engine ings as outlined in paragraph 187, differential as
6. Pin start switch)
7. Spring 20. Detent balls (11/32 in.)
outlined in paragraph 186, main select shaft as out-
8. Bracket 21. Detent springs lined in paragraph 124, and main input shaft as
9. Detent springs (2 used) 22. Plug outlined in paragraph 125. If equipped with mechani-
10. Detent halls(2 used) 23. "O" ring cal front-wheel drive, remove front drive components.
11. Fork (1st &:[lev.) 24. Support
12. Fork (2nd & 3rd) 25. Lever On all models, bend back tabs on lockwasher (10
13. Lock tab 26. Interlock ball (7/16 in.) Fig. 75), remove slotted nut (9) and pull countershaft
(31) out toward rear while removing gears. Inspect all
and transmission housing with "Loctite 515" or gears and bearings for wear or damage and renew as
equivalent sealer, make sure that shift forks properly needed.
engage gears, then tighten cover retaining screws to Countershaft can be reassembled by reversing re-
24-29 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Check to make sure moval procedure, but thickness of shims (29) deter-
that gears change properly before completing assem- mines mesh position of bevel pinion. To check mesh
bly. position and determine correct thickness of shims
(29), proceed as follows. Install rear bearing (30) in
124. MAI^f SELECT SHAFT. It is not necessary housing against snap ring (28), without any shims
to separate the transmission housing from clutch (29). Install bevel pinion shaft (31) without gears
housing and remove the main input shaft (7Fig. 73) through rear bearing (30) and front bearing (11), then
to remove the; main select shaft (13), but often service install and tighten nut (9) sufficiently to remove all
to other transmission components requires these pro- end play from bearings. If special gauge tool (avail-
cedures. Refer to paragraph 122 for removal of trans- able from tractor manufacturer) is available, follow
mission and to paragraph 125 for removal of the main instructions and install thickness of shims indicated.
input shaft. If special tool is not available, assemble differential
Tb remove i:he transmission input shaft, proceed as and ring gear and check backlash and mesh position
follows. Remove transmission shifter cover as out- as outlined in paragraph 186. Adding shims (29) will
lined in paraip^aph 123 and the rockshaft and housing move mesh position of bevel gears toward center of
assembly from top of transmission housing as out- differential ring gear. After thickness of shims (29)

75
Paragraphs 128-129 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

14
Fig. 73Expioded view of transmis-
sion main (input) shaft and gear as-
sembiy used in Modei 235 tractors.
1. Oil seal 10. Gear (2nd & 3rd)
2. Ball bearing 11. Gear (1st & Rev.)
3. Snap ring 12. Gear (Low & High)
10 4. Shim 13. Main select shaft
5. Roller bearing 14. Snap ring
6. Snap ring 15. Ball bearing
7. Main shaft 16. Snap ring
8. Needle bearing 17. Snap ring
9. Thrust collar 18. Front housing

has been selected, remove nut (9) and countershaft

(31).
Assemble bearing (30), gears, bearings and spacers
(14 through 28) on countershaft (31), install snap ring
(13) in groove, then measure distance between snap
ring (13) and thrust washer (14) with a feeler gauge.
Change the thickness of shims (26) to adjust the
measured clearance between snap ring (13) and
thrust washer (14) to 0.1-0.4 mm (0.004-0.016 in.).
Assemble countershaft, gears, spacers and bearings
using the pre-selected shims (26 and 29). Tighten nut
(9) until rolling torque of countershaft in bearings is
0.79-0.99 N.m (0.58-0.73 ft.-lbs.) torque, then lock
with washer (10).

128. REVERSE IDLER Remove roll pin (4Fig.

75) and tap shaft (3) out through front of transmission
housing while removing gear (6), needle bearings (5)
and thrust washers (2 and 7). Inspect gear and shaft
for wear or damage and renew if necessary.
: \

129. PTO FRONT DRIVE SHAFT. To remove the

front pto shaft (28Fig. 76), first remove the trans-
mission as outlined in paragraph 122 and the main
input shaft as outlined in paragraph 125. If equipped
Fig. 74Exploded view of engagement and drive gears with mechanical front-wheel drive, remove front
for mechanicai front-wheei drive of 235 modeis so drive components. On all models, drive the shaft out
equipped. toward front until bearing (21) is exposed, then use a
1. Lever assy. suitable puller to remove bearing. Lift shaft from
2. Shift rail & fork assy. 10. Sliding gear transmission housing and remove remaining compo-
3. Detent ball 11. Ball bearing (same as 14)
4. Detent spring 12. Driven gear nents.
5. Snap ring 13. Mechanical front- Inspect components for wear or other damage and
6. "O" ring wheel-drive shaft install parts as required. Always install new "O" rings
7. Roll pins 14. Ball bearing (same as 11)
8. "O" ring 15. Oil seal and oil seals. Apply thread sealer to all screws in-
9. Bushing 16. Packing stalled in through holes.

76
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 129 (Cont.)

31

Fig. 75Exploded view of counter-

shaft and reverse gear assemblies
used in Model 235 tractors.
1. Snap ring 18. Gear (3rd)
2. Thrust washer 19. Snap ring
3. Reverse gear 20. Cluster gear
shaft assy.
4. Roll pin 21. Spacer
5. Needle bearings 22. Needle
6. Reverse gear bearings
7. Thrust washer 23. Thrust washer
8. Snap ring 24. High gear
9. Slotted nut 25. Low gear
10. Lockwasher 26. Shims
11. Tapered roller 27. Thrust collar
bearing 28. Snap ring
12. Bearing holder 29. Shims
13. Snap ring 30. Tapered roller
14. Thrust washer bearing
32 15, Snap ring 31. Countershaft
16. Needle bearings & bevel pinion
17. Main drive gear 32. Front housing

Fig. 76Expioded view of pto assembiy used on 235

modeis.
1. Snap ring 25. Clutch gear
2. Bearing (sarr e as 19) 26. Thrust washer
3. Gear (24 teeth) 27. Snap ring
4. Thrust collar 28. Pto front shaft
5. Output shaft 29. Snap ring
rear bearing 30. Bearing (same as 12)
6. Oil seal spacer 31. Snap ring
6A. "O** ring 32. Coupling
7. Inner oil seal 33. Snap ring
8. Outer oil seal
9. Pto output shaft
10, Bearing carrier
11, Snap ring
12, Bearing (same as 30)
13, Thrust washer
14, Pto rear shafl;
15, Slip clutch gear
16, Slip clutch hi.Lb
17, Slip clutch spring
18, Holder
19, Bearing (same as 2)
20, Shims
21, Bearing
22, Engagement liub
23, Snap ring
24, Thrust washer

77
Paragraphs 130-134
130. PTO REAR DRIVE SHAFT. Tb remove the
pto rear shaft (14Fig. 76), first refer to paragraph
131 and remove the output shaft (9) and bearing
holder (10). Withdraw rear shaft (14) out toward rear
until bearing (19) is exposed, then use a suitable
puller to remove bearing. Lift shaft from housing and
remove remaining components.
Inspect components for wear or damage and install
new parts as needed. Apply thread sealer to all screws
installed in through holes.
131. PTO OUTPUT SHAFT. Unbolt and remove
the safety shield and rear bearing holder (10Fig.
TRANSMISSION (CONSTANT MESH)
132. The constant mesh main transmission is
used on 245, 255 and 265 model tractors without
live pto. The constant mesh transmission has three
forward speeds and one reverse speed, and the three-
speed range transmission compounds the total num-
ber of gear reductions to nine forward and three
reverse. Shift patterns of the two levers are shown in
Fig. 77 or Fig. 78. Refer to Fig. 79 for typical cross
section. The front-wheel-drive axle, of models so
equipped, is powered by a mid-pto shaft (77).
INSPECTION
245, 255 and 265 Models
With Constant Mesh Transmission
133. Removal of the main transmission shift cover
with shift rails and forks from top of transmission
Fig. 77-^hift pattern for 245 and 255 modeis with con-
stant mesh transmission is as shown. Range shift iever
(R) position between "LO" and "MED" is neutrai. Pattern
for speed shift iever (S) is shown and pto engagement
iever is iocated at (P).
78
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
76). Remove snap ring (1), whicb holds pto shaft (9)
to bearing (2) and use a soft bammer to drive tbe shaft
from bearing.
Inspect bearings for smooth operation and inspect
all shaft components for wear or damage. Renew
parts as needed.
Seal the rear bearing holder (10) to differential
housing with "Loctite 515" or equivalent when assem-
bling. Use thread sealer on screws retaining holder,
and tighten screws to 24-29 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.)
torque.
housing as outlined in paragraph 136 will permit
visual inspection of most transmission components.
Check to be sure that forks are firmly attached to
shift rails and check condition and operation of de-
tents in rails. Transmission, rear axle center housing
(differential and final drive), rear axles and hydraulic
system share a common sump (oil supply). Check
suction filter screen and drained fluid for evidence of
metal particles. Refer to paragraph 134 for lubrica-
tion requirements.
LUBRICATION
245, 255 and 265 Models
With Constant Mesh Transmission
134. Transmission, rear axle center housing (differ-
ential and final drive), rear axles and hydraulic sys-
tem share a common sump (oil supply). The drain
plugs are located at bottom of transmission. Capacity
Fig. 78Shift pattern for 265 modeis with constant mesh
transmission is as shown. Range shift iever (R) is moved
forward for %0" range; baci( for "MED" and "Hi" range.
Pattern for speed shift iever (S) is shown and pto engage-
ment iever is iocated at (P).
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Fig. 79Cross section typicai of 245, 255 and 265 modeis with constant mesh transmission. Refer to Fig. 81 for iegend.
is approximately 20 L (5.3 gal.) for 245 and 255
models, or 25 L (6.6 gal.) for 265 models. Use "CASE
IH HY-TRAN PLUS" or equivalent fluid for all mod-
els. The hydraulic system suction filter should be
removed, clemmed and reinstalled each time fluid is
changed. The hydraulic system suction filter screen,
which also filters transmission fluid, can be unbolted
and withdra^^^n from suction pipe on left side of trans-
mission housing. Fluid and filter should be serviced
at least every 200 hours of operation.
REMOVE AND REINSTALL
245, 255 and 265 Models
With Constant Mesh Transmission ; graph 115 or paragraph 116 if disc or release bearing
135. Remo\ e the drain plugs and hydraulic system
suction screen, then allow oil to drain from transmis-
sion housing. Place wedges between the front axle
and front sub frame on both sides to prevent tipping
and turn the front wheels to straight ahead. Support,
but do not raise, front axle, engine and clutch housing
by positioning a jack under clutch housing. Support
transmission housing, then remove hydraulic suction
and pressure lines from left side of tractor. If equipped
with four-wh(5el drive, unbolt and remove the front
drive engagement lever from right side of clutch
housing. Remove the front drive shaft. On all models,
detach wires from the safety start switches, rear
lights and any other components which would inter-
fere with removal of the transmission, then position
wires out of the way. Safely support the engine and
clutch housing separately from the transmission. Re-
move screws attaching the transmission housing to
the clutch housing, then carefully separate the two
housings. Malie sure that transmission, center hous-
Paragraphs 135-136
33 26
ing and rear axles are supported securely, remove
fenders, covers, step plates and foot covers, then
disconnect brake control rods being careful not to
damage the pedal return springs. Unbolt transmis-
sion from rear axle center housing, then separate the
two housings.
Remainder of disassembly will depend upon re-
quired service. Be careful when removing the rock-
shaft housing and transmission shift cover, because
both are aluminum and can be easily damaged.
Before reconnecting transmission to clutch hous-
ing, check to be sure that recessed sides of clutch
release bearing are centered on release fork and that
clutch disc is centered. It may be necessary to sepa-
rate clutch housing from engine as outlined in para-
are not correctly positioned. Apply a thin coat of
grease to clutch shaft splines to ease entry. Reinstall
by reversing removal procedure. Apply "Loctite 515"
or equivalent sealer to mating surfaces of clutch
housing, transmission housing and rear axle center
housing. Tighten transmission to clutch housing and
transmission to rear axle center housing retaining
nuts and screws to 55-75 Nm (40-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.
OVERHAUL
245, 255 and 265 Modeis
With Constant Mesh Transmission
136. SHIFTER COVER. Remove screws attach-
ing cover (4Fig. 80) to top of transmission housing
and carefully separate the cover from housing. Be
careful when removing cover, because it can be easily
damaged. Lift cover straight up, away from transmis-
sion housing while closely observing the position of
79
Paragraphs 137-138 CASE/iNTERNATiONAL

lose detent ball and spring (11 and 12). If necessary,

shift lever (2) can be removed after removing knob,
snap ring (15) and spring (14). Slide shift lever out
through bottom of shift cover.
When assembling, note that shift rails (17 and 18)
are not interchangeable. During assembly, position
single detent groove (neutral) of each shift rail (17
and 18) toward center of shift cover. Note that holes
for roll pins are closer together for second and third
shift rail (17). Coat mating surface of cover and trans-
mission housing with "Loctite 515" or equivalent
sealer, make sure that shift forks properly engage
gears, then tighten cover retaining screws to 24-29
N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.) torque. Check to make sure that
gears change properly before completing assembly.

137. INPUT SHAFT AND MAINSHAFT. Refer to

Fig. 80Expioded view of gear shift cover typicai of 245,
255 and 265 modeis with constant mesh transmission,
1. Pto shift plate
2. Shift lever assy.
3. Neutral lock balls
4. Shift cover
5. Oil filler plug
6. Shift pawl (1st & Rev.)
7. Shift fork (1st & Rev.)
8. Shift fork (2nd & 3rd)
9. Shift pawl (2nd & 3rd)
10. Differential housing cover 23. Detent springs
11. Detent springs
12. Detent balls
13. Shift lever pilot ball
14. Spring
paragraph 135 and remove the transmission assem-
bly, then refer to paragraph 136 and remove shifter
cover. Unbolt bearing holder (15Fig. 81), and pry
input shaft (17), holder (15) and related parts forward
as an assembly. Straighten tab of lockwasher (9) and
remove slotted nut (8). Remove bearing holder and
press bearings (14 and 16) from shaft. Remove snap
ring (37) from behind mainshaft rear bearing and
snap ring (19) at front of mainshaft. Use a hammer
and brass drift to bump mainshaft out toward rear,
while removing gears and shift collars.
Clean and inspect all parts for damage or excessive
wear. Check bearings for smooth operation and renew
as needed. Before installing, assemble gears on main-
shaft and use a feeler gauge to measure clearance
between needle bearing race (20) and snap ring (19).
15. Snap ring Select thickness of shim pack (34) necessary to pro-
16. Internal range shift lever
17. Shift rail (2nd & 3rd) vide correct clearance of 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.). Wide
18. Shift rail (1st & Rev.) chamfered sides of shift collars (24 and 30) and cut-
19. "O" rings away of shift hubs (23 and 29) should be toward rear
20. Plugs of transmission. When installing shift collars on shift
21. Retainer screw & washer
22. Detent balls hubs, install the single spaced teeth of shift collar
over slots in hubs. Adjust preload of input shaft
24. Range shift lever assy. bearings by var5dng thickness of shims (13) to provide
25. Snap ring
26. Roll pins input shaft with rolling torque of 0.34-0.45 N.m (3-4
27. Guide plate in.-lbs.) torque when nut (8) is tightened. Lock posi-
tion of nut (8) with washer (9).

the shift rails and forks as they relate to the respec-
tive gears.
Tb disassemble, remove plugs (20) and snap rings
(19) from shift rail bores. Tap out roll pins (26) from
second and third shift rail fork (8) and shift pawl (9).
Move first and reverse gear shift rail (18) into neutral
position, then pull out second and third shift rail (17)
while removing shift fork and pawl. Be careful not to
lose detent ball and spring. Remove plug from side of
cover and remove the five neutral lock balls (3). Tap
roll pins (26) from first and reverse shift fork (7) and
shift pawl (6). Pull first and reverse shift rail (6) out
while removing shift fork and pawl. Be careful not to
138. COUNTERSHAFT. Refer to paragraph 137
and remove the transmission input shaft and main-
shaft. Remove snap ring (50Fig. 81) and shim pack
(49) from rear of transmission. Remove plug (39) from
front of transmission. Use a soft hammer and tap the
countershaft (47) out toward the rear, while removing
gears.
Inspect all gears, shaft and bearings for wear or
damage. Check end play of shaft in bearings by meas-
uring clearance between rear bearing (48) and snap
ring (50) with feeler gauge. Install shim pack (49) of
sufficient thickness to limit end play (measured clear-
ance) to 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.).

80
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 139

139. REVI;RSE IDLER GEAR AND SHAFT.
Refer to paragraph 137 and remove the transmission
input shaft aiid mainshaft. Remove plug (IPFig.
81) from front of transmission housing and drive out
roll pin (2). Unseat snap ring (7) and tap shaft (1) out
toward front, while removing thrust washers (3 and
6), bearings (4), idler gear (5) and snap ring (7).
Inspect components and renew any that are worn
excessively or otherwise damaged.

Fig. 61Exploded view of constant mesh transmission shafts and gears typical of 245, 255 and 265 modeis without iive
pto.
1. Reverse gear shaft 21. Needle bearing 41. Ball bearing
IP. Plug 22. Gear (24 teeth) i 42. Gear (31 teeth) 62. Pto front shaft
2. Roll pin 23. Shift hub ' 43. Gear (27 teeth) 63. Gear (30 teeth)
3. Shim 24. Shift collar (2nd & 3rd) 44. Spacer 64. Needle bearing
4. Needle bearings 25. Gear (26 teeth) 45. Gear (20 teeth) 65. Thrust washer
5. Reverse gear 26. Coupling 46. Spacer 66. Ball bearing
6. Shim 27. Spacer 47. Countershaft 67. Snap ring
7. Snap ring 28. Gear (30 teeth) 48. Ball bearing 68. Thrust washer
8. Slotted nut 29. Shift hub 49. Shims 69. Bearing
9. Lockwasher 30. Shift collar (1st & Rev.) 50. Snap ring 70. Front-wheel-drive gear
10. Oil seal 31. Gear (30 or 36 teeth) 51. Snap ring 71. Thrust washer
11. Bushing 32. Bearing race 52. Plug 72. Snap ring
12. "O" ring 32A. Shim 53. Snap ring 73. Oil seal
13. Shim 33. Mainshaft 54. Ball bearing 74. Snap ring
14. Ball bearing 34. Shims 55. Snap ring 75. Ball bearing
15. Bearing holdcT 35. Snap ring 56. Thrust washer 76. Snap ring
16. Tapered roller bearing 36. Ball bearing . 57. Needle bearing 77. Front wheel assist
17. Input shaft 37. Snap ring 58. Splined hub drive shaft
18. Needle bearifLg 38. Snap ring 59. Gear (24 teeth) 78. Snap ring
19. Snap ring 39. Plug 60. Spht ring 79. Gear (24 teeth)
20. Bearing race 40. Snap ring 61. Pto shift collar 80. Ball bearing

81
Paragraphs 141-145
140. PTO FRONT SHAFT. Refer to paragraph
137 and remove the transmission input shaft, and
mainshaft, then refer to paragraph 138 and remove
the transmission countershaft. Remove plug (52
Fig. 81) and snap ring (53) from front of transmission
housing. On models with front-wheel drive, remove
snap ring (72), washer (71), bearing (69) and front-
wheel drive gear (7). On all models, remove snap ring
(67) from rear of transmission housing. Bump shaft
(62) toward front until bearing (54) is exposed, then
remove bearing. Remove snap ring (55) and thrust
washer (56). Slide gear (59) forward on shaft, then
remove split ring (60). Remove bearing (57) and
splined hub (59) from front of shaft. Bump shaft
forward out of rear bearing (66) and remove remain-
der of shaft components while withdrawing shaft
from front.
Inspect all components for wear or damage and
inspect bearings for smooth rotation. Specified end
play of 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.) can be reduced by
adding shims between snap ring (53) and bearing (54)
if necessary.
141. LOWER (FRONT WHEEL-DRIVE)
SHAFT The front wheel assist drive shaft (77Fig.
79) is located in the lower section of the transmission
housing. Seal (73Fig. 81) can be removed and re-
newed after removing the front drive shaft, without
disassembling the transmission.
SYNCHROMESH TRANSMISSION
(245, 255 AND 265 MODELS)
143. A synchromesh main transmission is used
on 245, 255 and 265 model tractors with live pto.
The synchromesh (speed) transmission has three for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed, and the three-
speed-range transmission compounds the total
number of gear reductions to nine forward and three
reverse. Shift patterns of the two levers is shown in
Fig. 82 or Fig. 83. Refer to Fig. 84 for typical cross
section. The front-wheel-drive axle, of models so
equipped, is powered by a mid-pto shaft.
INSPECTION
245, 255 and 265 Models
With Synchromesh Transmission
144. Removal of the main transmission shift cover
with shift rails and forks from top of transmission
housing as outlined in paragraph 147 will permit
visual inspection of most components of the speed
transmission. Check to be sure that forks are firmly
82
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
To remove the shaft (77), gear (79), bearings (75 and
80) and related parts, first remove the transmission
input shaft and mainshaft as outlined in paragraph
137, the transmission countershaft as outlined in
paragraph 138 and the pto front shaft as outlined in
paragraph 140. Remove front oil seal (73) and snap
ring (74), then bump shaft (77) forward until the front
bearing (75) is out of transmission housing bore. Use
a suitable puller to remove bearing from shaft, then
remove bearing (80), shaft (77) and gear (79).
Inspect gears, shaft and bearings for wear or dam-
age, then renew parts as necessary. "O" ring seal is
located on front-wheel-drive engagement lever shaft.
Always install new front oil seal (73) and "O" ring
when assembling. Assemble in reverse of disassembly
procedure. Apply "Loctite 515" or equivalent sealer to
mating surfaces of transmission and rear axle center
housings. Tighten transmission to rear axle center
housing retaining nuts and screws to 55-75 N.m
(40-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.
142. RANGE TRANSMISSION. The three speed
and reverse (speed) transmission assembly does not
need to be removed to service the three speed range
transmission, which is located in the rear axle center
housing. Refer to paragraph 155 and following for
service procedures to the range transmission.
attached to shift rails and check condition and opera-
tion of detents in rails. Transmission, rear axle center
housing (differential and final drive), rear axles and
hydraulic system share a common sump (oil supply).
Check suction filter screen and drained fluid for evi-
dence of metal particles. Refer to paragraph 145 for
lubrication requirements.
LUBRICATION
245, 255 and 265 Modeis
With Synchromesh Transmission
145. Transmission, rear axle center housing (differ-
ential and final drive), rear axles and hydraulic sys-
tem share a common sump (oil supply). The drain
plugs are located at bottom of transmission. Capacity
is approximately 25 L (6.6 gal.) of "CASE IH HY-
TRAN PLUS" or equivalent fluid for 245,255 and 265
models. The hydraulic system suction filter should be
removed, cleaned and reinstalled each time fluid is
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
Fig. 62Shift pattern for 245 and 255 models with syn-
chromesh transmission is as shown. Range shift iever (R)
position betwei^n "LO'' and "MED" is neutrai. Pattern for
speed shift iev&r (S) is shown and pto engagement iever
is located at (P).
changed. The hydraulic system suction filter screen,
which also filters transmission fiuid, can be unbolted
and withdrawn from suction pipe on left side of trans-
mission housing. Fluid and filter should be serviced
at least every 200 hours of operation.
REMOVE AND REINSTALL
j housing. Remove the front drive shaft. On all models,
245, 255 and 265 Models
With Synchromesh Transmission
146. Remove the drain plugs and hydraulic system
suction screen, then allow oil to drain from transmis-
sion housing. Place wedges between the front axle
Paragraph 146
Fig. 63Shift pattern for 265 modeis with synchromesh
transmission is as shown. Range shift iever (R) is moved
forward for "LO" range; back for "MED" and "Hi" range.
Pattern for speed shift iever (S) is shown and pto engage-
ment iever is iocated at (P).
and front sub frame on both sides to prevent tipping
and turn the front wheels to straight ahead. Support,
but do not raise, front axle, engine and clutch housing
by positioning a jack under clutch housing. Support
transmission housing, then disconnect hydraulic suc-
tion and supply lines from pump, flow divider and live
pto control valve. Remove hydraulic suction and pres-
sure lines from left side of tractor and cover all
openings to prevent the entrance of dirt. If equipped
with four-wheel drive, unbolt and remove the front
drive engagement lever from right side of clutch
detach wires from the safety start switches, rear
lights and any other components which would inter-
fere with removal of the transmission, then position
wires out of the way. Safely support the engine and
clutch housing separately from the transmission. Re-
move screws attaching the transmission housing to
the clutch housing, then carefully separate the two
Fig. 64Cross section typicai of 245,
255 and 265 modeis with synchromesh
transmission.
H. Hydraulic clutch
R. Range transmission input shaft
17. Input shaft
33. Mainshaft
47. Countersheift
62. Pto front shaft
83
Paragraphs 147-148 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
housings. Make sure that transmission, center hous-
ing and rear axles are supported securely, remove
fenders, covers, step plates and foot covers, then
disconnect brake control rods being careful not to
damage the pedal return springs. Unbolt transmis-
sion from rear axle center housing, then separate the
two housings.
Remainder of disassembly will depend upon re-
quired service. Be careful when removing the rock-
shaft housing and transmission shift cover, because
both are aluminum and can be easily damaged.
Before reconnecting transmission to clutch hous-
ing, check to be sure that recessed sides of clutch
release bearing are centered on release fork and that
clutch disc is centered. It may be necessary to sepa-
rate clutch housing from engine as outlined in para-
graph 115 or paragraph 116 if disc or release bearing
are not correctly positioned. Apply a thin coat of
grease to clutch shaft splines to ease entry. Reinstall
by reversing removal procedure. Apply "Loctite 515"
or equivalent sealer to mating surfaces of clutch,
transmission and rear axle center housings. Tighten
transmission to clutch housing and transmission to
rear axle center housing retaining nuts and screws to
55-75 N.m (40-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.

OVERHAUL

245, 255 and 265 Models >r

With Synchromesh Transmission 24

147. SHIFTER COVER. Remove screws attach-

Fig, 85Expioded view of gear shift cover typicai of 245,
ing cover (4Fig. 85) to top of transmission housing 255 and 265 modeis with synchromesh transmission.
and carefully separate the cover from housing. Be 1. Pto shift plate
careful when removing cover, because it can be easily 2. Shift lever assy. 15. Snap ring
damaged. Lift cover straight up, away from transmis- 3. Neutral lock balls 16. Internal range shift lever
sion housing while closely observing the position of 4. Shift cover 17. Shift rail (2nd & 3rd)
5. Oil filler plug 18. Shift rail (1st & Rev.)
the shift rails and forks as they relate to the respec- 6. Shift pawl (1st & Rev.) 19. "O" rings
tive gears. 7. Shift fork (1st & Rev.) 20. Plugs
8. Shift fork (2nd & 3rd) 21. Retainer screw & washer
To disassemble, remove plugs (20) and snap rings 9. Shift pawl (2nd & 3rd) 22. Detent balls
(19) from shift rail bores. Tap out roll pins (26) from 10. Difterential housing cover 23. Detent springs
second and third shift rail fork (8) and shift pawl (9). 11. Detent springs 24. Range shift lever assy.
Move first and reverse gear shift rail (18) into neutral 12. Detent balls 25. Snap ring
13. Shift lever pilot ball 26. Roll pins
position, then pull out second and third shift rail (17) 14. Spring 27. Guide plate
while removing shift fork and pawl. Be careful not to
lose detent ball and spring. Remove plug from side of and 18) toward center of shift cover. Note that holes
cover and remove the five neutral lock balls (3). Tap for roll pins are closer together for second and third
roll pins (26) from first and reverse shift fork (7) and shift rail (17). Coat mating surface of cover and trans-
shift pawl (6). Pull first and reverse shift rail (18) out mission housing with "Loctite 515" or equivalent
while removing shift fork and pawl. Be careful not to sealer, make sure that shift forks properly engage
lose detent ball and spring (11 and 12). If necessary, gears, then tighten cover retaining screws to 30-40
shift lever (2) can be removed after removing knob, Nm (22-29 ft.-lbs.) torque. Check to make sure that
snap ring (15) and spring (14). Slide shift lever out gears change properly before completing assembly.
through bottom of shift cover.
When assembling, note that shift rails (17 and 18) 148. INPUT SHAFT AND MAINSHAFT, Refer to
are not interchangeable. During assembly, position paragraph 146 and remove the transmission assem-
single detent groove (neutral) of each shift rail (17 bly, then slide pto hydraulic clutch assembly from

84
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 148 (Cont.)

g, 86Expioded view of synchromesh transmission shafts and gears typicai of 245, 255 and 265 modeis with iive pto.
1. Reverse gear ishaft 67. Snap ring
IP. Plug 23. Shift hub 44. Spacer 68. Spring
2. Roll pin 24. Shift collar (2nd & 3rd) 45. Gear (20 teeth) 69. Clutch
3. Shim 25. Gear (26 teeth) 46. Spacer 70. Snap ring
4. Needle bearings 26. Coupling 47. Countershaft 71. Flat washer
5. Reverse gear 27. Spacer 48. Ball bearing 72. Needle bearing
6. Shim 28. Gear (30 teeth) 49. Shims 73. Oil seal
7. Snap ring 29. Shift hub 50. Snap ring 74. Snap ring
8. Slotted nut 30. Shift collar (1st & Rev.) 52. Plug 75. Ball bearing
9. Lockwasher 31. Gear (30 or 36 teeth) 53. Snap ring 76. Sn^p ring
10. Oil seal 32. Bearing race 54. Ball bearing 77. Front-wheel assist
11. Bushing 32A. Shim 55. Snap ring drive shaft
12. "O" ring 33. Mainshaft j 56. Thrust washer 78. Snap ring
13. Shim 34. Shims ! 57. Needle bearing 79. Gear (24 teeth)
14. Ball bearing 35. Snap ring 58. Splined hub 80. Ball bearing
15. Bearing holder 36. Ball bearing 59. Gear (24 teeth) 81. S3nichronizer ring
16. Tapered rollei* bearing 37. Snap ring ; 60. Split ring 82. Retaining ring
17. Input shaft 38. Snap ring : 61. Pto shift collar 83. Synchronizer key
18. Needle bearing 39. Plug I 62. Pto front shaft 84. Synchronizer ring
19. Snap ring 40. Snap ring 63. Gear (30 teeth) 85. Synchronizer ring
20. Bearing race 41. Ballbearing 64. Needle bearing 86. Retaining ring
21. Needle bearing 42. Gear (31 teeth) 65. Thrust washer 87. Synchronizer key
22. Gear (24 teeth) 43. Gear (27 teeth) 66. Ball bearing 88. Synchronizer ring

rear. Refer to paragraph 147 and remove shifter
cover. Unbolt bearing holder (15Fig. 86), and pry
input shaft (17), holder (15) and related parts forward
as an assembly. Straighten tab of lockwasher (9) and
remove slotted nut (8). Remove bearing holder and
press bearings (14 and 16) from shaft. Remove snap
ring (37) from behind mainshaft rear bearing and
snap ring (19) from front of mainshaft. Use a hammer
and brass drift to bump mainshaft out toward rear,
while removing gears and shift collars.
Clean and inspect all parts for damage or excessive
wear. Check bearings for smooth operation and renew
as needed. Before installing, assemble gears on main-
shaft and use a feeler gauge to measure clearance

85
 Paragraphs 149-153
between needle bearing race (20) and snap ring (19).
Select thickness of shim pack (34) necessary to pro-
vide correct clearance of 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.). Wide
chamfered sides of shift collars (24 and 30) and cut-
away of shift hubs (23 and 29) should be toward rear
of transmission. When installing shift collars on shift
hubs, install the single spaced teeth of shift collar
over slots in hubs. Adjust preload of input shaft
bearings by varying thickness of shims (13) to provide
input shaft with rolling torque of 0.34-0.45 N.m (3-4
in.-lbs.) torque when nut (8) is tightened. Lock posi-
tion of nut (8) with washer (9).
End play of hydraulic clutch assembly should be
checked and adjusted before joining the speed trans-
mission and rear axle center housings together. Refer
to paragraph 154.
149. COUNTERSHAFT. Refer to paragraph 148
and remove the transmission input shaft and main-
shaft. Remove snap ring (50Fig. 86) and shim pack
(49) from rear of transmission. Remove plug (39) from
front of transmission. Use a soft hammer and tap the
countershaft (47) out toward the rear, while removing
gears.
Inspect all gears, shaft and bearings for wear or
damage. Check end play of shaft in bearings by meas-
uring clearance between rear bearing (48) and snap
ring (50) with feeler gauge. Install shim pack (49) of
sufficient thickness to limit end play (measured clear-
ance) to 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.).
150. REVERSE IDLER GEAR AND SHAFT.
Refer to paragraph 148 and remove the transmission
input shaft and mainshaft. Remove plug (IPFig.
86) from front of transmission housing and drive out
roll pin (2). Unseat snap ring (7) and tap shaft (1) out
toward front, while removing thrust washers (3 and
6), bearings (4), idler gear (5) and snap ring (7).
Inspect components and renew any that are worn
excessively or otherwise damaged.
151. PTO FRONT SHAFT. Refer to paragraph
148 and remove the transmission input shaft and
mainshaft, then refer to paragraph 149 and remove
the transmission countershaft. Remove plug (52
Fig. 81) and snap ring (53) from front of transmission
housing. Remove snap ring (67) from rear of trans-
mission housing. Bump shaft (62) toward front until
bearing (54) is exposed, then remove bearing. Remove
snap ring (55) and thrust washer (56). Slide gear (59)
forward on shaft, then remove split ring (60). Remove
bearing (57) and splined hub (59) from front of shaft.
Bump shaft forward out of rear bearing (66) and
remove remainder of shaft components while with-
drawing shaft from front.
Inspect all components for wear or damage and
inspect bearings for smooth rotation. Specified end
play of 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.) can be reduced by
adding shims between snap ring (53) and bearing (54)
if necessary.
86
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
152. LOWER (FRONT-WHEEL-DRIVE)
SHAFT. The front wheel assist drive shaft (77Fig.
86) is located in the lower section of the transmission
housing. Seal (73) can be removed and renewed after
removing the front drive shaft, without disassem-
bling the transmission.
To remove the shaft (77), gear (79), bearings (75 and
80) and related parts, first remove the transmission
input shaft and mainshaft as outlined in paragraph
148, the transmission countershaft as outlined in
paragraph 149 and the pto front shaft as outlined in
paragraph 151. Remove front oil seal (73) and snap
ring (74), then bump shaft (77) forward until the front
bearing (75) is out of transmission housing bore. Use
a suitable puller to remove bearing from shaft, then
remove bearing (80), shaft (77) and gear (79).
Inspect gears, shaft and bearings for wear or dam-
age, then renew parts as necessary. "O" ring seal is
located on front-wheel-drive engagement lever shaft.
Always install new front oil seal (73) and "O" ring
when assembling. Assemble in reverse of disassembly
procedure. Apply "Loctite 515" or equivalent sealer to
^ mating surfaces of transmission and rear axle center
housings. Tighten transmission to rear axle center
housing retaining nuts and screws to 55-75 N.m
(40-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.
153. HYDRAULIC CLUTCH. The hydraulic
clutch (HFig. 84) located in the rear compartment
of the transmission housing interrupts power fiow
between the speed transmission mainshaft (33) and
the range transmission input shaft (R). The hydraulic
clutch can be disengaged, stopping drive to the drive
wheels, but still powering the live pto output shaft.
Separate between the rear of transmission housing
and front of rear axle center housing, using para-
graph 146 as a guide, then slide pto hydraulic clutch
assembly from rear.
To disassemble, the clutch must first be pressur-
ized to compress the Belleville springs (22Fig. 87).
Refer to Fig. 88 for using (CAS-1977) hydraulic clutch
test and service fixture to compress the springs so
that snap ring (6) can be removed. Oil pressure to the
fixture should be within the range of 3930-4895 kPa
(570-710 psi). Remove shims (7Fig. 89), backing
plate (8), wave washer (9), clutch discs (10,11 and 14)
and steel plates (12 and 13). Remove the two sealing
rings (26), then clamp the clutch assembly in arbor
press as shown in Fig. 90 and remove snap ring (25).
Release press and remove Belleville spring assembly
(20-23Fig. 89). Remove clutch piston (18) and seal-
ing rings (17 and 19) from clutch hub.
Inspect and renew all parts which are worn or
damaged. Make sure parts are absolutely clean and
lubricated, then install new seals when assembling.
Install and lubricate seal rings (17 and 19) in
grooves of hub (15), then install piston (18). Coat
Belleville springs (20 and 22), spacers (21) and center
support (23) with grease containing molydisulfide
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
11 2H22
21^22
Fig. 87^Cross section ofhydrauiic dutch which provides
iive pto. The dutch is iocated between speed transmis-
sion and range transmission as shown at (HFig. 84),
12. Steel plates w/rubber
5. Thrust washer projections (4 used)
6. Snap ring 13. Steel plates (4 used)
11. Friction discs 21. Spacers
(9 used) 22. Belleville springs
before assembling. Install first Belleville springs (22)
in center support (23) with concave side toward cen-
ter. Install spacer (21) between Belleville springs.
Install last four Belleville springs (20) with concave
side toward inside and with spacers between
Belleville springs, then install spring assembly over
hub (15). Install spring support (24) with small di-
ameter toward inside. Compress springs in a press
(Fig. 90), then install snap ring (25). Install the two
new seal rings (26Fig. 89), then assemble clutch
discs and plates (9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14). Install
internal splined metal disc (14), followed by the nine
internal lined discs (11), four steel plates with rubber
projections (12) and four steel plates (13) as shown in
Fig. 89. The rubber projections should be in the same
row of tabs on all disks (12) and should be on each
side of steel plates (13) so that steel plates will sepa-
rate properly \vrhen clutch is disengaged. Install last
lined disc (11) followed by steel disc (10), wave washer
(9) and back plate (8). Chamfered outer edge of back
plate should l)e toward outside (away from wave
washer).
Attach clutch hub to test fixture as shown in Fig.
88 and pressui^ize clutch to disengage clutch. Install
snap ring (6), then measure gap between snap ring
(6) and back plate (8) with hydraulic test pressure
forcing clutch to disengage. Correct gap is 3.5-3.6 mm
Paragraph 154
F H
Fig. 88View of hydrauiic dutch padi (H) mounted on
pressurizing fixture (F), so that snap ring (6) can be re-
moved. Springs engage dutch and dutch must be pres-
surized to reiease.
(0.138-0.142 in.). Remove snap ring (6) and add suf-
ficient thickness of shims (7Fig. 89) to provide
correct gap between snap ring and back plate. Rein-
stall snap ring and install clutch drum (4) over tabs
of steel plates (12 and 13). Use special alignment tool
(CAS-1976 or equivalent) to center clutch drum, then
slowly reduce hydraulic pressure to zero. The align-
ment tool and clutch drum can be removed and pres-
sure of Belleville springs will hold clutch discs and
steel plates in alignment. Reinstall clutch drum (4),
washer (5) and clutch assembly on transmission
mainshaft (33), then refer to the following paragraph
for selecting proper thickness of shims (1).
154. Selection of shims (1Fig. 89) requires meas-
urements as described in the following paragraphs.
Installation of correct thickness shims is important
for positioning of the hydraulic clutch and should be
measured and calculated whenever clutch is removed
for service.
Refer to Fig. 91 and measure the following dis-
tances. Carefully measure distance (A) between dif-
ferential housing and front face of bearing holder.
Measure depth (B) of ball bearing from front face of
bearing holder. Subtract the measured distance (B)
from distance (A) to calculate the position of bearing
in relation to front face of rear axle center housing,
shown as (C).
Measure distance from rear face of transmission
housing to rear ofhydrauiic clutch at both top (D) and
bottom (E). Average these measurements by adding
measured distance (D and E), then dividing by 2.
Subtract the average of distances (D and E) from
calculated distance (C) to determine end play of
clutch. Remove the clutch and drum assembly and
87
 Paragraphs 155-157 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Fig. 89Expioded view of hydrauiic clutch iocated
between speed transmission and range transmission.
Sealing rings (17 & 19) may be square cut "O" rings.
Mainshaft (33) is aiso shown in Fig. 86.
1. Shims 19. Sealing ring
2. Pilot bearing 20. Belleville springs
3. Snap ring 21. Spacers
4. Clutch drum 22. Belleville springs
5. Thrust washer 23. Spring center support
6. Snap ring 24. Spring guide
7. Shims 25. Snap ring
8. Back plate 26. Sealing rings
9. Wave spring 33. Mainshaft
10. Disc 34. Shims
11. Friction discs (9 used) 35. Snap ring
12. Steel plates w/rubber 36. Ball bearing
projections (4 used) 37. Snap ring
13. Steel plates (4 used) 38. Snap ring
14. Disc 11
15. Clutch hub
16. Plug
17. Sealing ring
18. Piston

add sufficient thickness of shims (1Fig. 89 and Fig.

91) to reduce end play to 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.).

RANGE TRANSMISSION

245, 255 And 265 Models

155. The three speed range transmission is located

in the rear axle center housing. It is not necessary to
remove the three speed and reverse transmission
assembly to service the range transmission, but the
range transmission countershaft is also the final
drive differential pinion.

156. R&R AND OVERHAUL. It is not necessary

to remove the three speed and reverse transmission
to service the range transmission, but paragraph 146
can be used to separate between the transmission
housing and the rear axle center housing. The sliding
gear and low range driven gear are located on the
differential bevel pinion shaft.
157. TOP SHAFT Unbolt and remove the differen-
tial housing cover (10Fig. 85) and lift arm (rock-
shaft) housing from rear axle center housing. Remove
both final drive housings as outlined in paragraph
187 or 189, then unbolt and remove both differential
bearing carrier housings. Remove the differential
assembly making sure that adjustment shims located
Fig. 90Arbor press can be used as shown to compress
Beiieviiie springs enough to remove snap ring (25).
under bearing carrier housings are not lost, damaged
or mixed with those from the other side. On models
without live pto, remove coupler (2Fig. 92), re-
tainer plate (1), and snap ring (3). On models with
live pto, unbolt and remove bearing holder (29Fig.
93), oil seal (28), snap ring (3) and bearing (4).
On all models, remove rear bearing snap ring (12
Fig. 92 or Fig. 93) and shims (11). Wedge between

88
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 157 (Cont.)

1 5

Fig. 91Cross-sectional view of

hydraulic clutch and range trans-
mission bearing holder, showing
measurements necessary for se-
lecting thickness of shims (1). Re-
fer to text for procedure.

Fig. 92Exploded view of range trans-

mission used on 245,255 and 265 mod-
els without live pto. Refer to Fig. 79 for
cross section.
1. Retainer plate 15. Bearing holder
2. Coupling 16. Sliding gear
3. Snap ring 17. Snap ring
4. Ball bearing 18. Thrust washer
5. Gear 19. Needle bearing race
6. Spacer 20. Needle bearing
7. Gear 21. Gear
8. Snap ring 22. Thrust washer
9. Mainshaft 23. Snap ring
10. Ball bearing 24. Snap ring
11. Shims 25. Tapered roller
12. Snap ring bearing
13. Snap ring 26. Shims (mesh
14. Tapered roller position)
bearing 27. Differential pinion

Fig. 93Exploded view of range

transmission used on 245, 255 and
265 modeis with iive pto. Refer to
Fig. 92 for iegend except the foiiow-
ing.
28. Oil seal
27 29. Bearing holder
30. "O" ring

20
19

back of gear (7) and rear wall of center housing, then
bump shaft (9] out toward rear. After shaft has moved
to rear slightly, unseat snap ring (8) so that it will
slide along shsLft as shaft is withdrawn. Remove parts
(5 through 8).
Inspect parts for excessive wear or damage and
renew as needed. Rear bearing (10) can be pressed
from shaft if renewal is required.
Install bearing (10) on shaft and secure with snap
ring (13). Slide shaft (9) into housing while parts (5
through 8) are installed on shaft. Chamfered side of
gear (5) should be toward rear. Install snap ring (12)
in groove, then bump front bearing (4) onto shaft until
seated.
On models with live pto, install seal (28Fig. 93)
flush with bearing holder (29) with lip toward rear.

89
 Paragraphs 158-161
Use petroleum jelly to lubricate lip of seal (28) and to
stick new "O" rings (30) into recessed grooves of
bearing holder (29). Install bearing holder (29) using
the proper retaining screws. On models without live
pto, install retaining plate (1Fig. 92). On all mod-
els, measure mainshaft end play, then add sufficient
shims (11Fig, 92 or Fig. 93) to limit end play to 0-0.2
mm (0-0.008 in.).
158. LOWER SHAFT. Refer to paragraph 157 and
remove the range transmission top shaft and gears.
Bend tab of lockwasher from nut at front of bevel
pinion (lower) shaft, then remove the nut and lock-
washer. Remove front wheel drive gear from lower
shaft of models with four-wheel drive. Remove snap
ring (17Fig. 92 or Fig. 93) from groove and shde
toward front of shaft. Bump shaft (27) out toward rear
while removing gears.
Inspect bearings for smooth operation and renew if
damaged. Needle bearing race (19), thrust washer
(22) and bearing cone (25) must be pressed from shaft
if renewal is required or if thickness of shims (26)
must be changed. Shims (26) control bevel pinion
(mesh) position.
If new lower shaft (27) and/or bearing (25) is in-
stalled or if mesh position of the bevel pinion is
questioned, check differential pinion depth (mesh
position) as follows, while assembling. Press cone for
rear bearing (25) onto shaft and cup into housing
bore. Install shaft and rear bearing in housing and
install front bearing (14) without gears or spacers (17
TRANSMISSION (275 MODEL)
160. A fully synchromesh main transmission is
used on 275 model tractors. The synchromesh (speed)
transmission has three forward speeds and one re-
verse speed, and the three-speed range transmission
compounds the total number of gear reductions to
nine forward and three reverse. Shift patterns of the
two levers are shown in Fig. 94. Refer to Fig. 95 for
cross section of speed transmission. The front-wheel-
drive axle, of models so equipped, is powered by a
mid-pto shaft.
INSPECTION
275 Model
161. Removal of the main transmission shift cover
from top of transmission housing as outlined in para-
graph 166 will permit limited visual inspection of
most components of the speed transmission. Check to
be sure that forks are firmly attached and move freely
to engage gears. Check condition and operation of
90
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
through 23). Install front-wheel drive gear (if so
equipped) and nut on front of shaft and tighten nut
sufficiently to remove end play from bearings. If
special tool (CAS-1978) is available, install tool
across carrier bearing bores and measure clearance
between tool bar and end of bevel pinion. Clearance
should be 1.93-2.05 mm (0.076-0.080 in.) and can be
changed by adding or removing shims (26). If special
tool is not available, temporarily install the differen-
tial assembly using shims originally installed under
carrier bearings. Coat bevel gears with suitable
marking media and check mesh position. Pinion
should contact ring gear in center of teeth. Adding
shims (26) moves bevel pinion deeper into differential
ring gear. Backlash should be 0.1-0.3 mm (0.004-
0.012 in.) and is changed by moving shims from under
one carrier bearing housing to under housing on
opposite side. Be sure to keep carrier bearing hous-
ings and selected shims for each side separate to
facilitate final assembly.
Assemble in reverse of disassembly procedure.
Tighten pinion shaft bearing adjusting nut until roll-
ing torque of shaft is 0.68-0.78 N.m (6-7 in.-lbs.).
159. Remainder of assembly procedure is reverse
of disassembly. Apply "Loctite 515" or equivalent
sealer to mating surfaces of transmission and rear
axle center housings. Tighten transmission to rear
axle center housing retaining nuts and screws to
55-75 N.m (40-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.
detents in rails. Be careful not to damage detent
springs when reinstalling shift cover. Drain oil from
the speed transmission by removing drain plug lo-
Fig. 94Shift pattern for 275 modeis is as shown. Range
shift iever position "N" between iow-range (L) and mid-
range (M) is neutraL Pattern for speed shift iever (S) is
shown and pto engagement iever is iocated at (P),
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
cated on right side, then check drained fluid for
evidence of mental particles. Refer to paragraph 162
for lubrication requirements.
Removal of the rockshaft housing as outlined in
paragraph 214 will permit visual inspection of the
range transmission components. Drain oil from the
range transmission by removing drain plugs from the
torque tube (pto clutch housing) and the rear axle
(range transn:Lission) center housing. A third drain
plug is located on front-wheel-drive gearbox of models
so equipped. Oil in these housings is shared by the
pto clutch, rfinge transmission, front-wheel-drive
gearbox and i:he hydraulic system. Check suction
filter screen and drained fluid for evidence of metal
or other foreign particles. Refer to paragraph 162 for
lubrication reciuirements.
LUBRICATION
275 Model
162. The speed transmission, contains 6.5 L (6.9
qts.) of "CASE IH HY-TRAN PLUS" or equivalent
fluid. The range transmission, rear axle housing and
hydraulic system share a common sump (oil supply),
which contains 19 L (20 qts.) of "CASE IH HY-TRAN
PLUS" or equ:Lvalent fluid. Fluids and filters should
be serviced at least every 200 hours of operation.
Drain oil from the speed transmission by removing
drain plug located on right side. Drain oil from the
range transmission by removing drain plugs from the
torque tube (pto clutch housing) and the rear axle
(range transmission) center housing. A third drain
plug is located on front-wheel-drive gearbox of models
so equipped. C!heck suction filter screen and drained
Paragraphs 162-163
Fig. 95Cross section typicai of 275
modeis with synchromesh transmis-
sion.
27. Counter (top) shaft
37. Main (input) shaft
59. Pto counter shaft
75. Reverse idler shaft
fluid for evidence of metal or other foreign particles,
which would indicate wear. Fill the two compart-
ments through flUer openings on top covers. It should
be noted that some oil may cling to parts and will not
be drained when changing oil, so be sure to check oil
level with dipstick when filling.
REMOVE AND REINSTALL
275 Model
163. SPEED TRANSMISSION. To remove the
speed transmission, first drain fluid, then separate
between the engine and transmission (clutch) hous-
ing as outlined in paragraph 117. Drain fluid from
torque tube (pto clutch housing) and range transmis-
sion (rear axle center) housing. Support rear of trac-
tor so that rear wheels clear the ground and assembly
is stable. Remove rear wheels, then detach wiring
harness from fender and center cover. Remove fend-
ers and seat assembly. Separate hydraulic control
lever guide from center cover (between fenders), then
remove the center cover. Remove knobs from shift
levers, then unbolt and remove side platform cover,
front cover and step plates. Release return springs
from brake and clutch pedals, then remove control
rods. Detach wiring harness from left side of tractor
and move wires out of the way. Disconnect then
remove hydraulic pump suction pipe and hydraulic
pressure tube. Remove fuel tank and clutch housing
cover. Support speed transmission and center hous-
ing so that they can be safely separated. Unbolt
steering gear assembly from transmission housing.
Remove retaining screws, then separate transmis-
sion from torque tube (center housing). Be sure that
91
 Paragraph 164 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 96Expioded view of shift cover, raiis, forlcs

and associated parts.
D. Dipstick 10. Pto switch pin
R Fill plug 11. Clutch release lever
P. Pto shifter 12. Pin
S. Speed transmission 13. Throw out fork
lever 14. Release hub
V. Vent 15. Bushings
1. Snap ring 16. Clutch release bearing
2. Spring 17. Pto select knob
3. Roll pin 18. Stop plate
4. Ball 19. Stop bracket
5. Shift cover 20. Collar
6. Rail, fork & gate 21. "0** rings (16 mm)
(Rev & 1st) 22. Inner arm
7. Interlock pin 23. Return spring
8. Rail, fork & gate 24. Detent balls & springs
(2nd & 3rd) 25. Transmission housing
9. Rail, fork & gate 26. Plug
(Low/High pto) 27. Dowel pin

1615

housings are level and be careful not to lose shims or
liners which may be located at ends.
Reassemble by reversing the removal procedure.
Make certain that all couplings are on shafts before
joining and observe the following. Coat mating sur-
faces between speed transmission and torque tube,
and surfaces between engine and transmission
(clutch) housing with a light coat of "Loctite 515" or
equivalent sealer. Tighten screws which attach speed
transmission to torque tube to 118-132 Nm (87-97
ft.-lbs.) torque. When rejoining engine and clutch
housing, it may be necessary to tum crankshaft
slightly to align splines of clutch disc with splines of
clutch shaft. Make sure that mating surfaces of clutch
housing and engine are together before tightening
screws. Do not attempt to draw engine and clutch
housing together by tightening screws. Tighten
screws attaching engine to clutch (speed transmis-
sion) housing to 54-64 N-m (40-47 ft.-lbs.) torque.
When tightening hydraulic lines, tighten pressure
and pump inlet lines to 3.9-6.9 N.m (35-61 in.-lbs.)
torque and union bolt to 39-44 N.m (29-32 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Adjust clutch linkage as outlined in para-
graph 112. Refer to paragraph 90 for bleeding the fuel
system.
164. TORQUE TUBE. On models with live pto, a
hydraulic clutch is located in the torque tube (center
housing). The clutch can be disengaged, interrupting
power flow between the speed transmission main-
shaft and the range transmission input shaft. Disen-

92
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
gaging the hyd raulic clutch will stop drive to the drive
wheels, but will still power the live pto output shaft.
To remove the torque tube (center housing), first
refer to paragi aph 163 and separate the speed trans-
mission from front of torque tube. Unbolt and remove
torque tube from rear axle center housing. The pto
clutch, if so equipped, is located in the forward section
of the torque tube.
Make sure that all couplings and end play adjust-
ing shims are in place when assembling. Apply a ring
of "Three Bond #1215" or equivalent sealer around
outer edge of torque tube rear mounting flange before
attaching. Tighten the six retaining screws to 118-
132 N.m (87-97 ft.-lbs.) torque and the two retaining
nuts to 93-103 N.m (69-76 ft.-lbs.) torque. Refer to
paragraph 168 for remainder of assembly.
165. RANGE TRANSMISSION. The range trans-
mission is contained in the forward compartment of
the rear axle center housing. This housing also con-
tains the difftsrential assembly. Refer to paragraph
163 for separaiting the speed transmission from the
torque tube and to paragraph 164 for separating
torque tube from rear axle center housing. Refer to
paragraph 214 for removing the rockshaft housing,
paragraph 19 !L for removing the rear axle and flnal
drive housings and to paragraph 186 for removing the
differential assembly. Refer to paragraph 170 for
overhaul of the range transmission assembly. \ springs (24) in bores, apply a ring of "Three Bond
OVERHAUL
275 Model
166. SHIFl^R COVER, RAILS AND FORKS.
The shifter cover can be removed without separating
Paragraphs 165-166
Fig, 97^Cross section of shift cover
and reiated parts. Refer to Fig. 96 for
iegend. Spiit in roiipins (R) shouid be
toward front as shown. Gap (G) be-
tween gates shouid be straight and
even.
the tractor, but the steering gear and fuel tank both
mount on the cover and must be removed. Refer to
paragraph 50 for removing the manual steering gear
or paragraph 60 for removing the power steering gear.
Be careful not to lose or damage detent balls and
springs (24Fig. 96). Remove detent balls and
springs before removing shift rails. Be sure that no
parts fall inside the opened transmission when
cover is removed.
To remove shift rails, forks and gates (6, 8 and 9),
remove plugs (26) from rear of housing and roll pins
from gates and rails, then push rails out toward rear.
Interlock pin (7) is located in bore between rails to
permit moving only one of the rails from center (neu-
tral) at a time. The transmission mainshaft must be
removed before removing the pto shift fork (9).
Detent spring exerts 7.5-8.1 kg (15.7-17.9 lbs.)
when compressed to a height of 18.5 mm (0.73 in.)
when new. Install new detent spring if pressure is less
than 5.5 kg (12.1 lbs.) when compressed to 18.8 mm
(0.74 in.). Shift rails should be straight within 0.05
mm (0.002 in.). Shift forks should be 4.5 mm (0.177
in.) thick and should have 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.025
in.) side clearance in groove.
When assembling, make sure that split in roll pins
face toward front (Fig. 97). Position detent balls and
#1215" or equivalent sealer around outer edge of
housing opening and carefully lower cover onto trans-
mission housing. Make sure that shift levers (S and
PFig. 96) enter shift gates and that detent springs
remain in position, then install retaining screws,
tightening to 30-39 N.m (22-29 ft.-lbs.) torque. Make
sure that transmission gears and pto all engage prop-
93
Paragraph 167 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
erly before completing assembly. Coat plugs (26) with pull counter shaft (27) out toward rear. Remove gears,
sealer before installing. hubs, bearings, synchronizers and collars (4 through
26) out as the shaft is withdrawn. Unless renewal is
167. UPPER (COUNTER) SHAFT AND RE- required, do not disassemble parts (8, 9,10 and 11) of
VERSE IDLER. Refer to paragraph 163 and remove reverse/first synchronizer assembly and parts (18,19,
the transmission assembly. Remove rubber caps (1 20 and 21) of second/third S5nichronizer assembly.
and 31Fig. 98), snap ring (30) and shims (29), then Bearing (3) can be removed from bore if renewal is

.:>vt
'' "iV.^..-''' 1
.^iP-^- I

"' ":"'^v'"'"'i>'
24
23
. - \

22
'
""^;v:'^>-
" * \ " - ' " ' ' A V ^ \ ' I

20
21

70
69
68

.10

Fig. 98Expioded view of speed transmission used on 275 modei. Cross section is shown in Fig. 95.
1. Rubber plug
2. Snap ring (66 mm)
3. Ball bearing
4. Retainer
5. Needle bearing (same as
14 & 24)
6. Reverse gear (24 teeth)
7. Synchronizer ring
8. Spring rings
9. Shift hub (Rev. & 1st)
10. Synchronizer key
11. Synchronizer collar
12. Synchronizer ring
13. First gear (43 teeth)
14. Needle bearings (same as
5&24)
15. Retainer
16. Second gear (40 teeth)
17. Synchronizer ring
18. Spring rings
19. Shift hub (2nd & 3rd)
20. Synchronizer key
21. Synchronizer collar
22. Synchronizer ring 41. Idler gear (28 teeth) 61. Output gear (26 teeth)
23. Third gear (36 teeth) 42. Tapered roller bearing 62. Needle bearing
24. Needle bearing (same as (same as 36) 63. Collar
5& 14) 43. Shims 64. Ball bearing
25. Bearing retainer 44. "0" ring (20 mm) 65. "0" ring (45 mm)
26. Drive gear (27 teeth) 45. Spacer 66. Collar (58 mm)
27. Counter (top) shaft 46. Rubber cap 67. Shims
28. Ball bearing 47. Snap ring (same as 2) 68. Oil seal
29. Shims 48. Ball bearing 69. Grooved collar
30. Snap ring (same as 2) 49. Retainer (85 mm)
31. Rubber cap 50. Needle bearing 70. "0" ring (80 mm)
32. Snap ring (same as 2) 51. Pto gear (low-48 teeth) 71. Snap ring (41 mm)
33. "0" ring (56 mm) 52. Collars (18 mm) 72. Snap ring
34. Seal retainer 53. Shift hub 73. Oil seal
35. Oil seal 54. Pto shift collar 74. "0** ring
36. Tapered roller bearing 55. Pto gear (high-40 teeth) 75. Reverse idler shaft
(same as 42) 56. Needle bearing 76. Grooved thrust washer
37. Main (input) shaft 57. Bearing retainer 77. Needle bearing
38. Drive gear (2nd & 3rd) 58. Collar (67 mm) 78. Reverse idler gear
39. Snap ring (same as 2) 59. Pto counter shaft 79. Collar
40. Bearing 60. Needle thrust bearing 80. Roll pins

94
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
S synchronizer ring (7) onto gear (6), then position
X
FRONT
Fig. 99Assembie synchronizers (8-11 & 18-21Fig. 98)
with step (S) in hub and iarger chamfer (C) of coiiar toward
rear as shown.
Fig. 100Assombie spring rings (8 & 18Fig. 98) as
shown. Openings of spring ring shouid be in different
iocations for front and rear of synchronizer.
required. RefE^r to the following paragraphs for fur-
ther disassembly. , collar (34) against snap ring (32). Install cup for rear
Reverse idler assembly (74 through 80) can be
removed after removing counter shaft. Drive pins (80)
from shaft, ptdl shaft (75) toward rear, then remove
gear (78), thrust washer (76) and bearing (77).
When assembling reverse idler, grooved end of col-
lar (79) should be toward gear (78). Lubricate "O" ring
(74) with grease before inserting into housing bore.
Install snap ring (2) and bearing (3) in front bore of
housing. Preassemble sjmchronizer assemblies (8-11
and 18-21) bcjfore beginning to assemble parts on
shafl. Assemhde synchronizer collars (11 and 21) on
hubs (8,9 and 19) with the step (SFig. 99) and larger
chamfer (C) toward same side and assemble with
both toward n^ar. Install spring rings (8 and 18Fig.
98) as shown in Fig. 100. Opening of the spring rings
should be at different locations as shown. Begin in-
serting shaft (27Fig. 98) through rear opening,
then install gear and bearings (23 through 26) over
shaft. Positioii synchronizer ring (22) onto cone of
gear (23) and install synchronizer assembly (18-21).
Position synclironizer ring (17) on cone of gear (16),
Paragraphs 168-169
then install gear, synchronizer ring, bearings (14) and
retainer (15) on shaft (27). Install gear (13) on bear-
ing, position synchronizer ring (12) on cone of gear
and install synchronizer assembly (8-11). Insert nee-
dle bearing (5) and retainer (4) into gear (6) and
assembly and insert shaft (27) through gear and
retainer (4). Install rear bearing (28) and sufficient
thickness of shims (29) to limit shaft end play to less
than 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) when snap ring (30) is
installed. Check each gear change position for proper
operation before completing assembly. Apply sealer to
caps (1 and 31), then drive caps into position. Refer
to paragraph 166 for installation of shift forks, rails
and shift cover assembly.
168. INPUT (MAIN) SHAFT. The upper shaft
must first be removed as outlined in paragraph 167.
Remove spacer (45Fig. 98) and shims (43) from
rear, remove snap ring (32) from front, then pull shaft
(37) forward until oil seal and retainer (34 and 35)
can be removed. Withdraw shaft (37) from front while
removing parts (38 through 41) through top. Refer to
the following paragraphs for further disassembly.
When installing, press inner race and bearing cone
(36) onto input shaft (37). Insert shaft through bore
in front of housing while installing drive gear (38) and
idler gear assembly (39, 40 and 41). On some models,
a thrust washer is located between gear (41) and
inner race of bearing (42). On all models, install outer
race of front bearing (36). Assemble oil seal (35) and
"O" ring (33) to collar (34), lubricate seal and "O" ring,
then install in front bore. Install snap ring (32) with
sharp edge of snap ring toward front, then bump shaft
assembly toward front to seat cup of bearing (36) and
bearing (42) and bump cup forward to remove end
play from shaft and bearings. Install spacer (45), but
do not install "O" ring (44) yet, press spacer against
bearing cup and measure distance between end of
spacer and rear surface of housing. The measured gap
should be equal to the shaft end play. Remove the
temporarily installed spacer, install sufficient thick-
ness of shims (43) to remove all end play plus addi-
tional shim thickness to provide slight preload to
bearings. When assembled, torque housing should
press spacer (45) flush with back of housing and input
shaft should require 0.10-0.68 N.m (1-6 in.-lbs.)
torque to turn. After correct thickness of shims (43)
have been selected, remove spacer (45), install and
lubricate oil "O" ring (44), then install the spacer and
"O" ring assembly. Check gears and shaft fbr proper
operation before completing assembly. Refer to para-
graph 167 for installing the transmission top shaft.
169. PTO FRONT SHAFT. Refer to paragraph
167 and remove the transmission upper (counter)
shaft, then refer to paragraph 168 and remove the
95
 Paragraph 170
transmission input (main) shaft. Remove rubber cap
(46Fig. 98) and snap ring (47) from front of trans-
mission housing, then pull shaft (59) and bearing (48)
forward. Remove gears, shifter hub, shifter collar,
bearings and retainers (49 through 63) as shaft is
withdrawn. Be careful not to damage or lose shims
(67).
When assembling, install snap ring (47) at front of
housing, then install bearing (48) in housing bore
against snap ring. Preassemble shifter assembly (53
and 54) with step in hub (53) and greater chamfer of
collar (54) toward front. Begin inserting pto shaft
(59) through rear opening, then install 67 mm long
collar (58), retainer (57), needle bearing (56), gear
(55), collars (52), shifter (53 and 54), needle bearing
(50), and retainer (49). Continue inserting shaft (59)
into bearing (48) until seated. Assemble bearing (64),
"O" ring (65) and collar (66) onto output gear (61),
then install snap ring (71). Install snap ring (72),
needle bearing (62) and oil seal (73). Install needle
thrust bearing and races (60) over end of shaft (59),
then slide assembled output gear over shaft and
bearings. Determine correct thickness of shims (67)
to install before installing oil seal (73) and "O" ring
(70). Position collar (69) over shaft (59) and into
housing bore against bearing (64), then measure gap
between end of collar and rear surface of housing. The
measured gap should be equal to the shaft end play.
Remove the temporarily installed collar, install suffi-
cient thickness of shims (67) to reduce end play to less
than 0.15 mm (0.006 in.), then install collar (69) and
recheck. After correct thickness of shims (67) have
been selected, remove collar (69), then install oil seal
(68) and "O" ring (70). Lubricate seal and "O" ring and
install the collar, seal and "O" ring assembly. Lip of
oil seal should be toward front. Press rubber cap (46)
into bore at front and install pto shift fork assembly
37 59 46 20
Fig. lOI^Cross section showing main and range transmissions used on 275 modeis.
3. Pto output shaft
12. Bevel pinion shaft 26. Gear
20. Pto shaft 27. Counter (top) shaft
96
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
(9Fig. 96). Check gears, shift collar and shaft for
proper operation before completing assembly. Refer
to paragraph 168 for installation of input shaft as-
sembly.
170. RANGE TRANSMISSION. The range trans-
mission is located in the rear axle center housing as
shown in Fig. 101. The top shaft (12) is the differen-
tial bevel pinion shaft.
To remove the top (bevel pinion) shaft, first refer to
paragraph 165 to separate the center housing from
other components. Remove the roll pin (1Fig. 102)
from range shift lever external control lever, then
remove the lever, being careful not to lose the detent
ball and spring. Unbolt and remove the stop plate (3)
from outside housing, then remove the internal shift
arm (5), shaft and "0" ring (4). Remove cap (11) and
cover (6), then unstake and remove nut (8). If
equipped with front-wheel drive, remove front snap
ring (17) from groove. On all models, bump shaft (12)
out toward rear while removing bearing cone (9) from
front and gears (16 and 18) from top. On front-wheel-
drive models, remove front snap ring (17) from shaft
before it falls into transmission housing. Clearance
between pin of shift arm (5Fig. 102) and groove of
gear (16) should be 0.1-0.24 mm (0.004-0.009 in.).
To remove drive shaft (36Fig. 103), first remove
top (bevel pinion) shaft, then remove snap ring (22).
Bump shaft toward rear and remove front bearing
(41). On two-wheel-drive models, withdraw shaft
from rear and lift gears from opening in top of hous-
ing. On models with four-wheel drive, remove screw
(19), lock plate (20) and special washer (21). Use a
puller to remove rear bearing (23), then lift shaft and
gears from housing through top opening. Some trac-
tors may be equipped with super low gear in place of
collar (29). If equipped with super low gear, it will be
26
36. Range drive shaft 46. Drive shaft
37. Main (input) shaft 59. Pto counter shaft
MODELS 23iS, 235H, 245, 255,265 & 275 Paragraph 170 (Cont.)

17

Fig. 102Expioded view of range

shift iever and top (bevei pinion) shaft
for 275 modeis.
1. Roll pin 10. Snap ring
2. Detent ball 11. Cap
& spring 12. Bevel pinion
3. Stop plate shaft
4. "0" ring 13. Shims
5. Internal 14. Tapered roller
shift arm bearing
6. Cover 15. Snap ring
7. "0" ring 16. Sliding gear
8. Nut 17. Snap rings
9. Tapered roller 18. Front-wheel-
bearing drive gear

necessary to remove snap ring (37) from groove and

move snap ring toward rear. Remove bearings (23 and
41) by bumping shaft to front then to rear before
removing gears and shaft from housing.
To remove the lower shafts (20 and 46Fig. 104),
first remove the two upper shafts, then remove the
rear pto shaft as follows. Unbolt and remove pto rear
cover and seal housing. Cover is provided with
threaded jack screw holes to assist removal. Lift tab
of lockwasher (8) from nut (9), then unscrew nut from
threaded shaft. Withdraw shaft (3) to rear while
removing coupling from front end of shaft. Remove
needle bearing (14), then pull clutch (16), bearing (17)
and shaft (20) out toward rear. Remove collar (28),
gear (31), bearings (29) and retainer (19). Remove
snap ring (33) from front splined boss (40), then
remove gear (34). Carefully remove splined boss (40).
Snap ring (35) and bearing (37) can also be removed,
but do not lose or damage shims (36). On four-wheel-
Fig. 103Expioded view of range transmission drive drive models, gear (26), bearing (25) and splined boss
shaft and associe^ted parts for 275 modei tractors. Spacer (23) can be removed toward front. On two-wheel-
(27) is used in piace of gear (26) on two-wheei-drive drive models, remove the unsplined collar (BFig.
modeis: Parts (19, 20, 21, 24, 25, 26 & 28) are used on 105), bearing (25) and snap ring toward front. Drive
four-wheei'drive modeis.
shaft (46Fig. 104) is located in the torque tube.
19. Retaining screw
20. Lock plate 32. Gear (16 teeth)
21. Special washer 33. Needle bearing When assembling, coat bearings (22, 38 and 42
22. Snap ring 34. Thrust washer Fig. 104) with oil, assemble bearings inside respec-
23. Ball bearing 35. Drive key tive boss (23 or 40) and install snap rings (21, 41 and
24. Snap ring 36. Drive shaft
25. Grooved thrust washer 37. Snap ring 39). Install snap ring (18) in groove of shaft (20). On
26. Idler gear 38. Gear (28 teeth) four-wheel-drive models, install ball bearing (25) on
27. Spacer collar 39. Gear (38 teeth) splined boss (23), followed by gear (26) and snap ring
28. Needle bearing 40. Gear (29 teeth) (27). On two-wheel-drive models, sealed side of bear-
29. Spacer collar (32 mm) 41. Bearing
30. Gear (16 teeth) 42. Shims ing (25Fig. 105) should be toward front when in-
31. Thrust washer 43. Collar (60 X 12 mm) stalled on unsplined boss (B).

97
Paragraph 170 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

44
45

21
22

Fig. 104Exploded view of lower shafts and reiated gears for 275 models. An unspiined spacer Is used in place of gear
(26) and boss (23) on models without four-wheel drive. On models with super low gear, gear cluster and thin spacer is
installed in place of collar (28).
1. Retainer & rear cover 14. Pilot bearing
2. "O" ring 15. Snap ring 27. Snap ring 38. Needle bearings
3. Pto output shaft. 16. Ratchet coupling 28. Spacer 39. Snap ring
4. Oil seal 17. Ball bearing 29. Needle bearings 40. Splined boss (front)
5. Ball bearing 18. Snap ring 30. Snap rings 41. Snap rings
6. Snap ring 19. Retainer 31. Reduction gears 42. Needle bearing
7. Shim 20. Pto shaft 32. Spacer (22.5, 23 or 43. Coupling
8. Tab lockwasher 21. Snap rings 23.5 mm) 44. Snap ring
9. Nut 22. Needle bearings 33. Snap ring 45. Coupling
10. Snap ring 23. Splined boss (rear) 34. Gear 46. Drive shaft
11. Spacer 24. Snap ring 35. Snap ring 47. Snap ring
12. Spring 25. Ball bearing 36. Shim 48. Coupling
13. Ratchet coupling 26. Drive gear 37. Ball bearing 49. Retainer plate

31 28 B 25 17 16 14

Fig. 105Cross section of range transmis-

sion iower shaft of models with two-wheel
drive. Refer to Fig. 104 for iegend except
unspiined boss (B).

19

98
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
On all mode] s, install snap ring (35Fig. 104) in
groove, then install sufficient thickness of shims (36)
to align front edge of bearing race (37) with front face
of center housing. Install bearing (37), selected shims
(36), boss (40), bearing (42) and snap rings (41 and
39). Slide gear (34) onto splines of boss and install
snap ring (33). Install retainer plate (49) and tighten
retaining screv^s.
Press bearing (17) onto shaft (20) against snap ring
(18), install clvitch (16), then install snap ring (15).
Oil, then insert needle bearings (29 and 22) inside
gears and rear boss, then insert shaft (20) from rear
and install retainer (19), collar (28), gear (31) and
spacer (32). Rotate shaft (20) while inserting to help
align bearings. Measure end clearance between
spacer (32) and end of boss (40). If necessary, install
a spacer (32) of different thickness to limit end play
to 0.3-0.7 mm (0.012-0.028 in.). Lubricate and install
needle bearing (14) on shaft.
Press rear bearing (5) against shoulder of output
shaft (3). Install snap ring (6) in groove, then press
front bearing (5) into bore of housing against snap
ring. Insert shaft and rear bearing after positioning
shim (7) and while installing lockwasher (8), nut (9),
snap ring (10), collar (11), spring (12) and clutch (13).
Make sure tliat chamfer inside collar (11) is
toward front and that pilot hearing (14) re-
mains in place* Tighten nut (9) and secure by bend-
ing tang of lockwasher into slot in nut. Install oil seal
(4) and "0" ring in rear cover (1), lubricate seal
surfaces, then install cover and seals with the two
threaded holes horizontal. Tighten screws retaining
cover (1) to 25-29 N.m (18-21 ft.-lbs.) torque.
To install thes drive shaft (36Fig. 103) on models
w^ithout super low drive, first position thrust
washer (34), needle bearing (33), gear (32), thrust
washer (31), key (35), gear (30) and collar (29) on
shaft. On models with two-wheel drive, install collar
(27). On four-wheel-drive models, install needle bear-
ing (28) and geiar (26). On all models, install thrust
washer (25), sn ap ring (24) and bearing (23) on shaft.
On models with four-wheel drive, install retaining
screw (19), lock plate (20) and special washer (21).
Lock position of screw with lock plate (20) after tight-
ening. On all models without super low drive, install
snap ring (37) in groove. Insert the partially assem-
bled shaft through rear bearing bore of housing while
installing gears (38,39 and 40), then install rear snap
ring (22). Driv(5 inner race of bearing (41) onto shaft,
then install roller assembly and outer race. Select the
proper thickness of shims (42) to install so that collar
(43) will be flush with machined front surface of
housing, then install shims and collar. Do not pre-
load shaft hy installing too many shims.
To install the; drive shaft (36Fig. 103) on models
\idth super low drive, observe the following. As-
semble the shaft as described in the previous para-
graph except, position snap ring (37) to the rear of
Paragraph 171
groove, next to thrust washer (34) so that gears (38,
39 and 40) can be temporarily moved to rear. Do not
yet install rear bearing (23). Install the partially
assembled shaft through top of housing, inserting
rear of shaft into rear bore first. Install rear bearing
(23) in housing bore with sealed side toward front and
install snap ring (22). Insert shaft into rear bearing
(23) by bumping front of shaft. Install special washer
(21), lock plate (20) and screw (19), then lock with
plate. Move gears (38, 39 and 40) toward front and
seat snap ring (37) in groove. Drive inner race of
bearing (41) onto front of shaft, then install roller
assembly and outer race. Select the proper thickness
of shims (42) to install so that collar (43) will be flush
with machined front surface of housing, then install
shims and collar. Do not preload shaft hy install-
ing too many shims.
Pinion shaft mesh position should be checked and
adjusted (if necessary) while installing the top (bevel
pinion) shaft. Install snap rings (10 and 15Fig. 102)
in grooves of housing and press outer races of tapered
roller bearings (9 and 14) into bores against snap
rings. Install selected shims (13) and inner race of
bearing (14) on bevel pinion shaft, then insert shaft
into housing while installing gears (16 and 18) and
snap rings (17). Make sure that gear properly en-
gages shift arm (5) while installing. Install front
bearing cone (9) and tighten nut (8) until rolling
torque of shaft is 0.88-1.18 N.m (7.8-10.4 in.-lbs.).
Tb check mesh position of the top (bevel pinion)
shaft, temporarily install the differential assembly
using shims originally installed under carrier bear-
ings. Coat bevel gears with suitable marking media
and check mesh position. Pinion should contact ring
gear in center of teeth. Adding shims (13) moves bevel
pinion deeper into differential ring gear. Backlash
should be 0.15-0.30 mm (0.006-0.012 in.) and is
changed by moving shims from under one carrier
bearing housing to under housing on opposite side.
Be sure to keep carrier bearing housings and selected
shims for each side separate to facilitate final assem-
bly. Tighten pinion shaft bearing adjusting nut until
rolHng torque of shaft is 0.88-1.18 N.m (7.8-10.4
in.-lbs.). Remainder of assembly procedure is reverse
of disassembly procedure.
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH
275 Model
171. Tractors equipped with live pto have a hydrau-
lically operated, multiple disk clutch to interrupt
power flow between the speed transmission main-
shaft and the range transmission input shaft. The
hydraulic clutch is located in the housing between the
front (speed) transmission housing and the rear
(range) transmission housing. Belleville springs en-
gage the clutch, but hydraulic pressure can be di-
99
Paragraphs 172-173 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
25

Fig. 106Exploded view of control

16 valve used on 275 models with live pto.
Individuai parts are not avaiiable for
service.
1. Housing 15. Spring
3 4 2. Plug 16. Plug
3. "0" ring 17. Spring
4. Cover 18. Spring seat
5. Plug 19. "E" ring
6. "0" rings 20. Spring seat
7. Screws 21. Spring
27 8. Shaft 22. Push rod
9. Spring 23. Shim
10. Piston 24. Plug
11. Valve spool 25. Cap
12. Valve spool 26. Plug
13. Shim 27. Plug
14. Spring 28. Plug

3 28 29 44 43 30

Fig. 107Cross section of torque tube

showing the hydraulic clutch. Refer to
Fig. 108 for legend.

5 15

rected to the clutch piston, stopping drive to the drive
wheels, but still powering the live pto output shaft.
172. LINKAGE AND CONTROL VALVE. The
hydraulic clutch may be either operated by separate
hand control or may be attached to the foot clutch
linkage. Be sure that linkage operates freely and is
not bent or damaged. Refer to paragraph 113 for
adjustment.
An exploded view of the control valve assembly is
shown in Fig. 106, but individual parts are not avail-
able. Disassembly is discouraged.
173. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Refer to paragraph
163 for separating between the speed transmission
and the front of the torque tube. Separate between
the rear of transmission housing and front of rear
axle center housing, using paragraph 146 as a guide,
then withdraw pto hydraulic clutch assembly. Port
ring (28Fig. 107) is attached to torque tube with
fittings, which are sealed with "O" rings (31).
The clutch must be pressurized to compress the
springs (20 and 22Fig. 108) and release the clutch.
Refer to Fig. 109 for using (CAS-1977) hydraulic
clutch test and service fixture to compress the springs
so that snap ring (6) can be removed. Oil pressure to
the fixture should be within the range of 3930-4895
kPa (570-710 psi). Remove shims (7Fig. 108), back-
ing plate (8), wave washer (9), clutch discs (10 and 11)
and steel plates (12 and 13). Remove the two sealing
rings (26), then clamp the clutch assembly in arbor
press as shown in Fig. 110 and remove snap ring (25).
Release press and remove Belleville spring assembly
(20-23Fig. 108). Remove clutch piston (18) and
sealing rings (17 and 19) from clutch hub.
Inspect and renew all parts which are worn or
damaged. Make sure parts are absolutely clean and
lubricated, then install new seals when assembling.

100
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 173 (Cont.)

30

46

29
28

Fig. 108Exploded view of hydrauiic ciutcii iocated between speed transmission and range transmission. "O" rings seai
fittings attactied to port ring (26). Seaiing rings (17 & 19) may be square cut "O" rings.
3. Snap ring 26. Sealing rings
4. Clutch drum 12. Steel plates 20. Belleville springs 27. Retainer plate
5. Thrust washer w/rubber plugs (same as 20) 28. Oil port ring
6. Snap ring 13. Steel plates (4 used) 21. Spacers 29. Ball bearing
7. Shims 15. Clutch hub 22. Belleville springs 30. Shims
8. Back plate 16. Plug (same as 20) 43. Coupling
9. Wave spring 17. Sealing ring 23. Spring center support 44. Snap ring
10, Disc 18. Piston i 24. Spring guide 45. Coupling
11. Friction discs (9 used) 19. Sealing ring , ' 25. Snap ring 46. Drive shaft

F H
F H

Fig. 109View of tiydrauiic dutch pack (H) mounted on

pressurizing fixture (F), so that snap ring (6) can be
removed. Springs engage dutch and dutch must be pres- Fig. 110Arbor press can be used as shown to compress
surized to reiea$*e. Beiieviiie springs enough to remove snap ring (25).

101
 Paragraphs 174-175
Install and lubricate seal rings (17 and 19) in
grooves of hub (15), then install piston (18). Coat
Belleville springs (20 and 22), spacers (21) and center
support (23) with grease containing molydisulfide
before assembling. Install first Belleville springs (20)
in center support (23) with concave side toward cen-
ter support. Install spacer (21) between Belleville
springs. Install last four Belleville springs (22) with
concave side toward center support and with spacers
between Belleville springs, then install spring assem-
bly over hub (15). Install spring support (24) with
small diameter toward inside. Compress springs in a
press (Fig. 110), then install snap ring (25). Install
the two new seal rings (26Fig. 108), then assemble
clutch discs and plates (9, 10, 11, 12 and 13). Install
internal splined metal disc, followed by the nine
internal lined discs (11), four steel plates with rubber
plugs (12) and four steel plates (13). Alternate the
steel plates with rubber plugs and similar plates
without plugs so that plates will be separated by the
rubber plugs. The rubber projections should be in the
same row of tabs on all disks (12) and should be on
each side of steel plates (13) so that steel plates will
separate properly when clutch is disengaged. Install
TRANSMISSION
235H HYDROSTATIC
174. The hydrostatic transmission consists of a
variable displacement piston type hydraulic pump
and a fixed displacement piston type hydraulic motor
located just behind the clutch housing. The hydro-
static pump is connected directly to the engine clutch
disc by the input shaft. The hydrostatic unit output
shaft drives the high-low range transmission gears
located in the rear axle center housing.
The hydrostatic drive provides forward speeds and
reverse speeds in two speed ranges. Ground speeds
are infinitely variable in low range from 0 to about
3.4 kph (2.1 mph) in reverse to 6.21 kph (3.86 mph)
forward. Ground speeds in high range are infinitely
variable from 0 to about 8.5 kph (5.3 mph) in reverse
to 15.5 kph (9.6 mph) forward.
LUBRICATION
235H Hydrostatic Model
175. The hydrostatic unit utilizes fiuid contained
in a common reservoir consisting ofthe transmission
housing, rear axle center housing and the rear axle
housings.
Fluid and filters should be changed after first 50
hours of operation and every 200 hours thereafter.
102
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
last lined disc (11) followed by steel disc (10), wave
washer (9) and back plate (8). Chamfered outer edge
of back plate should be toward outside (away from
wave washer).
Attach clutch hub to test fixture as shown in Fig.
109 and pressurize clutch to disengage clutch. Install
snap ring (6), then measure gap between snap ring
(6) and back plate (8) with hydraulic test pressure
forcing clutch to disengage. Correct gap is 4.2-4 A mm
(0.165-0.173 in.). Remove snap ring (6) and add suf-
ficient thickness of shims (7Fig. 108) to provide
correct gap between snap ring and back plate. Rein-
stall snap ring, then install clutch drum (4) over tabs
of steel plates (12 and 13). Use special alignment tool
(CAS-1976 or equivalent) to center clutch drum, then
slowly reduce hydraulic pressure to zero. The align-
ment tool and clutch drum can be removed and pres-
sure of Belleville springs will hold clutch discs and
steel plates in alignment. Install new "O" rings (31
Fig. 107) if port ring was removed. Reinstall clutch
drum (4), washer (5) and clutch assembly by revers-
ing removal procedure. Apply a bead of sealer be-
tween torque tube and transmission housing.
Lower three-point hitch and remove the three drain
plugs. One drain plug is located at front of clutch
housing, the other two are at bottom of axle center
housing. If equipped with mid pto, another drain plug
is located on mid pto housing. All hydraulic system
and transmission filters should be changed or serv-
iced at the same time. The screen type hydraulic
suction filter, located in lower right side of transmis-
sion housing, can be cleaned. Transmission oil must
be drained before removing suction filter screen.
Make certain that "O" ring on suction filter cover is
not damaged. Canister type filter, located on upper
right side of transmission housing, must be renewed.
Transmission oil does not need to be drained prior to
removal of canister type filter. Clean filter adapters
and lubricate filter seal with clean oil before install-
ing filters. Tighten canister filter by hand, do not use
filter removal wrench to install. Fill reservoir with
"CASE IH HY-TRAN PLUS" or equivalent fluid, then
start engine. Allow engine to run at idle while oper-
ating hydraulic controls and raising and lowering lift
arms. Stop engine, lower three-point hitch and check
fluid level. Tractor should be on level surface when
checking fluid level. Dipstick and fill plug are located
just in front of seat. Capacity is approximately 14 L
(14.8 quarts), but some oil may remain in system
when draining. Control linkage should be lubricated
with lithium base multi-purpose grease.
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
TROUBLESHOOTING
235H Hydrostatic Model
176. The following are symptoms which may occur
during operation and possihle causes related to the
hydrostatic transmission.
1. Tractor will not move or operates erratically,
a. Transmission oil level low.
b. Control linkage improperly adjusted or dam-
aged.
c. Charge pump damaged.
d. Engine clutch or transmission input shaft fail-
ure.
2. Tractor moves, but lacks power.
a. High pressure relief valve opening pressure set
too low.
b. Internal leakage of high pressure oil.
3. Tractor moves in one direction only.
a. Control linkage faulty.
b. One high pressure relief valve is defective.
c. One charge pressure check valve not seating
correctly.
d. Neutral valve spool spring broken or valve
stuck.
4. Abnormal noise when operating.
a. Suction filter plugged.
b. Air leak on suction side of charge pump.
c. Charge pump or relief valve faulty.
5. Tractor fails to stop in neutral. !
a. Control liakage out of adjustment.
b. Neutral valve stuck or damaged.
6. Oil overheating.
a. Tractor o^^erloaded. ; gauge should be 3763-4118 psi (25,945-28,392 kPa).
b. Oil cooler plugged. ' Refer to paragraph 179 if high pressure is too low.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
235H Hydrostatic Model
177. The first step in testing and diagnosing prob-
lems should be to check the quantity and quality of
oil. The transraission filler opening and dipstick is
located ahead ofthe operator seat. Additional check-
ing can be accomplished by draining the fluid, remov-
ing filters and checking fluid and filters for condition
and impurities. The clutch shaft is visible through
opening for dipstick and movement ofthe swashplate
is visible through opening for square head filler plug
located just ahtead of the dipstick. It is not recom-
mended to operate engine with the dipstick or plug
removed.
178. PRESSIURES TESTS. Special test fittings
(No. 14-2-97), v^hich are available from manufacturer
and appropriai;e pressure gauges (one 5000 psi and
one 160 psi) are required to test pressure.
Paragraphs 177-178
Fig. IllTesting the forward drive pressure of hydro-
static transmission requires speciai piugs and gauges
instaiied as shown. Refer to text.
To check Forward Drive Pressure, proceed as fol-
lows. Remove the Allen head plugs from right side of
neutral valve bore and install the special plug and
0-5000 psi test gauge (FFig. 111). Remove the
socket head plug from left side and install special
plug and 0-160 psi test gauge (R). Set the brake, block
the wheels, start the engine and set speed to 1300
rpm. Shift the range transmission to HIGH range,
then move the hydrostatic drive lever FORWARD
until the engine speed drops to 1000 rpm.
CAUTION: Do not move hydrostatic drive lever to
the rear or the iow pressure gauge wifi be damaged.
When engine speed is slowed to 1000, observe the
pressure indicated on the gauges. The maximum
forward drive pressure recorded by the high pressure
Charge pressure is indicated by the low pressure
gauge. When hydrostatic lever is in neutral position,
charge pressure should be 57-85 psi (393-586 kPa).
Refer to paragraph 179 if charge pressure is too low.
To check Reverse Drive Pressure, install the special
plug and 0-5000 psi test gauge (R) in port located on
the left side and install special plug and 0-160 psi test
gauge (H) on right side. Set the brake, block the
wheels, start the engine and set speed to 1300 rpm.
Shift the range transmission to HIGH range, then
move the hydrostatic drive lever toward REVERSE
until the engine speed drops to 1000 rpm.
CAUTION: Do not move hydrostatic drive iever
forward or the low pressure gauge will be damaged.
When engine speed is slowed to 1000, observe the
pressure indicated on the gauges. The maximum
reverse drive pressure recorded by the high pressure
gauge (R) should be 3763-4118 psi (25,945-28,392
kPa). Refer to paragraph 179 if high pressure is too
low. Charge pressure is indicated by the low pressure
gauge (H). When hydrostatic lever is in neutral posi-
103
 Paragraph 179 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
tion, charge pressure should be 57-85 psi (393-586 When testing is complete, remove test plugs and
kPa). Refer to paragraph 179 if charge pressure is too gauges, install original socket head plugs using new
low. seal rings and tighten to 40 N.m (30 ft.-lbs.) torque.

179. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES. If pressure

Fig. i12The charge pressure relief vaive is iocated be-
ifiind piug (L) on rigtit side of transmission iiousing. The
reverse high pressure reiief vaive is iocated at (H),
tests indicate low pressure, be sure that suction filter
screen is clean before any other disassembly. A suc-
tion leak in the pump inlet line can also cause low
pressure.
The charge pressure relief valve is located behind
plug (LFig. 112) on the right side of hydrostatic
transmission housing. Charge pressure relief valve
(17Fig. 113) can be removed and disassembled
without draining oil or removing transmission. Relief
valve spring free length should be 32 mm (1.26 in.).
Charge pressure relief valve is not adjustable.
The reverse high pressure relief valve (HFig.
112) is located on right side of transmission housing
and forward high pressure relief valve is located in
the same position on opposite side of transmission

40

Q
Fig. 113Expioded view of hydrostatic transmission used on 235H modeis.
1. Snap ring
2. "O" ring 16. Plug 30. Check valve spring 44. Washer
3. Oil seal cover 17. Low pressure relief 31. Plug 45. Collar
4. Seal valve spool 32. Valve holder plate 46. Neutral valve spring
5. Needle bearing 18. Spring 33. Needle hearing 47. Stopper
6. Charge pump housing 19. Plug seal 34. Valve plate 48. Plug seal
7. Rotor & plate 20. Plug 35. Snap ring 49. Plug
21. Neutral valve spring 36. Spring plate 50. Expander
9. Expander 22. Collar 37. Spring 51. Forward high pressure
10. Reverse high pressure 23. Plug seal 38. Spring plate relief valve housing
relief valve housing 24. Plug 39. Main pump 52. Poppet
11. Poppet 25. Plug cylinder block 53. Spring
12. Spring 26. Check valve spring 40. Spacer 54. Washers
13. Washers 27. Spool 41. Pins 55. Spring holder
14. Spring holder 28. Check valve housing 42. Casing 56. Plug seal
15. Plug seal 29. Spool 43. Neutral valve spool 57. Plug

104
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
housing. Both high pressure rehef valves can be re-
moved and disassembled without draining oil or re-
moving transmission. Relief valve spring free length
should be 51 mm (2.01 in.) for both valves. High
pressure reli(f setting can be adjusted by changing
thickness of shims (13 or 54Fig. 113).
180. CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT.
Disconnect transmission control rod (RFig. 112)
from control lever on transmission. Be sure that
control lever is in neutral detent position, then with
range transmission in low gear, start engine and
gradually increase speed. If tractor moves either for-
ward or backvi^ard, loosen three retaining screws and
adjust set plate (P) located behind transmission lever
to place hydrcstatic transmission in neutral. Repeat
test and readjust if necessary until engine can be
speeded up without the tractor moving while controls
are in neutral position.
Place transmission control lever in neutral position
and shut off engine. Loosen locknut on stop bolt
(AFig. 112) and turn stop bolt in several turns.
Move transmission control lever rearward as far as it
will go and hold it in this position. Turn stop bolt out
until it just contacts the lever, then turn it out an
additional V4 turn and tighten locknut. Move trans-
mission control lever forward as far as it will go and
repeat the adjustment for stop bolt (B). Move trans-
mission control lever and the hydrostatic hand con-
trol lever (next to dash) to neutral position. If
necessary, adjust pin bracket on end of control rod (R)
so that pin aligns with hole in hydrostatic control
lever, then connect control rod to hydrostatic control
lever.
HYDROSTATIC UNIT
235H Hydrostatic Model
181. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the
hydrostatic unit, split tractor between the clutch
housing and the hydrostatic housing as follows. Place
wedges betwe^jn the front axle and front sub frame to
prevent tipping. Disconnect battery ground cable,
detach rear wiring harness and move out of the way
so that fenders can be removed and tractor can be
separated between clutch and transmission hous-
ings. Unbolt and remove the operator seat and tool
box. Detach, then remove the front-wheel drive shaft
if so equipped. On all models, remove both brake
control rods and detach or remove hydraulic suction
tubes and lines which run from front to rear. Remove
screws which attach fenders to steps and the single
bolt which attaches the pto cover plate to the step,
then lift rear fenders assembly from tractor. Drain
hydrostatic transmission, range transmission and
rear axle center housing. Unbolt and remove the left
and right step plates, detach the clutch pedal return
Paragraphs 180-182
spring and remove the assist spring from the diflfer-
ential lock pedal. Disconnect wiring harness from pto
safety switch and from range transmission safety
switch. Remove hydraulic suction tubes from outside
of transmission housing which would restrict separa-
tion or removal, making sure that location of tubes
and fittings are appropriately marked for easy instal-
lation. Support the front section of the tractor and the
rear section separately, then remove the ten screws
which attach the clutch housing to the hydrostatic
transmission housing. Carefully and safely separate
the tractor, being careful not to damage hydraulic
lines. The joint between clutch housing and transmis-
sion housing is sealed with joint compound and
aligned with dowel pins. Separation may be difficult,
but make sure that all screws are removed.
Loosen the set screw and remove the clutch (input)
shaft. Unbolt and remove the range lever guide, the
filter assembly and top cover, then remove similar
lower cover from bottom of hydrostatic transmission
housing. Remove the two lower screws located in the
compartment exposed by removing the lower cover.
Support the hydrostatic transmission assembly sepa-
rately, then remove the remaining eight attaching
screws. Carefully and safely separate the hydrostatic
transmission from the rear axle center housing. Re-
move coupling from top rear shaft of transmission.
Reassemble by reversing the disassembly proce-
dure. When reassembling, make sure that recessed
sides of clutch release bearing are centered on clutch
release fork. Be sure that joint surfaces of transmis-
sion, clutch and rear axle center housings are clean.
Apply a thin coat of molydisulfide grease to clutch
shaft splines, insert the shaft into position, then pull
the shaft to the rear until about 13 mm (1 in.) from
rear of clutch housing. Move the transmission and
rear assembly forward until the transmission input
can be attached to the clutch shaft, then tighten the
setting bolt and jam nut. Apply a thin bead of "Loctite
515" or equivalent sealer to joint surfaces of trans-
mission housing before rejoining. Tighten screws re-
connecting transmission to rear axle center housing
and to clutch housing to 50-60 N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.)
torque. Apply a thin coat of "Loctite 515" or equiva-
lent sealer to lower cover, then tighten retaining
screws to 11-13 N.m (8-9.5 ft.-lbs.) torque.
OVERHAUL
235H Hydrostatic Model
182. Before disassembling, plug openings and
clean the exterior of the hydrostatic unit. Unbolt and
remove the charge pump (6 and 7Fig. 113), then
remove the 12 Allen head screws and separate valve
block assembly (32) from the transmission housing.
It may be necessary to use a soft hammer to break
sealant bond and move the parts on the dowel pins.
105
 Paragraph 182 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

18

38

Fig. 114Exploded view of hydrostatic transmission assembly used on 235H models.

1. Input shaft lOA. Swashplate pivot
2. Main pump piston retainer shaft (left side) 20. Oil seal cover 29. Needle bearing assy.
3. Pistons (9 used) 11. Swashplate 21. "0" ring 30. Drive motor valve plate
4. Thrust plate 12. Set plate 22. Snap ring 31. Snap ring
5, Retainer pins 13. Bearing 23. Drive motor 32. Washer
6. Snap ring 14. Housing piston retainer 33. Spring
7. Washer 15. Oil seal 24. Pistons 34. Washer
8. Oil seal 16. Oil seal cover 25. Thrust plate 35. Cyhnder block
9. Bushing 17. "0" ring 26. Bearing 36. Pins
0. Swashplate pivot shaft 18. Snap ring 27. Washer 37. Spacer
(right side) 19. Oil seal 28. Snap ring 38. Output shaft

Slide the pump and motor cylinder block assemblies
from their respective shafts. On some transmissions,
a plug is located behind the swashplate roll pin (5
Fig. 114). Remove plug before driving out the roll pin.
Remove roll pins (5) and separate swashplate (11)
from its two pivot shafts (10 and lOA). Remove the
two Allen screws from set plate (12) and lift input
shaft and bearing assembly from transmission hous-
ing. Remove the two Allen head screws from rear of
housing securing drive motor thrust plate (25). Slide
plate out of transmission housing over output shaft.
After thrust plate is removed, output shaft may be
pulled from housing. Refer to Fig. 113 and disassem-
ble valve block assembly. Use care to lay parts in
order to facilitate reassembly.
Inspect for broken springs and inspect spool valves
for nicks or burrs. Free length of springs (26 and 30)
should be 15 mm (0.59 in.). Neutral valve spring (21)
for models before P.I.N. 8123 should have free length
of 24 mm (0.945 in.) and P.I.N. 8123 and later should
be 35 mm (1.38 in.). Free length of high pressure relief
valve spring (12 and 53) should be 51 mm (2.01 in.)
and free length of low pressure relief valve spring (18)
should be 32 mm (1.26 in.). A^/ig x 2V2 inch bolt with
matching nut, one ^/IQ X 2/4 inch washer and one % x
Vs inch washer can be used to compress springs
(37Fig. 113 and 33Fig. 114) for removal or instal-
lation of snap rings (35Fig. 113 and 31Fig. 114).
Springs should have free length of 39 mm (1.54 in.).
Renew shaft seals and "0" rings each time unit is
disassembled. Seals are retained by snap rings. In-
spect pump and motor cylinder block and piston as-
semblies for scoring or other damage. If pump or
motor pistons are removed from cylinder, they should

106
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 183-184

19
18
17

21

Fig. 115Exploded view of range transmission used on 235H modeis with iiydrostatic transmission.
1. Ball bearing 8. Thrust washer 15. Snap rings
2. Sliding gear 9. Ball bearing 16. Gear 22. "O" ring
3. Counter shaft 10. Snap ring 17. Shims 23. Safety start switch bracket
4. Snap ring 11. Nut 18. Bearing 24. Pto shift linkage lever
5. Thrust washer 12. Lockwasher 19. Bevel pinion shaft 25. "O" ring
6. High gear 13. Bearing 20. Shift lever plate 26. Pto linkage arm
7. Bushing 14. Retainer 21. Range shift linkage lever 27. Pto lever

be reinstalled in original bores. Maximum allowable
piston-to-cylinder bore clearance is 0.0145 mm
(0.0017 in.). Specified thickness of piston shoe pads
is 3.35-3.50 mm (0.132-0.138 in.), and all pads must
be within 0.05 mm (0.002 in.). Axial clearance of shoe
on piston should be between 0.03-0.05 mm (0.0018-
0.0020 in.). Rcsnew components if any scratches or
wear can be detected in the surface of valve plates
(34Fig. 113 or 30Fig. 114), pump and motor cyl-
inder block face or piston bores, piston retainers (2
and 23Fig. 114) and thrust plates (4 and 25).
Note that valve plates (34Fig. 113 and 30Fig.
114) look identical except for the feathering notches
machined into the ends of oil passage slots. Valve
plate for pump has notches only on left end of slots,
and valve plate for motor has notches on both ends of
slots. The valve plates shoud not be interchanged.
Install valve plates with notched side facing outward,
making certain that slot on back of plates indexes
with locating dowels in valve holder plate block (32
Fig. 113). A light film of petroleum jelly may be
applied to rear side of valve plates to hold them in
place. Lubricate all parts with clean oil during assem-
bly of input anci output shafts, swashplate and pump
and motor components in transmission housing.
Make sure that pins (41Fig. 113 and 36Fig. 114)
do not fall while installing pump and motor. Apply
bead of "Loctite 515" sealer to flange surface of trans-
mission housing. Install valve holder plate to trans-
mission housing and tighten mounting screws evenly
to 77-87 N.m (57-64 ft.-lbs.) torque. Install charge
pump rotor and plate (7Fig. 113) with chamfered
edges and match marks out, facing away from trans-
mission toward front of tractor. Tighten charge pump
housing socket head bolts to 77-87 N.m (57-64 ft.-lbs.)
torque.
RANGE TRANSMISSION
235H Hydrostatic Model
183, The two-speed range transmission provides a
choice of two gear selections. The range transmission
is located in front compartment of the rear axle center
housing and the sliding gear is located on the range
transmission counter shaft. Drive from the hydro-
static unit lower shaft turns gear (2Fig. 115), which
then turns upper gear (16), which is splined to upper
(bevel pinion) shaft (19). Lower drive gear (2) meshes
directly with the larger of the upper gears (16) for low
range. For high range, gear (2) slides to the rear and
engages gear (6) which is meshed with the smaller
upper gear.
184. R&R AND OVERHAUL. The range trans-
mission is located in the rear axle center housing as
shown in Fig. 115. The top shaft (19) is the differential
bevel pinion shaft.

107
 Paragraphs 185-186
To remove the top (bevel pinion) shaft, first refer to
paragraph 181 to separate the center housing from
the hydrostatic transmission and to paragraph 186
for removing the differential assembly. Bend tang of
lockwasher (12) out of nut (11), then remove nut.
Remove front snap ring (15) from groove and bump
shaft (19) toward rear until snap ring (15) and gear
(16) can be removed. Withdraw bevel pinion shaft (19)
from rear. Disassemble lower shaft and gears simi-
larly after removing snap ring (10).
Install lower shaft and gears by reversing removal
procedures. Make sure that gear (2) properly engages
shift arm (21) while installing.
Pinion shaft mesh position should be checked and
adjusted (if necessary) while installing the upper
(bevel pinion) shaft. Install snap ring in groove of
housing, install selected shims (17), then press outer
race of tapered roller bearing (18) into bore against
snap ring and shims. Press cone and inner race of
bearing (18) on bevel pinion shaft, then insert shaft
DIFFERENTIAL
185. The differential is located in the center hous-
ing between the final drive and axle housings. The
range transmission is also located in this center hous-
ing of some models. Refer to the appropriate trans-
mission section for service to the transmission and to
the following for service to the differential assembly.
R&R AND OVERHAUL
All Models
186. To remove the differential, drain fluid and
remove the three-point hitch linkage. Detach the
battery ground cable, disconnect rear lights and other
electrical wiring, then relocate the rear wiring har-
108
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
into housing while installing gears (16) and snap
rings (15). Install outer race of front bearing (13) and
tighten nut (11) until rolling torque of shaft is 0.88-
1.18 N.m (7.8-10.4 in.-lbs.).
To check mesh position of the top (bevel pinion)
shaft, temporarily install the differential assembly
using shims originally installed under carrier bear-
ings. Coat bevel gears with suitable marking media
and check mesh position. Pinion should contact ring
gear in center of teeth. Adding shims (17) moves bevel
pinion deeper into differential ring gear. Backlash
should be 0.15-0.30 mm (0.006-0.012 in.) and is
changed by moving shims from under one carrier
bearing housing to under housing on opposite side.
Be sure to keep carrier bearing housings and selected
shims for each side separate to facilitate final assem-
bly. Tighten pinion shaft bearing adjusting nut until
rolling torque of shaft is 0.88-1.18 N.m (7.8-10.4
in.-lbs.). Remainder of assembly procedure is reverse
of disassembly procedure.
ness out ofthe way. Remove the seat, fenders and step
plates, then remove hydraulic lines, hoses and suc-
tion tubes which would interfere with removal ofthe
final drive housings or rockshaft housing. Unbolt and
remove the rockshaft housing from the top of rear
axle center housing. The differential can be removed
after removing only one of the final drive housings,
but to adjust carrier bearings, both should be re-
moved. Support the rear axle center housing and
remove both rear wheel and tire assemblies. Support
one final drive housing with a sling, remove retaining
screws and separate final drive and axle assembly
from the rear axle center housing. Remove the other
final drive and axle. Bend tabs of lock plates away
from screws attaching carrier housings, then remove
carrier housings and differential.
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
It is not necessary to remove the bevel pinion shaft
to remove the differential assembly, but the bevel
pinion shaft and differential ring gear are available
only as a matched set. If the bevel pinion is to be
removed, refei' to paragraph 127 for 235 model with
manual transmission, paragraph 184 for 235H model
with hydrostEitic transmission, paragraph 158 for
245, 255 and 265 models or paragraph 170 for 275
model.
Inspect carrier bearings (16Fig. 116A or Fig.
116B) for smooth operation. Press bearings from dif-
ferential if renewal is required. Inspect ring gear (25)
and bevel pinion (20) for damage. If necessary to
remove bevel pdnion shaft, refer to appropriate trans-
mission paragraphs. To remove pinions (23), thrust
washers (21 and 24) and side gears (22), drive out roll
pin (28) and remove shaft (27), then rotate gears from
differential case (26).
Lubricate gesars, shafts, thrust washers and bear-
ings when reassembling. Reinstall by reversing re-
moval procedure. Install pin (28) so that split is
toward side of jpin (27). Tighten screws attaching ring
gear to differential case to 25-30 N.m (18-22 ft.-lbs.)
for Model 235 or 41-49 N.m (31-36 ft.-lbs.) torque for
all other models, then lock with lock plate. When
installing differential assembly, note that bearing
carriers (14 and 17Fig. 116A) are different lengths
Paragraph186 (Cont.)
for all models except 275 and shorter carrier is in-
stalled on left side. Notch in each bearing carrier
should be aligned with matching notch in rear axle
center housing.
To check mesh position ofthe bevel pinion, refer to
appropriate transmission section and temporarily in-
stall the bevel pinion shaft. Install the differential
assembly using shims (15Fig. 116A) originally in-
stalled or by turning adjusters (15Fig. 116B). On
all models, coat ring gear teeth with suitable marking
media and check mesh position of gears. Pinion
should contact ring gear in center of teeth. Adding
shims (29Fig. 75, 26Fig. 92, 26Fig. 93 or 17
Fig. 115) moves bevel pinion deeper into differential
ring gear. See Fig. 117.
Backlash between pinion and ring gear should be
0.15-0.30 mm (0.006-0.012 in.) for all models.
Backlash for all models except 275 is adjusted
initially by installing shims (15Fig. 116A) behind
the bearing carrier (17) on left side of differential. To
adjust backlash, install both bearing carriers without
shims and tighten carrier retaining screws finger
tight. Install shims as necessary behind left bearing
carrier (17) to move ring gear (25) away from bevel
pinion (20) until desired backlash is obtained. After
backlash is correctly set, tighten left bearing carrier
retaining screws securely. Carrier bearings should

21 2 4 .

21

Fig, 116AExploded view of

differentiai and finai drive
typicai of modeis except
275.
1. Snap ring
2. Brake drum
3. Right final drive housing
4. Oil seal
5. Oil seal bushing
6. "O" ring
7. Bearings
8. Snap ring
9. Right pinion shaft
10. Left pinion shaft
11. Differential lodt hub 15. Shim pack 20. Bevel pinion & shaft 25. Ring gear
12. Differential loclc 16. Differential carrier bearing 21. Thrust washer 26. Differential case
return spring 17. Left bearing carrier 22. Differential side gear 27. Pinion shaft
13. Lock plate 18. Left final drive housing 23. Differential pinion gears 28. Roll pin
14. Right bearing carrier 19. Center housing 24. Thrust washers 29. Lock plate

109
Paragraph 186 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

22 21

10
..<-^"'J^ 2-k/ 42 ''So'

20

Fig. 116BExploded view of differentiai and final drive for 275 model.
7. Bearing 18. Left final drive housing 27. Pinion shaft 36. Nut
8. Snap ring 19. Center housing 28. Roll pin 37. Rubber cap
10. Final drive shaft & pinion 20. Bevel pinion & shaft 29. "O" ring 38. Spring
11. Differential lock hub 21. Thrust washer 30. "O" ring 39. Differential lock
13. Lock plate 22. Differential side gear 31. Oil seal fork & cam
14. Right bearing carrier 23. Differential pinion gears 32. Snap ring 40. Roll pin
15. Adjusters 24. Thrust washers 33. Collar (55 x 5 mm) 41. "O" ring (16 mm)
16. Differential carrier bearings 25. Ring gear 34. Tapered roller bearing 42. Flat washer
17. Left bearing carrier 26. Differential case 35. Snap ring 43. Differential lock shaft

now be adjusted so that there is no side play of
differential, but no preload on bearings. To adjust
bearings, install shims (15) as necessary behind bear-
ing carrier (14) on right side to obtain desired setting.
When removing differential assembly, be sure to keep
carrier bearing housings and selected shims for each
side separated to facilitate final assembly.
Bevel gear backlash and carrier bearing adjust-
ment for 275 models is changed by turning the adjust-
ers (15Fig. 116B). Adjust gear backlash by
tightening one adjuster and loosening the other ad-
juster, thereby moving ring gear away from or closer
to bevel pinion, until desired backlash is obtained.
After backlash is correctly set, install lock plate (13)
on adjuster for left carrier (17) to maintain setting.
Differential carrier bearings should be adjusted so
that there is no side play of differential, but no pre-
load on bearings. Tighten or loosen adjuster (15) on
right carrier (14) to adjust bearings, then install lock
plate (13) to maintain setting.
When installing differential lock fork and cam
(39Fig. 116B) on 275 models, install roll pin (40) in
cam so that pin fully engages cam and lock shaft (43).
Split in roll pin should be away from shaft.

110
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 187-188

^p-:sss^^rN^ Contact is seen at about

Normal
-"H^^^^^N^ 80% of entire tooth area
^\^^^ V--- from tooth end, and the
^^-'"^ contact is uniform.
Gear contact Counter measure and
adjustment.
Contact is Bring pinion
^ ^ ^ ^ \ seen only r,^ shaft closer.
r ^ ^ / ' " at tooth R^^rp^k Adjust back- Fig. 117Checking bevel pinion gear to
^ ^ crest. lash by moving ring gear tooth contact pattern. Desired
ring gear away. tooth contact is shown in uppermost
Contact Move pinion iliustration.
^,^5sr^^ seen only shaft away.
N W i ^ ^ ^ at tooth ^)~t^ Adjust backlash
Abnonnal

^<i root by bringing

ring gear closer.
Contact Bring ring
^^..^^ seen only gear closer.

^ r' c{j*"
1
Adjust back-
lash by moving
pinion shaft
away
Contact Move ring
^^^,^,^5;-^ seen only gear away,
^T^^% at inner .^^l Adjust backlash
^ < C 5 ^ end. ^ ^ ^ by bringing
pinion shaft
closer.

FINAL DRIVE
AXLE AND HOUSING screws retaining axle and final drive housing to cen-
ter housing to 50-60 N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque and
235, 235H, 245 And 255 Models 12M screws to 82-92 N.m (61-67 ft.-lbs.) torque.

187. R&R ASSEMBLY. Drain fluid from transmis-

sion, center housing and axle housing. Block tractor,
position a jack under transmission and center hous-
ing, then remcive wheel and tire assembly. Remove
the three point hitch assembly and disconnect brake
rod at brake. Kemove the rear fender assembly and
step, then attach a sling and hoist to the final drive
and axle assembly Take up slack in hoist, but do not
lift tractor. Remove screws attaching the housing to
the center housing, then carefully pull assembly
away from cent er housing. It may be necessary to use
a hammer to break the sealer bond and slide housing
from dowel pins, but make sure that all screws are
removed. Also axle inner bearing (12Fig. 118) will
be withdrawn with axle and housing. The differential
lock mechanism is located on the right side.
Seal the final drive housing to the center housing
using "Loctite 515" or equivalent. Tighten the lOM
188. OVERHAUL Tb disassemble the removed
final drive assembly, refer to Fig. 118 and proceed as
follows. Remove snap ring (11), then use puller to
remove the inner bearing (12) and spacer collar (13).
Use a puller and remove gear (14), then remove snap
rings (15 and 16). Pry oil seal (20) from housing bore,
then remove snap ring (19) from groove in housing.
Bump axle shaft (23) out, from inside. To remove
pinion shaft (10), first remove the brake assembly,
then remove snap ring (1) and brake drum (2). Bump
pinion shaft from seal sleeve (5) and bearing (7). If
necessary, inner snap ring (8) can be removed from
groove so that bearing and shaft can be removed
together.
Reassemble by reversing removal procedure. Lu-
bricate all seals, "O" rings and bearings before instal-
lation.

111
Paragraphs 189-190
13 14
20,
21
265 Models
189. R&R ASSEMBLY, Removal and service pro-
cedures may depend upon which side component is
installed. The inner and outer housings (20 and 22
Fig. 119) should be removed together, then separated
to service the internal components. The following
procedure covers removal of rear axle and final drive
assembly from right side of tractor. Procedure for left
side is similar. Drain oil from transmission and axle
housing. Block tractor, raise and support transmis-
sion and center housing, then remove wheel and
wheel weight. Remove three point hitch upper and
lower links, drawbar and right lower link mounting
bracket. Disconnect both brake rods at brakes. Re-
move rear pto housing. Remove ROPS frame, seat,
fender and tool box. Remove three point hitch lift
arm and rockshaft support with shims from right side
of rockshaft. Disconnect transmission hydraulic
clutch cable from clutch valve. Disconnect differential
lock pedal spring, clutch rod from clutch pedal and
foot throttle cable. Remove linkage cover from under
step platform.Disconnect electrical wiring as needed,
remove step platform mounting bolts and remove
step platform. Support rear axle housing assembly
with suitable hoist. Remove screws attaching reduc-
tion gear housing to center housing, separate gear
housing from center housing using a prybar and
remove axle housing assembly.
When installing rear axle and final drive assembly,
place outer half of differential lock clutch (40Fig.
119) and spring (39) on final drive pinion shaft (9) and
inner half of lock clutch in differential center housing.
It may be necessary to use grease on inner clutch half
to hold it in place in the center housing. Seal the final
drive housing to the differential center housing using
"Loctite 515" or equivalent. Tighten MIO mounting
112
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Fig. 118Exploded view of axle and final
drive typical of 235, 235H, 245 and 255
models.
23 1. Snarp ring 14. Final drive
2. Brake drum (bull) gear
4. Oil seal 15. Snap ring
5. Oil seal bushing 16. Snap ring
6. "0" ring 17. Snap ring
7. Bearings 18. Bearing
8. Snap ring 19. Snap ring
10. Left pinion shaft 20. Oil seal
11. Snap ring 21. Seal sleeve
12. Bearing 22. Housing
13. Spacer collar 23. Axle
screws to 30-42 N.m (22-31 ft.-lbs.) and M12 stud
nuts to 55-75 N.m (41-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.
190. OVERHAUL Tb disassemble the removed
right side final drive assembly, first remove differen-
tial lock spring (39Fig. 119), clutch (40) and actu-
ating lever. For both right and left sides, remove snap
rings (4 and 11), then remove gears (3 and 14). Be
careful to remove and identify shims (13) to keep
them separate for installation in the same location.
Remove snap ring (8), then remove screws attaching
inner housing (22) to outer housing (20) or offset
spacer housing (37). Use a gear and shaft puller to
push inner end of shaft (19) from bearings. Note that
brake parts (BFig. 120), including the eight
steel balls can fall free when separating the
housings. Remove the brake parts as required. Re-
move axle housing seal cap (21Fig. 119) and lower
cover (38). Remove snap ring(16), gear (17) and shims
(15). Press reduction shaft (19) through bearing (18).
Bend tab of lockwasher (26) from nut (25), then
remove nut. Unbolt seal retainer cover (36), then
press axle shaft (23) from gear (24) and bearings (31 and
32). Remove bearings and seals from axle housing.
When assembling, gears, seal sleeves and spacer
collars should be pressed onto shafts until seated
against shoulder or snap ring. Add sufficient thick-
ness of shims (15) to limit clearance between gear (17)
and snap ring (16) to 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in.). Insert
reduction shaft (19), with bearing (18) and gear (17)
installed, through outside opening for cap (21).
Bearing (32) must be pressed from and onto axle
(23). Be sure to correctly install and lubricate seal
sleeve (34), "O" ring (35) and seal (33). Install inner
bearing (30), position gear (24) with boss of gear
toward outside, then install spacer collar (31) on
outside of gear boss. Apply a bead of "Loctite 515" or
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 190 (Cont.)

37

11

21

24'
Fig. 119Exploded view of rear axie and finai drive used on 265 modeis.
1. Snap ring
2. Cap 13. Shims (same as 15) 22. Inside reduction housing 31. Spacer collar
3. Drive pinion (24 teeth) 14. Reduction gear (52 teeth) 23. Axle shaft 32. Bearing
4. Snap ring 15. Shims (same as 13) 24. Final reduction gear 33. Oil seal
5. Differential assy. 16. Snap ring (85 teeth) 34. Seal sleeve
7. Bearing 17. Reduction pinion gear 25. Nut 35. "O" ring
8. Snap ring (22 teeth) 26. Lockwasher 36. Retainer cover
9. Right pinion shaft 18. Bearing 27. Oil seal 37. Right side spacer housing
10. Left pinion shaft 19. Reduction shaft 28. Seal sleeve 38. Lower cover
11. Snap ring 20. Outside housing 29. "O" ring 39. Spring
12. Bearing 21. Cap 30. Inner bearing 40. Differential lock clutch

equivalent seal(jr to housing flange for cover (36),
then press the axle (23) and preassembled parts
(32-36) into housing, spacer, bearing and gear.
Tighten screws retaining cover (36) to 30-42 N.m
(22-31 ft.-lbs.) torque. Install "O" ring (29) and seal
sleeve (28), then press oil seal (27) into housing bore.
Install lockwasher (26) and nut (25). Tighten nut (25)
to 49-59 N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque, then lock in place
with lockwasher- (26). Note that face of oil seal (27)
must be 1.0-2.0 mm (0.040-0.080 in.) past the inner
edge of chamfer on seal sleeve (28). If necessary, press
seal into axle housing to obtain specified installed
dimension. Apply a bead of "Loctite 515" or equivalent
sealer to housing flange for cover (38), then tighten
screws retaining cover (38) to 15-22 N.m (11-16 ft.-
lbs.) torque. Also apply "Loctite 515" or equivalent
sealer to cap (21) before installing.
To remove shaft (9 or 10) and bearing (7) from inner
housing(22), remove cap (2), remove snap ring(l) and
press shaft out toward inside. Remove snap ring (8)
and press bearing from housing if renewal is re-
quired.

113
Paragraph 191
Install brake parts (BFig. 120) in axle housing,
making sure eight actuator balls are positioned be-
tween ball guide plate and brake cam plate. The notch
in the brake cam plate must engage the pin on brake
lever arm. Install brake discs and plates alternately
over the reduction shaft (19), beginning with a fric-
tion disc. On right axle housing, apply bead of "Loctite
515" or equivalent sealer to housing mounting flange,
then install axle offset spacer housing (37Fig. 119)
and tighten mounting bolts to 55-75 Nm (41-55 fl.-
lbs.) torque. Apply bead of "Loctite 515" or equivalent
sealer to mounting flange of reduction housing (22).
Install reduction housing on offset spacer housing
(right side) or axle housing (left side) and tighten
mounting bolts to 55-75 N.m (41-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.
Place inner bearing (12Fig. 119) over reduction
shaft (19). Support outer end of reduction shaft, then
press bearing onto shaft until seated against housing.
Install gear (14) and snap ring (11), then measure
clearance between gear hub and snap ring. Remove
snap ring and install shim pack (13) thickness equal
to the measured gap. Assemble bearing (7) and snap
ring (1) on pinion shaft (9 or 10) with sharp edge of
snap ring toward end of shaft. Position shaft and
bearing in reduction housing and secure with snap
ring (8). Install gear (3) and snap ring (4). Install
differential lock lever and lock arm in right reduction
housing with sufficient thickness shims so that clear-
ance between differential lock arm and boss on out-
side of housing is 0.2-0.6 mm (0.008-0.023 in.).
Seal inner housing (22) to the center housing using
"Loctite 515" or equivalent. Install axle housing as-
sembly to center housing as outlined in paragraph
114
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
9 37
Fig, 120Cross section of finai drive
used on 265 modeis. Refer to Fig. 119
for iegend.
189. Tighten the lOM retaining screws to 30-42 N.m
(22-31 ft.-lbs.) torque and 12M screws to 55-75 N.m
(40-55 ft.-lbs.) torque.
275 Models
191, R&R ASSEMBLY. Drain fluid from torque
tube (pto clutch housing), range transmission (rear
axle center) housing and axle housings. Support rear
of tractor so that rear wheels clear the ground and
remove rear wheels. Detach wiring harness from
fender and center cover, then remove fenders and seat
assembly. Separate hydraulic control lever guide
from center cover (between fenders), then remove the
center cover. Remove knobs from shift levers, then
unbolt and remove side platform cover, front cover
and step plates. Release return springs from brake
and clutch pedals, then remove control rods. Remove
the three point hitch assembly and, then attach a
sling and hoist to the final drive and axle assembly.
Take up slack in hoist, but do not lift tractor. Remove
screws attaching the housing to the center housing,
then carefully pull assembly away from center hous-
ing. It may be necessary to use a hammer to break
the sealer bond and slide housing from dowel pins,
but make sure that all screws are removed. Also ixle
inner bearing (34Fig. 121) will be withdrawn with
axle and housing. The differential lock mechanism is
located on the right side.
Seal the final drive housing to the center housing
using "Loctite 515" or equivalent. Tighten the lOM
screws retaining axle and final drive housing to cen-
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraphs 192-195

Fig. 121Expioded view of rear axie and

finai drive used on 275 modeis. Refer aiso
to Fig. 117.
37 1. Cap 20. Tapered roller
2. Nut bearing
3. Tapered roller bearing 21. Seal sleeve
4. Snap ring 22. Oil seal
5. Spacer collar 23. Axle shaft
6. Final drive (bull) gear 24. Spacer
7. Tapered roller 29. "0" ring
bearing 30. "O" ring
8. Snap ring 31. Oil seal
10. Final drive shaft 32. Snap ring
& pinion 33. Collar
13. Lock plate (55 X 5 mm)
23 15. Adjuster 34. Tapered roller
16. Differential carrier bearing
bearing 35. Snap ring
17. Left bearing carrier 36. Nut
18. Left final drive 37. Rubber cap
& axle housing 38. Drop housing
19. Center housing cover

ter housing to 50-60 N.m (36-43 ft.-lbs.) torque and shaft (10), remove cap (37) and remove nut (36).
12M screws to 70-80 N.m (51-59 ft.-lbs.) torque. Bump shaft from bearing (7).

192. OVERIHAUL TD disassemble the removed
final drive, first remove the brake assembly from
inner end of pinion shaft (10Fig. 121). Remove
housing cover (38), cap (1) and nut (2). On some
models, nut is staked to shaft, while a locking tab
washer is used on other models. Push axle (23) out of
bearing (3), collar (5) and gear (6). TD remove pinion
When assembling, tighten bearing adjusting nuts
(2 and 36) until 0.79-0.98 N.m (7-8.6 in.-lbs.) torque
is required to turn the shafts. Lock position of nuts
after adjusting, then install caps (1 and 37). Apply a
bead of "Loctite 515" or equivalent sealer to housing
fiange for cover (38), then tighten screws retaining
the cover to 25-29 N.m (18-21 ft.-lbs.) torque.

BRAKES
OPERATION
All Models
193. Mechanically actuated, expanding shoe type
brakes are used on 235, 235H, 245 and 255 models.
Mechanically actuated, ball and ramp type, self ener-
gizing disc bralies are used on 265 and 275 models.
ADJUSTMENT
All Models
194. Operating linkage is similar for all models. To
adjust the brake for one side, turn adjuster on end of
brake rod until the pedal has the desired amount of
free play. Normally pedal free play should be 20-30
mm (0.70-1.18 in.). Brake for other side should be
adjusted so that brakes for both sides are applied
simultaneously when pedals are locked together.
R&R AND OVERHAUL
235, 235H, 245 And 255 Models
195. Disconnect brake rod from operating lever
(3Fig. 122 and Fig. 123), then unbolt and remove
cover (5). Inspect brake shoes (8) for worn lining
and/or oil contamination. Check operating lever for
freedom of movement and drum (2) for scoring. In-
stall new brake shoes if lining is less than 2.5 mm
(0.10 in.) thick. Brake drum can be resurfaced, but

115
Paragraph 196 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 122Cross section of brake as-

sembly typical of 235, 235H, 245 and
255 models. Refer to Fig. 123 for ex-
ploded view.

I
I

Fig. 123Exploded view of brake typical of

235, 235H, 245 and 255 models.
1. Snap ring 6. Snap ring
V'-. 2. Brake drum 7. Springs
3. Operating lever & cam 8. Brake shoes
4. "0" ring 9. Washer
5. Cover plate 10. Clip

inside diameter should not exceed 114.5 mm (4.508
in.) for 235 and 235H models or 125.7 mm (4.949 in.)
for 245 and 255 models.
265 Models
196. To remove the brake discs, refer to paragraph
189 and remove the final drive assembly. Separate
the outer housing (20Fig. 119) from the inner hous-
ing (22) on left side or spacer housing (37) on right
side. Refer to Fig. 120 for cross section and to Fig. 124
for exploded view. Remove brake components as nec-
essary.
Assemble brake and final drive with inner end of
pinion shaft up, so that brake parts will stay in
position until assembly is complete. Lubricate brake

116
MODELS 23i5, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 197

operating shaft. (8) before installing and make sure
that "O" ring (6) is in good condition or new. Tighten
ball guide mounting screws (13) to 30-42 N.m (22-31
ft.-lbs.) torque. Position balls (14) in pockets of ball
guide (12), then install cam plate (15) with notch
surrounding pin of lever (8). Alternate lined discs (16)
and steel separator plates (17). Install inner housing
(22Fig. 119) or spacer housing (37) before lowering
the final drive to normal horizontal position.

275 Models
14 197. To remove the brake discs, refer to paragraph
15 ^ and remove the final drive assembly. Separate
12
the final drive housing (18Fig. 125 and Fig. 126)
from the center housing. Remove brake components
as necessary.
Assemble brake and final drive with inner end of
pinion shaft up, so that brake parts will stay in
position until hub (19Fig. 126) and snap rings (20
and 21) are installed. Lubricate operating shaft (8)
before installing and make sure that "O" ring (6) is in
good condition or new. Ball guides (12) and cam plates
(15) are different for left and right sides. Refer to Fig.
127 for locations of "L" and "R" marks indicating
correct assembly of ball guides (12) and cam plates
(15). Tighten ball guide mounting screws (13Fig.
126) to 30-42 N.m (22-31 ft.-lbs.) torque. Position
balls (14) in pockets of ball guide (12), then install
Fig. 124Expioded view of disc braice used on 265 modei. cam plate (15) with notch surrounding pin of lever (8).
5. External lever Install hub (19), and snap ring (21), then alternate
6. "O" ring 13. Retaining screw lined discs (16) and steel separator plates (17). Install
7. Bushing 14. Steel balls snap ring (20) to retain discs and plates (16 and 17)
8. Arm & shaft 15. Cam plate
11. Dowel pins 16. Friction discs before lowering the final drive to normal horizontal
12. Ball guide 17. Steel plates position.

18

20

Fig. 125Cross section of finai drive

and braice used on 275 model.
5. External brake lever 19. Hub
14. Steel balls 20. Snap ring
18. Final drive housing 21. Snap ring

117
Paragraphs 198-200 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

18

Fig. 126Bxpioded view of disc braice used on 275 modei.

1. Brake pedals
2. Clutch pedal 7. Bushing 12. Ball guide 17. Steel plates
3. Left brake cross shaft 8. Arm & shaft 13. Retaining screw 18. Housing
4. Operating rod 9. Adjuster 14. Steel halls 19. Huh
5. External lever 10. Return spring 15. Cam plate 20. Snap ring
6. "O" ring 11. Dowel pins 16. Friction discs 21. Snap ring

Fig. 127Brai(e baii guides and cam piates (12 & 15) are
mariiedwith "L"and "R" in iocations indicated for correct
assembiy.

15L 15R
Front

POWER TAKE-OFF
198. Refer to the appropriate transmission sections
for service to the front drive shafts and gears of the
pto drives. The following paragraphs describe service
to the rearmost gears and shafts only. Service to the
multiple disc hydraulic clutch, available on some
models to provide live pto, is also described in the
appropriate transmission section.
235, 235H And 275 Models
199. Refer to paragraph 131 for service to the rear
pto gears and shafts for all 235 and 235H models.
Refer to the appropriate transmission section to serv-
ice other pto shafts.
Refer to paragraph 170 for service to the power
take-off rear shaft of 275 models.
245, 255 And 265 Models
200. Refer to Fig. 128A and Fig. 128B for exploded
and cross section views of the pto rear gears and
shafts. To remove the output shaft (9), first remove

118
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 201

Fig. 128AExpioded view of pto drive typicai of 245, 255 and 265 modeis. Stiaft and gear (33) are used for modeis witti
constant mesii transmission. Shaft (14) and gears (15 & 17) are used witti synciiromesh transmission.
1. Nut 11. Snap ring (same as 20. Rubber plug 28. Pto input shaft
2. Ball bearing 26, 27 & 35) 21. Ballbearing 29. Snap ring
3. Driven gear 12. Ball bearing 22. Overrunning clutch 30. Ball bearing
4. Spacer 13. Grooved thrust washer 23. Snap ring 31. Snap ring
5. Ball bearing 14. Input shaft (Synchro.) 24. Clutch shaft 32. Coupling
6. Shims 15. Gear (Synchro.) 25. "O" ring (30 mm) 33. Shaft & gear
7. Bushing 16. Shift collar (Synchro.) 26. Snap ring (same as (Constant mesh)
8. Oil seal 17. Gear (Synchro.) 11, 27 & 35) 34. Lockwasher
9. Output shaft 18. Needle bearing (Synchro.) 27. Snap ring (same as 35. Snap ring (same as
10. Shield 19. Ball bearing 11, 26 & 35) 11, 26 & 27)

the rockshaft housing from the top of transmission.
On model 265, unbolt and remove rear pto housing
from center housng. On all other models, unbolt and
remove shield (10Fig. 128A). Pry seal (8) from
housing bore, then remove snap ring (26). Bend tab
of lockwasher (34) from nut (1), then remove nut. Pull
output shaft (9) to rear and remove spacer (4) and
gear (3) as shaft is withdrawn. Remove bearings (2
and 5) as needed. The rear lower shaft (14 or 33) can
be removed ELfter removing output shaft. Remove
plug (20) and. snap ring (27), then pull shaft out
toward rear. Remove gears, bearings and shift cou-
pling as shaft is withdrawn.
Reassembly is reverse of removal procedure.
Grooves of thrust washers (13) should be toward
gears (15 ind 17). Lubricate all seals, "O" rings and
bearings before installation. Tighten nut (1) to 30-38
N.m (22-28 ft.-lbs.) torque. Apply "Loctite 515" or
equivalent sealer to outer case of seal (8) and cap (20)
before installing.
265 Model
201. OVERHAUL CENTER REAR PTO, Re-
move drain plug (6Fig. 129) and drain oil from pto
rear housing (2). Unbolt and remove rear pto unit
from rear ixle center housing. Remove end cover (3)
and bottom cover (5). Pry out plugs (7 and 20) and oil
seal (26). Remove snap ring (27), then press input
shaft (30) with bearing (28) rearward from housing.
Remove nut (8) and bump output shaft (19) rearward
from bearings and housing. Remove output gear (14)

119
Paragraph 201 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 128BCross section of pto

typicai of 245,255 and 265 modeis
with constant mesh transmission.

22 33

Fig. 129Expioded view of center rear pto

assembiy used on 265 modeis.
1. Oil fill cap
2. Pto housing 18. Oil seal
3. Cover 19. Output shaft
4. Oil level plug 20. Plug
5. Cover 21. Snap ring
6. Drain plug 22. Bearing
7. Plug 23. Countershaft
8. Nut 24. Counter gear (34T)
9. Lockwasher 25. Bearing
10. Washer 26. Oil seal
11. Snap ring 27. Snap ring
12. Bearing 28. Bearing
13. Bushing 29. Snap ring
14. Output gear (35T) 30. Input shaft
15. Bearing 31. Input gear (35T)
16. Spacer 32. Bearing
17. "O" ring 33. Oil seal

and bearings (12 and 15). Drive oil seal (18) from
housing. Remove snap ring (21), then countershaft
(22), gear (23) and bearings (21 and 24). Note that a
threaded hole is provided in end of countershaft to
facilitate the use of a puller to remove the counter-
shaft.
To reassemble pto unit, reverse disassembly proce-
dure while noting the following special instructions.
Assemble countershaft (23) so end of shaft with
threaded hole is toward opening in housing. Lubri-
cate "O" ring (17) and lip of oil seals (18, 26 and 33)
with petroleum jelly. Apply Loctite 515 sealer to outer

120
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
diameter of oil seals, then install flush with housing
outer surface. Tighten output shaft nut (8) to 30-40
N.m (22-29 ft.-lbs.) torque, then bend tab of lock-
washer (9) into notch of nut. Apply Loctite 515 sealant
to outer diameter of plugs (7 and 20), then install
HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM
The hydraulic system basically consists of an oil
reservoir (or sump), hydraulic pump, control valve lift
cylinder and lift- links. The hydraulic lift pump (1
Fig. 130, Fig. 131, Fig. 132, Fig. 133, Fig. 134, Fig.
135, Fig. 136, Fig. 137 or Fig. 138) is mounted on left
side of engine and is driven by engine timing gears
whenever the engine is running. The pump supplies
pressurized fluid for rockshaft control, remote control
valves and, on models so equipped, power steering
and the live pto hydraulic clutch. Some models are
equipped with a second, auxiliary pump (8Fig. 135,
Fig. 136, Fig. 137 or Fig. 138) moimted ahead ofthe
standard pump.
FLUID AND FILTERS
All Models
202. Oil used as operating fluid for the hydraulic
lift system is also used for the transmission, flnal
drive and rear axles. The transmission housing, rear
axle center housing and axle housings are used as the
reservoir to contain the hydraulic system operating
fluid. Oil level should be maintained between the
marks on the dipstick. The dipstick and fill plug are
located on top cif transmission in front of operator's
seat.
Fig. 130Hydraulic lines and components for 235 models
are located as shown.
1. Main hydraulic pump 3. Pressure line
2. Suction line 4. Suction screen (filter)
Paragraph 202
flush with housing. Apply thread sealant to threads
of oil level plug (4), drain plug (6) mounting screws
for end cover (3) and bottom cover (5). Fill housing
with CASE IH HY-TRAN PLUS FLUID or equivalent
to oil level plug (4) opening.
The manufacturer recommends that fluid and
filters be changed after the first 50 hours of operation
if new or rebuilt major components have been in-
stalled in the system. During normal service, fluid
and filters should be changed every 200 hours of
operation. Lower the lift arms before draining oil.
Refer to Fig. 131, Fig. 132, Fig. 133, Fig. 134, Fig. 135,
Fig. 136, 137 or Fig. 138 for location of filters and
other components. Oil is drained by removing plugs
located in the bottom of transmission and rear axle
center housing. Some models are equipped with only
one filter, but some models are equipped with one
suction screen (filter) and one canister t3^e filter. On
all models, all filters should always be serviced when
oil is drained and reservoir is filled with new oil. Refer
to the LUBRICATION paragraph in the appropriate
transmission section.
Fill system reservoir with "CASE IH HY-TRAN
PLUS" or equivalent fluid, then start engine. Some
Fig. 131Hydraulic lines and components for 235H (hy-
drostatic transmission) models are located as shown.
R Filler plug 6. Cartridge filter
1. Main hydraulic pump 7. Filter adapter
2. Suction line 8. Linefi"omfilterto oil cooler
3. Pressure line 9. Oil cooler
4. Suction screen (filter) 10. Linefiromcooler '
5. Line to filter 11. Line to inlet
121
 Paragraph 202 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 132-Hydraulic iines and components for 245 and 255

models with constant mesh transmission are iocated as
shown.
F. Filler plug
1. Main hydraulic pump 3. Pressure line
2. Suction line 4. Suction screen (filter)

Fig. 134Hydrauiic iines and components for 265 mod-

eis with constant mesh transmission and manuai steering
are iocated as shown.
1. Main hydraulic pump 3. Pressure line
2. Suction line 4. Suction filter (cartridge)

Fig. 135Hydrauiic iines and components for 265 modeis

with constant mesh transmission and power steering are
iocated as shown.
1. Main hydraulic pump 5. Power steering lines
2. Suction line 6. Hydraulic line
3. Pressure line 7. Suction line
4. Suction filter (cartridge) 8. Auxiliary pump
Fig. 133Hydrauiic iines and components for 245 and 255
modeis with synchromesh transmission are iocated as oil may remain in system when draining, so it is
shown, inset shows differences for modeis with manuai important to check level with dipstick when filling.
steering. Allow engine to run at idle while operating hydraulic
F. Filler plug controls and raising and lowering lift arms. Stop
1. Main hydraulic pump 6. Hydraulic line engine, lower three-point hitch, allow sufficient time
2. Suction line 7. Pressure line to valve for oil level to stabilize between compartments and
3. Pressure line 8. Line from valve
4. Suction screen (filter) 9. Control valve check fluid level. Tractor should be on level surface
5. Power steering lines 10. Flow divider valve when checking fluid level.

122
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 203

Fig. 136Hydrauiic iines and components for 265 modeis

with synctiromesh transmission and manuai steering are
iocated as shown.
1. Main hydraulic pump 7. Suction line
2. Suction line 8. Auxiliary pump
3. Pressure line 9. Control valve
4. Suction filter (cartridge) 10. Pressure line
6. Hydraulic line 11. Return line

f\Q^ 138Hydrauiic iines and components for 275 modei

with power steering are iocated as shown, inset shows
differences for modeis with manuai steering.
F. Filler plug 5. Power steering pressure line
1. Main hydraulic pump 7. Suction line
2. Suction Une 8. Auxiliary pump
3. Pressure line 9. Control valve
11 4. Suction filter (screen) 11. Return line

tion of the hydraulic lift system. All possible symp-

toms, causes and cures are not listed, so other causes
should not be overlooked.
1. NOT LIFTING could be caused by:
a. Faulty pump "O" ring, pump seal slipped out of
position or broken pump shaft.
b. Load is too heavy.
Fig. 137Hydrauiic iines and components for 265 modeis c. System relief valve set too low.
with synchromesh transmission and power steering are
iocated as shown. d. Rockshaft piston scored or seals leaking.
1. Main hydraulic pump 6. Hydraulic line
e. Control valve spring pin broken.
2. Suction line 7. Suction line f. Unloader valve stuck open.
3. Pressure line 8. Auxiliary pump
4. Suction filter (cartridge) 9. Control valve
2. SLOW OPERATION could be caused by:
5. Power steering 10. Pressure line a. Low pump pressure.
pressure line 11. Return line b. Faulty relief valve seat.
c. Clogged suction filter/strainer.
TROUBLESHOOTING d. Improperly adjusted relief valve.
3. LOWERS AT NEUTRAL SETTING could be
II Models caused by:
a. Faulty cylinder "O" ring.
203. The foUovdng lists some symptoms and possi- b. Faulty poppet valve.
ble cures for problems whicb may occur during opera- c. Faulty drop check valve.

123
 Paragraphs 204-205 CASE/INTERNATIONAL
4.WILL NOT LOWER WHEN CONTROL LEVER IS 245 And 255 Models
PLACED IN "DOWN" POSITION could be caused
by: 205. Aflowmeter can be used to check the general
a. Flow control valve out of adjustment. condition of the system. Connect flow meter to hy-
b. Improper control lever adjustment. draulic pump outlet line. Operate the engine at high
5. EXCESSIVELY HIGH OIL TEMPERATURE could idle speed, increase pressure to 8274 kPa (1200 psi)
be caused by: and observe the flow, which should be 15.6 L/minute
a. Faulty oil pump. (4.1 gpm).
b. Maladjusted or faulty relief valve.
c. Incorrectly adjusted hitch raise control linkage. To check relief pressure, remove Vg inch pipe plug
System in relief because control valve not re- from lift cover cylinder head and install a pressure
turning to neutral. gauge in opening. Start engine and move hitch con-
d. Hydraulic system operated extensively in relief trol valve lever past finger guard toward LIFT so that
while attempting to lift load that is too heavy. relief valve is actuated. With flow stopped, relief
valve should limit pressure to 13,749-14,238 kPa
e. System relief set too low.
(1994-2065 psi).
f. Leak in rockshaft cylinder or implement relief
valve. Relief valve (3Fig. 140) is located on left side of
g. Transmission oil cooler plugged. hydraulic lift cover. To change relief valve setting.
h. Oil cooler bypass valve stuck open.
i. Hydrostatic transmission (235H model) oper-
ated extensively in relief.
j . Tractor overloaded.
k. Pinched or restricted hydraulic line.
1. Improperly matched hydraulic component or
implement.
6. NOISY OPERATION could be caused by:
a. Hydraulic fluid low. Check and add fluid.
b. Improper type or viscosity ofhydrauiic fluid.
c. Suction pipe flttings leaking air.
d. Inlet restriction (usually clogged strainer).
e. Hydraulic pump seal leaking.
f. Pump mounting screws loose.
Hydraulic pump scored or worn.
h. Pump or drive worn or damaged.
i. Hydraulic lines not clamped properly.
j . Improperly adjusted hitch raise control linkage.

TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

235 And 235H Models 10

204. Aflowmeter can be used to check the general
condition of the system. Connect the flow meter to
11
hydraulic pump outlet line. Operate the engine at
high idle speed, increase pressure to 8274 kPa (1200
psi) and observe theflow,which should be 12.9 L/min- Fig. f 39Exploded view of hydraulic relief and control
ute (3.4 gpm). valve assembly used on 235 and 235H models.
Ib check relief pressure, remove pipe plug from lift 1. Hydraulic lift cover 14. Snap ring
2. "O" ring 15. Roll pin
cover cylinder head and install relief valve in cylinder 3. Support plate 16. Spool valve
head opening. Start engine and move hitch control 4. "O" ring 17. Relief/control
lever past finger guide toward LIFT so that relief 5. Cap valve housing
valve is actuated. With flow stopped, relief valve 6. Arm 18. "O" rings
7. Plate 19. Snap ring
should limit pressure to 13,237 kPa (1920 psi). 8. Return oil line 20. Relief valve adjuster screwj
To change relief valve setting, the lift cover (1Fig. 9. Relief/control valve 21. Relief valve spring
139) must be removed as outlined in paragraph 214. 10. Support 22. Relief valve spring seat
11. Support 23. Retainer ring
To adjust relief pressure, loosen locknut (12) and turn 12. LfOcknut 24. Ball
adjuster screw (20) in or out as required. 13. Lock plate 25. Stop valve

124
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 206

Fig, 140Expioded view of reiief vaive and

controi vaive assembiies used on 245 and 255
modeis. 265 modei is simiiar.
1. Hydraulic lift cover 19. Plug
2. "O" ring 20. Spool valve
3. Relief valve assy. 21. Return spring
4. Link 22. Unloader valve plug
5. Cotter pin 23. "O" ring
6. Valve link 24. Check valve
7. Pin 25. Check valve spring
8. Control valve 26. Control valve housing
9. "O" ring 27. "O" rings
10. Return oil pipe 28. Unloader valve
11. Lock plate 29. Spring
12. Relief valve 30. Check valve spring
housing 31. Plate
13. Plug 32. Plug
14. Housing 33. Plug
15. Poppet valve 34. Poppet valve
16. Relief valve spring 35. "O" ring
17. Shim pack 36. Backup ring
18. "O" ring 37. "O" rings

Fig. 142Direct air into port (A) when checking the con-
troi vaive adjustment Refer to text for proper response.

spring (29) while leaving unloader valve poppet (28)

in bore. Refer to Fig. 141 and set distance (S) to 10
mm (0.40 in.) by inserting spacer (or nuts of appro-
priate thickness) between plate and housing. Air
Fig. 141^Refer to text for adjusting the controi vaive pressure applied to port (AFig. 142) should exit
assembiy. from port (B) when a 0.30 mm (0.012 in.) feeler gauge
B. Port N. Douhle nuts (GFig. 141) is inserted between plate (P) and double
C. Port P Plate nuts (N). When a 0.60 mm (0.024 in.) feeler gauge is
G. Insert test gauge here S. Setting gap inserted at (G), air pressure applied to port (AFig.
142) should either be stopped or exit from port (C). If
remove plug (!L9) and change thickness of shim pack movement by inserting the feeler gauges does not
(17) as required. direct air from the ports as indicated, adjust position
of the double nuts (NFig. 141), then recheck. Lock
206. Control valve (8Fig. 140) is located under setting of nuts (N) when finished by tightening to-
the lift cover (1) which must be removed for access to gether, then staking the outer nut. Tighten unloader
the valve. Reraove the unloader valve plug (32) and valve plug (32Fig. 140) to 69-88 N.m (51-65 ft.-lbs.)

125
Paragraphs 207-209
torque and check valve plug (22) to 49-69 N.m (36-51
ft.-lbs.) torque when assemhling.
Position of the control valve fork (6Fig. 143)
should be adjusted after attaching the control valve
to the lift housing. Move the position control lever as
necessary to make link (4) vertical, then measure
distance between the lever pin (L) and pin (7). Correct
distance is 12.5-13 mm (0.49-0.51 in.) and is adjusted
by moving fork (6) up or down as necessary, then
tightening position locking nut (N) at end of spool
valve (20). Install lift control housing when finished.
207. The drop rate control knob is attached to valve
screw (2Fig. 144). Turning this knob clockwise
.20
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
should slow the speed of lowering. Since the rate of
lowering also depends upon weight of the implement,
the knob should be set to permit appropriate setting
within the operating range.
To adjust, attach implement to three-point hitch
linkage and move the position control lever to
"Lower" Start engine, raise implement, then stop
engine. Loosen nut retaining stop bar (1Fig. 144),
turn the stem of valve (2) until it is bottomed, then
position stop bar (1) so that it contacts the stop pin
and tighten retaining nut. Recheck to be sure that
hitch operates properly.
208. Rod (RFig. 145) connects the three-point
hitch lift arm to the control linkage. Lift arms should
have 5-15 mm (0.2-0.6 in.) free play when arms are
fully raised. If play is excessive, loosen locknut (N),
turn rod (R) counterclockwise, then recheck. If arms
do not have free play, turn rod clockv^dse. Tighten
locknut when rod is properly adjusted.

265 Model
209. A fiow meter can be connected to hydraulic
adapter block ports to check the main hydraulic
pump flow and pressure. Flow meter must be con-
nected to the auxiliary pump outlet line to check
auxiliary pump flow and pressure. Operate the en-
gine at high idle speed and observe the volume of fiow,
which should be 17.4 L/minute (4.6 gpm) for the main
Fig. 143Cross-sectional drawing of control valve fork
showing adjustment setting (A). hydraulic pump and 7.1 L/minute (1.88 gpm) for the
L. Lever pin
aizxiliary pump. Increase restriction and observe vol-
6. Fork
N. Nut 7. Fork pin ume of fiow. Flow should be within ten percent of
4, Valve link 20. Control valve unloaded volume until just before relief valve open-

Fig. 144Expioded view of hy-

draulic iift cover.
1. Stop bar
2. Drop speed valve screw
3. Snap ring
4. Washer
5. Washer
6. Union
7. "O" ring
8. "O" ring
9. "O" ring
10. Ball
11. Spring
12. Plug
13. Plug
14. Cylinder head
15. "O" ring
16. "O" ring
17. Cylinder sleeve
18. "O" ring
19. Hydraulic lift cover
20. Bellcrank
21. Pin
22. Connecting rod
23. Piston
24. Backup ring
25. "O" ring

126
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275
ing. Relief valve should limit pressure to 15,000-
15,500 kPa (2106-2176 psi) for the main hydraulic
system, 15,000 iLPa (2106 psi) for the power steering
system. Hydraulic clutch disengage pressure should
be 4500-6500 kla (653-943 psi).
Relief valve (12Fig. 140) for the main hydraulic
system is located on left side of hydraulic lift cover.
Tb change relief valve setting, remove plug (19) and
change thickness of shim pack (17) as required.
Refer to paragraph 206 for checking and adjusting
the hitch control valve and to paragraph 207 for
setting the drop rate valve.
210. Rod (RFig. 146) connects the three-point
hitch lift arm to the control linkage. Lift arms should
have 10-20 mm (0.4-0.8 in.) free play (P) when arms
are fully raised. If play is excessive, loosen locknut
(N), turn rod (R) coiinterclockwise, then recheck. If
Paragraphs 210-211
Fig. 145Drawing of the hydrauiic con-
trol linkage for 245 and 255 models.
Fig. 146Adjust iength of rod (R) to
provide proper iift arm free piay (P).
arms do not have free play, turn rod clockwise.
Tighten locknut when rod is properly adjusted.
275 Model
211. A flow meter can be connected to hydraulic
block or auxiliary valve ports, if so equipped, or to
main pump outlet line to check the main hydraulic
pump flow and pressure. Flow meter must be con-
nected to the auxiliary pump outlet line to check
auxiliary pump flow and pressure. Operate the en-
gine at high idle speed and observe the volume of flow,
which should be 19.2 L/minute (5.07 gpm) for the
main hydraulic pump and 7.1 L/minute (1.88 gpm) for
the auxiliary pump.
Relief valve should limit pressure to 15,000-15,500
kPa (2106-2176 psi)
127
Paragraphs 212-213
13
12
Relief valve housing (12Fig. 147) for the main
hydraulic system is located on right side of hydraulic
lift cover (1). Tb change relief valve setting, remove
plug (19) and change thickness of shim pack (17) as
required.
Refer to paragraph 206 for checking and adjusting
the hitch control valve and to paragraph 207 for
setting the drop rate valve.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
All Models
212. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the
engine mounted, gear tj^e hydraulic pump, position
pan under pump, then detach inlet and outlet lines
from pump. Remove screws attaching hydraulic
pump to timing gear housing, then carefully remove
128
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Fig. i47Expioded view of reiief vaive
and controi vaive assembiies used on
275 modeis.
1. Hydraulic lift cover
2. "O" ring
8. Control valve
12. Relief valve housing
13. Plug
14. Housing
15. Poppet valve
16. Relief valve spring
17. Shim pack
18. "O" ring
19. Plug
pump. Procedure is the same for hoth main pump and
auxiliary pump if so equipped.
Clean sealer from pump and mounting surface.
Installation is reverse of removal procedure. Side of
pump marked "INLET" must be toward top and new
"O" rings must be used on both inlet and outlet sides
of pump. After installing new or rebuilt pump, it is
suggested to operate the pump without load, with
engine idling, for about 30 minutes, then increase
speed and load. During this break-in, check pump
periodically for any abnormally high temperature.
213. OVERHAUL. Clean the exterior of removed
pump before disassembling. Secure drive shaft in a
soft jawed vise, with pump mounting flange down.
Remove retaining screws and washers, tap cover
(5Fig. 148 or Fig. 149) lightly, then carefully lift
cover from pump. Mark teeth of gears (6 and 7) to
assist alignment when reassembling, then carefully
MODELS 23fi, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 213 (Cont.)

Fig. 148Exploded view of hydrauiic

pump typicai of type used on some
modeis. Refer to Fig. 149 for other type
used.
2. Oil seal
3. Housing & flange
It 5. Cover
t2 6. Drive shaft & gear
13 7. Driven gear
8. "O" rings
9. Bushings
10. Bushings
11. "O" rings
12. "O" rings
13. "O" ring

Fig. 149Expioded view of hydrauiic

pump used on some modeis. Refer to
Fig. 148 for other type used.
1. Snap ring
2. Oil seal
3. Flange housing
4. Gear plate
5. Cover
6. Drive shaft & gear
7. Driven gear
8. Pump seal
9. Gasket
10. Pump gasket
13 11. Plate
12. Seal
13. "O" ring
12 14. Dowel pins

129
Paragraph 214
disassemble pump. Clean all parts carefully and in-
spect each part for wear or damage.
On models with pump shown in Fig. 148, lubricate
seal (2) and press into mounting flange (3). Press
bushings (9) into body (3) with widest part of bushing
toward side of body which has hole and "O" ring (13).
The widest side of bushing is determined by gap
between bushing bore and groove for "O" rings (8).
Lubricate gears and shafts (6 and 7), then insert in
pump body. Install bushings (10) with widest part
toward side of body which has "O" ring (13), then
install "O" rings (11, 12 and 13). Install cover (5) and
tighten retaining screws.
On models with pump shown in Fig. 149, lubricate
seal (2) before installing in mounting flange (3), then
install snap ring (1). Lubricate balance seal (8) and
install in mounting flange, then install the 0.5 mm
(0.020 in.) inner gasket (9), followed by 1.5 mm (0.060
in.) thick outer gasket (10). Balance seal and gaskets
can be pressed into mounting flange together using a
flat board and vise. Install dowel pins (14) and gear
plate (4), then install side plate (11) with copper side
out. Lubricate side plate and gears, then install gears
(6 and 7) with marks installed before removing
aligned. Coat side plate (12) with oil and install over
gears with copper side down. Stick new "O" ring (13)
in groove of cover (5), lubricate bushings and install
cover (5).
On all models, tighten the cover retaining screws,
then check to be sure the pump turns smoothly. If
pump drive shaft can not be turned smoothly, disas-
semble and correct cause before installing. It is sug-
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
gested that new or rebuilt pump be operated without
load, with engine idling, for about 30 minutes, before
increase speed and load. During this break-in, check
pump periodically for any abnormally high tempera-
ture.
LIFT COVER
All Models
214. REMOVE AND REINSTALL, 1b remove the
hydraulic lift cover, flrst remove the three-point hitch
linkage. Detach the battery ground cable, disconnect
rear lights and other electrical wiring, then relocate
the rear wiring harness out of the way. Remove the
seat, fenders and step plates, then remove hydraulic
lines, hoses and suction tubes which would interfere
with removal ofthe flnal drive housings or rockshaft
housing. Unbolt lift cover (10Fig. 150, Fig. 151, Fig.
152 or Fig. 153) from center housing of all models,
then carefully raise the cover straight up, away from
tractor.
Install lift cover by reversing removal procedure.
Apply a bead of "Loctite 515" or equivalent sealer to
center housing and lift cover mating surfaces, then
tighten lift cover retaining screws to 61-70 N-m (45-
52 ft.-lbs.) torque. Tighten screws attaching the top
link mounting bracket to 120-135 N.m (89-99 ft.-lbs.)
torque.

F/g. 15QExploded view of hydraulic Hit cover

for 235 and 235H modeis.
1. Screw 13. Piston rod
2. Right side lift arm 14. Piston
3. Spacer 15. Backup ring
4. Washer 16. Seal ring (50 mm)
5. Bushing 19. "O" ring
6. Rockshaft 20. Retaining ring
8. Bellcrank 21. Washer (1/4 X
10. Hydraulic lift cover 35/64 X 3/64 in.)
11. Left lift arm 22. Spring
12. Cotter pin 23. Ball (7/16 in.)
(5 X 50 mm) 24. "O" ring
26. "O" ring (7 mm)
27. "O" ring (20 mm)
29. Adjuster screw
31. Spring washer
32. Stop
33. Locknut
34. Knob
41. Control arm
47. Cylinder cover

130
MODELS 235, 235H, 245, 255, 265 & 275 Paragraph 214 (Cont.)

Fig. 151Expioded view of hydrauiic iift cover

for 245 and 255 models.
1. Snap ring 9. Lock screw
2. Right side lift arm 10. Hydraulic lift cover
3. Spacer 11. Left lift arm
4. "O" ring 13. Piston rod
5. Bushing 14. Piston
6. Rockshaft 15. Backup ring
7. Vent tube 16. Seal ring (60 mm)
8. Bellcrank 17. Bushing
18. Pivot pin
19. "O" ring
20. Retaining ring
21. Washer
( 1 3 x 2 4 x 3 mm)
22. Spring
23. Ball (7/16 in.)
24. "O" ring
25. Shock valve
29. Adjuster screw
30. Sleeve
31. Spring washer
32. Stop
33. Locknuts
34. Knob
43. Cylinder
46. Backup ring
47. Cylinder cover

29

Fig, 152^Exploded view of hydrauiic lift cover for 265 model.

1. Snap ring 33. Locknuts
2. Right side lift arm 13. Piston rod 23. Ball (11 mm) 34. Knob
3. Spacer 14. Piston 24. "O" ring 35. Bushings
4. "O" ring 15. Backup ring 25. Shock valve 36. Rockshaft support
5. Bushing 16. Seal ring (60 mm) 26. "O" ring (6 mm) 37. Shims
6. Rockshaft 17. Bushing 27. "O" ring (10 mm) 38. Oil seal
7. Vent tube 18. Pivot pin 28. "O" ring (14 mm) 39. Support arm
8. Bellcrank 19. "0" ring 29. Adjuster screw 40. Special screw wAocknut
9. Lock screw 20. Retaining ring 30. Sleeve 43. Cylinder
10. Hydraulic lift cover 21. Washer (13 x 24 x 3 mm) 31. Spring washer 46. Backup ring
11. Left lift arm 22. Spring 32. Stop 47. Cylinder cover

131
Paragraphs 215-216 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Fig. 153Expioded view of hydrauiic iift cover typicai of 275 models.

F. Filler cap
1. Snap ring 9. Lock screw 22. Spring 31. Spring washer
2. Right side lift arm 10. Hydraulic lift cover 23. Ball (7/16 in.) 32. Stop
3. Spacer (12 mm) 11. Left lift arm 24. "O" ring (14 mm) 33. Locknuts
3A. Spacer (5 mm) 13. Piston rod 25. Shock valve assy. 34. Knob
4. "O" ring 14. Piston 26. "O" ring (6 mm) 42. Cylinder retaining screw,
5. Bushing 15. Backup ring 27. "O" ring (10 mm) lockwasher & flat washer
6. Rockshaft 16. Seal ring (60 mm) 28. **0" ring (14 mm) 43. Cylinder
7. Vent tube 17. Bushing 29. Adjuster screw 45. Cover support
8. Bellcrank 18. Pivot pin 30. Sleeve 47. Plate

215. OVERHAUL. The lift arm shaft of 265 models
is offset to the right, but is otherwise similar to other
models. 1b remove the lift arms and shaft, remove
screw (1Fig. 150) or snap ring (1Fig. 151, Fig. 152
or Fig. 153), then pull lift arms (2 and 11Fig. 151,
Fig. 151, Fig. 152 or Fig. 153) from shaft (6). Discon-
nect piston rod (13) from bellcrank (8). Remove set-
screw (if used) from bellcrank. Push the lift shaft (6)
out of lift cover and remove bellcrank. On all tractors
except 275 models, remove cylinder cover (47) and
push piston (14) out of cylinder. Lift cylinder (43
Fig. 151 and Fig. 152) is renewable on 245, 255 and
265 models. On 275 models, cylinder (43Fig. 153)
and piston can be removed after removing cylinder
retaining bolts (42). Remainder of disassembly and
overhaul procedures will be evident after examina-
tion of unit and reference to appropriate illustration
(Fig. 150, Fig. 151, Fig. 152 or Fig. 153).
On all models, align punch marks on lift arms (2
and 11) and bellcrank (8) with marked splines of shaft
(6) when assembling.
AUXILIARY VALVE
All Models
216. An auxiliary valve kit is available for operat-
ing remote hydraulic cylinders. If so equipped, the
valve is located between lift cover and cap (5Fig.
139), relief valve system (3Fig. 140) or housing
(HFig. 147). Individual parts of the remote valve
are not available and valve should not be disassem-
bled. If damaged, install new remote control valve
assembly.

132